B. TECH.

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

(Duration: 4 Years)
CURRICULUM and SYLLABUS

(Applicable for Students admitted from Academic Year 2018-19)

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL SCIENCES
HINDUSTAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCE
 HINDUSTAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCE

Motto:
To Make Every Man a Success and No Man a Failure

Vision:
To be an International Institute of Excellence, providing a conducive environment for
education with a strong emphasis on innovation, quality, research and strategic
partnership blended with values and commitment to society.

Mission:
 To create an ecosystem that promotes learning and world class research.
 To nurture creativity and innovation.
 To instill highest ethical standards and values.
 To pursue activities for the development of the Society.
 To develop national and international collaborations with institutes and industries of
eminence.
 To enable graduates to become future leaders and innovators.

Value Statement:
Integrity, Innovation, Internationalization.

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VISION AND MISSION

VISION
To be a premier academic centre for quality education to meet the industrial standards and
research in diverse areas of Electronics and Communication Engineering with social
commitment.
MISSION

 To impart adequate engineering knowledge to transform students into highly

professional engineers as well as good researchers.
 To develop their interdisciplinary skills as per the need of the industry and society.
 To inculcate Entrepreneurship and life long learning skills among the students with
ethics and social commitment.

2
 B. Tech. Electronics and Communication Engineering
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)

PEO I Graduates will be nurtured to become successful professionals suitable for

cutting - edge communication technologies to meet the societal needs.
PEO II Graduates will exhibit creative multidisciplinary skills to cater the needs of
digital revolution through industry enhanced training and design projects.
PEO III Graduates will focus towards sustainable electronic product development
with entrepreneurship skills through ethical attitude and effective
collaborative learning practices.
PEO IV Graduates will conduct problem-solving investigations on issues and
concerns in the emerging areas of electronics and communication engineering.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (ALIGNED WITH GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES) (PO)

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (PO)

PO 1: Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,
engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of
complex engineering problems.
PO 2: Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles
of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO 3: Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified
needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the
cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
PO 4: Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge
and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and
interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions.
PO 5: Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,
resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and
modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the
limitations.
PO 6: Engineer and Society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge
to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
PO 7: Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional
engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate
the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.

3
PO 8: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
PO 9: Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a
member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO 10: Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities
with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able
to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make
effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
PO 11: Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these
to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and
in multidisciplinary environments.
PO 12: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and
ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context
of technological change.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSO)

PSO 1 Able to analyze and design the advanced Communication and Digital
Systems.

PSO 2 Able to analyze, design and validate the systems using hardware and
software tools pertaining to VLSI and Signal Processing.

4
 B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
(165 CREDIT STRUCTURE)
SEMESTER - I
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
Engineering Graphics And Computer
MEA4101/
1 BS Aided Design / Professional English 1 1 2 3 2 4
ELA4101
and Soft Skills
2 BS MAA4101 Matrices and Calculus 3 0 2 4 2 5
PHA4102/ Engineering Physics / Engineering
3 BS 3 0 0 3 2 3
CYA4101 Materials
4 BS CSA4101 Problem Solving Using C 2 0 2 3 2 4
5 PC EEB4101 Introduction to Digital Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 BS GEA4131 Engineering Immersion Lab 0 0 2 0.5 1 2
PHA4131/ Engineering Physics Lab / Materials
7 BS 0 0 2 1 2 2
CYA4131 Chemistry Lab
Total 12 1 10 17.5 12 23
SEMESTER - II
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4117 Analytical Mathematics 3 0 2 4 0 5
PHA4102/ Engineering Physics / Engineering
2 BS 3 0 0 3 1 3
CYA4101 Materials
Engineering Graphics And Computer
MEA4101/E
3 BS Aided Design / Professional English and 1 1 2 3 1 4
LA4101
Soft skills
4 PC ECB4101 Engineering and Design 2 0 2 3 0 4
5 PC ECB4116 Digital System Design 3 1 0 4 0 4
6 PC ECB4117 Network Theory 3 1 0 4 0 4
7 BS GEA4102 Sustainable Engineering Systems 2 0 0 2 1 2
8 PC ECB4141 Digital System Design Lab 0 0 2 1 0 2
9 BS GEA4131 Engineering Immersion Lab 0 0 2 0.5 0 2
PHA4131/ Engineering Physics Lab/ Materials
10 BS 0 0 2 1 0 2
CYA4131 Chemistry Lab
Total 17 3 12 25.5 3 32

5
 SEMESTER - III
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
Partial Differential Equations and
1 BS MAA4201
Transforms 3 0 2 4 1 5
2 PC ECB4201 Analog Electronics 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4202 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 3 1 0 4 2 4
4 BS GEA4216 Professional Ethics and Life Skills 2 0 0 2 1 2
5 DE *** Department Elective-I 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE *** Non Department Elective- I 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4231 Analog Electronics Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC ECB4232 Circuits Simulation Lab 0 0 2 1 0 2
9 PC ECB4233 Design Project - I 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 16 2 9 22 8 27
SEMESTER - IV
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4218 Random Process 3 0 2 4 1 5
2 PC ECB4216 Transmission Lines and Networks 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4217 Signals and Systems 3 1 0 4 1 4
Microcontrollers and Embedded
4 PC ECB4218 3 0 0 3 1 3
Systems
5 DE *** Department Elective-II 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE *** Non Department Elective–II 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4241 MATLAB and Simulink Lab 0 0 2 1 0 2
Microcontrollers and Embedded
8 PC ECB4242 0 0 3 1 0 3
Systems Lab
9 PC ECB4243 Design Project - II 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 17 2 9 23 7 28
SEMESTER - V
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4301 Optimization Techniques 3 1 0 4 1 4
2 PC ECB4301 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4302 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 PC ECB4303 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4 1 4
5 DE *** Department Elective-III 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE *** Non Department Elective–III 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4331 Communication Systems Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC ECB4332 Digital Signal Processing lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC ECB4333 Design Project -III 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 17 3 8 23 7 28
SEMESTER - VI
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC ECB4316 Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
2 PC ECB4317 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 PC ECB4318 Antenna and Wave Propagation 3 1 0 4 1 4
4 PC ECB4319 Wireless Communication systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 BS GEA4304 Business Economics 2 0 0 2 1 2
6 DE *** Department Elective-IV 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 NE *** Non Department Elective–IV 2 0 0 2 1 2
8 PC ECB4341 Computer Networks Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC ECB4342 Design Project -IV 0 0 2 1 1 2
10 PC ECB4343 Comprehension 1 0 0 1 1 1
Total 20 1 5 23 9 26
SEMESTER – VII
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC ECB4401 VLSI Design Techniques 3 1 0 4 1 4
2 PC ECB4402 RF and Microwave Engineering 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4403 Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 1 3
Machine Learning and Artificial
4 PC ECB4404 3 1 0 4 1 4
Intelligence
5 DE *** Department Elective –V 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE *** Non Department Elective-V 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4431 VLSI Design Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC ECB4432 Microwave and Optical Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC ECB4433 Design Project - V 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 17 3 8 23 7 28
SEMESTER – VIII
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC ECB4441 Project and Viva – voce 0 0 24 8 11 24
Total 0 0 24 8 11 24
Total 165

2
 LIST OF DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES WITH GROUPING - SEMESTER WISE
COURSE COURSE
SEM NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
CATEGORY CODE
3 DE ECC4251 Logic system design with VHDL 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 DE ECC4252 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 DE ECC4253 Instrumentation Engineering 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 DE ECC4254 Microprocessor and Applications 3 0 0 3 1 3
An Introduction to Programming the
3 DE ECC4255 3 0 0 3 1 3
Internet of Things (IOT)
Data Structures and Algorithms using
3 DE ECC4256 3 0 0 3 1 3
C
3 DE ECC4257 Circuit Simulation Using Pspice 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4266 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4267 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4268 Nano Electronic and Devices 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4269 Robotics and Control 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4270 Programming with LabView 3 0 0 3 1 3
Object Oriented Programming Using
4 DE ECC4271 3 0 0 3 1 3
C++
Digital Design Using Basys3 and
4 DE ECC4272 3 0 0 3 1 3
Nexsys4 DDR FPGA Board
5 DE ECC4351 Virtual and Augmented Reality 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 DE ECC4352 Embedded Automotive Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 DE ECC4353 Advanced Microprocessors 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 DE ECC4354 Pattern recognition 3 0 0 3 1 3
System Design Using Raspberry Pi
5 DE ECC4355 3 0 0 3 1 3
Processor
Image Signal Processing Using
5 DE ECC4356 3 0 0 3 1 3
MATLAB
6 DE ECC4366 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4367 Information Coding Techniques 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4368 Wireless Adhoc Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4369 Digital Telephone Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4370 Speech Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4371 Radar Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4372 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4373 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 3 0 0 3 1 3
Python Programming for Real-World
6 DE ECC4374 3 0 0 3 1 3
Task
7 DE ECC4451 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3

3
7 DE ECC4452 Software Defined Radio 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4453 High Speed Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4454 Remote Sensing 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4455 Opto Electronic Devices 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4456 Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3 1 3
Advanced Mobile Communication
7 DE ECC4457 3 0 0 3 1 3
Technology
Embedded C For 8051 and ARM Using
7 DE ECC4458 3 0 0 3 1 3
Keil Microversion

4
 LIST OF NON DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES OFFERED BY ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
DEPARTMENT WITH GROUPING - SEMESTER WISE
COURSE COURSE
SEM NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
CATEGORY CODE
3 NE ECD4281 Basics Of Communication Systems 2 0 0 2 1 2
3 NE ECD4282 Fundamentals Of Matlab Programming 2 0 0 2 1 2
Fundamentals Of Bluetooth
3 NE ECD4283 2 0 0 2 1 2
Technology
Basics Of Neural Networks and Fuzzy
3 NE ECD4284 2 0 0 2 1 2
Logic
4 NE ECD4291 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 2 0 0 2 1 2
Fundamentals Of Microprocessors and
4 NE ECD4292 2 0 0 2 1 2
Microcontrollers
4 NE ECD4293 IOT Based Health Care Systems 2 0 0 2 1 2
5 NE ECD4381 Mobile Communication Engineering 2 0 0 2 1 2
5 NE ECD4382 Introduction to Data Communication 2 0 0 2 1 2
Introduction to Arduino and Its
5 NE ECD4383 2 0 0 2 1 2
Applications
5 NE ECD4384 Machine Learning 2 0 0 2 1 2
5 NE ECD4387 Matlab Programming for Engineers 2 0 0 2 1 2
Image Processing and Pattern
6 NE ECD4391 2 0 0 2 1 2
Recognition
6 NE ECD4392 Radar and Optical Communication 2 0 0 2 1 2
Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor
6 NE ECD4393 2 0 0 2 1 2
Networks
Project Planning and Organization for
6 NE ECD4397 2 0 0 2 1 2
Engineers
7 NE ECD4481 Fundamentals of SDR 2 0 0 2 1 2
Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID)
7 NE ECD4482 2 0 0 2 1 2
and Its Applications
Modern Wireless Communication
7 NE ECD4483 2 0 0 2 1 2
Systems
7 NE ECD4484 Introduction to Sensor Technology 2 0 0 2 1 2

5
 SEMESTER I
COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH AND SOFT SKILLS CREDITS 3
COURSE
COURSE CODE ELA4101 HS L-T-P-S 2-0-2-1
CATEGORY
24 ACM
LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details 30th May BTL- 3
LEVEL
2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Second Seminar/
First Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course has been designed to meet students' current and future language and
communication needs. It attempts to develop their proficiency in the four language
Course
skills and knowledge of grammar and vocabulary. This course teaches students how to
Description
communicate accurately, appropriately and fluently in professional and social
situations.
1. To acquire self-confidence by which the learner can improve upon their informative
listening skills by an enhanced acquisition of the English language.
2. To provide an environment to Speak in English at the formal and informal levels and
use it for daily conversation, presentation, group discussion and debate.
3. To equip the students to Read, comprehend and answer questions based on literary,
Course scientific and technological texts.
Objective 4. To enhance the writing skills of the students via training in instructions,
recommendations, checklists, process-description, letter-writing and report
writing.
5. To equip the learners in analysing and applying creative thinking skills and
participate in brainstorming, mind-mapping, audiovisual activities and excel in
employability skills.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Demonstrate the ability to construct the grammatically correct sentences with
accuracy and syntax structures.
2. Integrate various components of English Language and determining it through
reading and listening.
Course
3. Analyze and transcode data, construct different types of written essays, read
Outcome
complex passages and summarize ideas, create personal profiles in the form of a
resume.
4. Organize and articulate ideas, concepts, and perceptions in a comprehensive
manner in written business correspondence, and speaking in formal and informal
situations.
 5. Infer details about presentation skills and implementing it in various professional
situations.
Prerequisites: Plus Two English-Intermediate Level
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 1 1
CO-2 - - - - - - - 2 2 3 - - 1 1
CO-3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 1 1
CO-4 - - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1 1
CO-5 - - - - - - - - 2 3 2 3 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: FUNCTIONAL GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY (6L + 6P=12)
Introduction to communication skills –Self Introduction - Basic grammar (tenses, subject
verb agreement) - Basic vocabulary (prefixes , suffixes, synonyms & antonyms, phrasal
verbs and idioms)- Topic sentences , paragraph writing
Suggested Activities:
Short conversations-Situational Communication-Dialogue Writing - Writing short
paragraph based on environment protection, societal issues, health, cultural contexts CO-1
etc., identifying topic sentences, linking pairs of sentences. BTL-2
Suggested Reading:
1. Dr. Bikram K. Das et al.(2009) An Introduction to Professional English and Soft Skills
with audio CD, Cambridge University Press.
2. John, Dolly(2014), English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T Skills, Pearson
Publications.
MODULE 2 – LISTENING AND SPEAKING SKILLS (6L + 6P=12)
Academic listening (listening to lectures different topics, audio excerpts and answering
question) - General listening (conversations, speeches: formal and informal) - Giving
instructions and suggestions- Active and Passive Voice
Suggested activities:
Listen and repeat, Listening to audio excerpts- Listening to native speakers - TED Talks,
short prepared speeches, Table topics – Speaking in different situations- MCQ’s - Cloze
exercises- Complete the Dialogue
CO-2
Suggested sources:
BTL-3
1. Bommelje, R. (2011). LISTEN, LISTEN, LISTEN. In The top 10 ways to strengthen your
self- leadership. International Listening Leadership Institute. Retrieved from
http://www.listening leaders.com/Articles.html
2. Hoppe, M. H. (2006). Active listening: Improve your ability to listen and lead [ebook].
Greensboro, NC: Center for Creative Leadership.
3. Barnes, D. (2008) Exploratory talk for learning in Mercer, N. and Hodgkinson, S. (eds)
Exploring Talk in School. London: Sage Publications

2
MODULE – 3 : FUNCTIONAL READING AND WRITING (6L+ 6P=12)
Reading comprehension (academic texts and general texts)-Reading and Interpreting
visual data, charts, tables and graphs-- Report writing- accident, industrial, survey,
general reports –Direct and Indirect speech
Suggested Activities:
Identify the errors in sentences, grammar exercise, reading passage for identifying the CO-3
contextual meaning, interpreting charts, tables and graphs, choose the right meaning of BTL-3
the word given
Assignment on suggested reading activity – Book review
Suggested sources:
1. Murphy, Raymond (2016) Essential English Grammar, Cambridge University Press.
MODULE – 4 : BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE (6L + 6P=12)
Memo-Notice - Agenda – Minutes of the Meeting-Action Taken report- Report Writing-
Connectives - Cause and effect
Suggested activities:
Drafting agenda, notice, memo, minutes of the meeting- ATR- Cause and effect exercises
CO-4
- Presentation in the language lab (Technical or Non-technical topic)
BTL-4
Suggested sources:
1. Bailey, E. (2008). Writing and speaking. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
2. Maynard-Smith, Julian. (2021), Ultimate Guide to Business Writing, All the Secrets of
Creating and Managing Business Documents, Routledge.
MODULE 5 – PRESENTATION SKILLS AND INTERVIEW SKILLS (6L + 6P=12)
Presentation Skills - Reading and Interpreting Advertisements—Job Application-
Covering Letter -Curriculum Vitae –E-mail - Project proposal –Interview skills (HR
questions) – Group Discussion
Suggested Activities: CO-5
Presentation in the language lab (Technical or Non-technical topic) BTL-4
Group Discussion (Technical or Non-technical topic)
Suggested Sources:
1. Manoharan. K(2016), Education and Personality Development, APH Publishing Home.
TEXT BOOKS
Professional Skills and Soft Skills(2020), Study Material, Hindustan Institute of Technology and
1.
Science.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Pillai, Sabina and Fernandez, Agna,(2018) Soft Skills & Employability Skills, Cambridge University
Press.
2. Steve Hart et al,(2016) Embark, English for Undergraduates, Cambridge University Press.
3. Butterfield, Jeff(2010) Soft Skills for Everyone, Cengage Learning.
4. Koneru, Aruna(2015) Professional Speaking Skills, Oxford University Publishers.
E BOOKS

3
 1 https://www.britishcouncil.in/english/courses-business
2 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/features/pronunciation
3 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/
4 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/free-resources/write-and-improve/
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc-list.com/tags/english
2 https://www.mooc-list.com/course/adventures-writing-stanford-online
3 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/free-resources/mooc/

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND COMPUTER AIDED

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
DESIGN
COURSE
COURSE CODE MEA4101 BS L-T-P-S 1-1-2-2
CATEGORY
24 ACM
LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details 30th May BTL-3
LEVEL
2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Second Periodical
First Periodical Assessment Practical Assessment ESE
Assessment
15% 15% 20% 50%
This course broadly introduces the mechanical design using computer aided design
tools and fundamentals of free hand sketching. It prepares the students to learn the
Course
basic concepts involved in technical drawing skills and computer graphics. It also
Description
emphasis on the principles and basic understanding of projections and visualizations
aspects of component designing.
1. To understand the basics of Engineering graphics and plane curvatures using
AutoCAD tool
2. To visualize the free hand sketch and orthographic projections and to solve simple
Course problems
Objective 3. To comprehend the various geometrical models and its developments
4. To understand the transformation of 2D drafting to 3D models using CAD tools
5. To generate associated views of 3D models and related geometric dimensioning
and tolerencing.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Use the AutoCAD commands to generate simple drawings and understand drafting
techniques.
Course
2. Apply the acquired knowledge to solve simple problems involving straight planes
Outcome
and solids.
3. Visualize solid objects and apply AutoCAD commands to generate the models.
4. Recognize and use 3D model commands in AutoCAD tool to generate solid objects.

4
 Generate the various views of the geometrical solid model manually and using AutoCAD
as well.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2
CO-1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-2 - - 2 - 3 - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-3 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - 1 1
CO-4 - - - - 3 - - - - - 1 - 1 1
CO-5 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: BASICS OF ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND PLANE CURVES
(6L+6P=12)
Importance of graphics - BIS conventions and specifications - drawing sheet sizes - Lettering –
Dimensioning - Scales. Drafting methods - introduction to Computer Aided Drafting –
Computer Hardware – Workstation – Printer and Plotter – Introduction to software for
Computer Aided Design and Drafting – Exposure to Solid Modelling software – Geometrical
CO-1
Construction-Coordinate Systems/Basic Entities – 3D printer.
BTL-2
Practical component:
AutoCAD – Solid modelling tool - Basics.
Suggested Readings:
Basics of drafting and dimensioning
MODULE 2: VISUALIZATION, ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND FREE HAND SKETCHING
(6L+6P=12)
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of
Three Dimensional objects — Pictorial Projection methods - Layout of views- Free hand
sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of objects. Drafting of simple Geometric
Objects/Editing General principles of presentation of technical drawings as per BIS -
Introduction to Orthographic projections - Naming views as per BIS - First angle projection
CO-2
method. Conversion to orthographic views from given pictorial views of objects, including
BTL-2
dimensioning – Drafting of Orthographic views from Pictorial views.
Practical component:
2D drafting, Orthographic projections
Suggested Readings:
AutoCAD tool – Commands for sketching , Projections
MODULE 3: GEOMETRICAL MODELLING, ISOMETRIC AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
(6L+6P=12)
Principles of isometric projection and solid modelling. Isometric drawing – IsoPlanes and 3D CO-3
Modelling commands. Projections of Principal Views from 3-D Models. Solid Modeling – Types BTL-3

5
of modelling - Wire frame model, Surface Model and Solid Model – Introduction to graphic
software for solid modelling. Development of Surfaces
Practical component:
3D modelling and surface development
Suggested Readings:
Surface modelling and solid modelling
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING
(6L+6P=12)
Preparation of solid models of machine components like slide block, solid bearing block,
bushed bearing, gland, wall bracket, guide bracket, shaft bracket, jig plate, shaft support
(open type), vertical shaft support etc using appropriate modelling software. 2D views and
sectional view, computer aided drafting and dimensioning. Generate 2D drawing from the 3D
models – generate and develop the lateral surfaces of the objects. Presentation Techniques
CO-4
of Engineering Drawings – Title Blocks – Printing/Plotting the 2D/3D drawing using printer and
BTL-2
printing solid object using 3D printer.
Practical component:
2D to 3D transformation, plotting of drawings
Suggested Readings:
3D modelling – view generations and commands
MODULE 5: SIMPLE DESIGN PROJECTS – COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN (6L+6P=12)
Creation of engineering models and their presentation in standard 2D form, 3D Wire-Frame
and shaded solids, meshed topologies for engineering analysis, tool-path generation for
component manufacture, geometric dimensioning and tolerencing. Use of solid-modelling
software for creating associative models at the components and assembly levels in their
respective branch of engineering like building floor plans that include: windows, doors,
CO-5
fixtures such as WC, Sink, shower, slide block, etc. Applying color coding according to drawing
BTL-3
practice.
Practical component:
3D solid meshed topology, geometrical dimensioning, simple components
Suggested Readings:
AutoCAD dimensioning, assembly of solid components
TEXT BOOKS
Jeyapoovan, T. (2016). Engineering Drawing and Graphics Using AutoCAD, 7th Edition,
1.
Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Warren J. Luzadder and Jon. M. Duff. (2016). Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing,
1.
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Eleventh Edition.
Jensen, J.D. Helsel, D.R. Short. (2012). Engineering Drawing and Design, McGraw-Hill, Sixth
2.
Edition.
E BOOKS

6
 http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering-graphics-j-
1.
benjamin-pentex-freeebook-pdf-download.html
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering-graphics-p-i-
2.
varghese.html
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104148/

COURSE TITLE MATRICES AND CALCULUS CREDITS 4

COURSE COURSE
MAA 4101 BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-1
CODE CATEGORY
LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Periodical Second Periodical Seminar/ Surprise Test /
Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment Assignments/ Project Quiz
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Course To make the student understand the basic concepts of matrices and calculus using
Description MATLAB
1. To Know how to perform some simple operations on matrices
2. To understand effectively the basic concepts of differentiation and partial
Course differentiation and their applications.
Objective 3. To perform integration and other operations for certain types of functions and carry
out the computation fluently.
4. To classify ordinary differential equations.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. calculate the inverse of the matrix using Cayley Hamilton theorem and diagonalise the
matrix
Course
2. determine the derivative and higher derivatives of a given function explicitly using
Outcome
differentiation formulas
3. evaluate of area and volume using line integral.
4. classify the differential equations and solve them.
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-4 3 3 - - 2 2 2 - - - - - 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:MATRICES (13L+2P=15)

7
Characteristic equation – Eigen values and Eigenvectors – Properties – Cayley Hamilton theorem
(Statement only) – Verification and inverse of the matrix using Cayley Hamilton theorem-
Diagonalization of matrices using similarity transformation CO-1
Suggested Reading: Basics of Matrices BTL-3
Lab1: Eigen values and Eigenvectors, Verification and inverse using Cayley Hamilton theorem-
Diagonalization
MODULE 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS
(13L+2P=15)
Methods of differentiation of functions – Product and Quotient rules – Inverse trigonometric
functions – Implicit function – parametric form. Partial differentiation – Total differentiation-
CO-2
Taylor’s series – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Basics of Differentiation
Lab2: Taylor’s series – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables
MODULE 3:INTEGRAL CALCULUS
(13L+2P=15)
Integration – Methods of integration – Substitution method – Integration by parts – Integration
using partial fraction – Bernoulli’s formula. Applications of Integral Calculus: Area, Surface and CO-3
Volume.
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Basics of Integrations
Lab3: Applications of Integral Calculus: Area, Surface area and Volume.
MODULE 4: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (13L+2P=15)
Second order differential equations with constant coefficients – Particular integrals –
eax , Sinax, Cosax, x m , e ax Cos bx, eax Sin bx. Solutions of homogeneous differential equations
CO-4
with variable coefficients – Variation of parameters.. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Basics of Differential Equations.
Lab 4: Solution of Second order differential equations.
TEXT BOOKS
Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd
1.
Edition, 2014
Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Eighth Edition,
2.
Laxmi Publications Pvt Ltd.,2011.
Chandrasekaran A, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics I”, Dhanam Publications,
3.
Chennai, 2010
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, Thomas’ Calculus, 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics With Matlab, Third Edition,2011 by CRC Press.
E BOOKS
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/111105035/
1.
https://www.edx.org/.../introduction-engineering-mathematics-utarlingtonx-engr3
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc-list.com/tags/engineering-mathematics

8
 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ECE,EEE,CSE & IT)
COURSE
COURSE CODE PHA4102 BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-0
CATEGORY
24th ACM - LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.5.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise Test
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

This course will facilitate students to understand the concepts of properties of matter,
Course
heat, acoustics, ultrasonics, quantum physics, semiconducting materials and
Description
photonics to solve engineering problems
1. To impart knowledge on types of stress, elastic moduli, heat conduction and
determination of thermal conductivity.
2. To provide a strong foundation on the concepts and applications of acoustics and
ultrasonics.
3. To illustrate theoretically and experimentally the particle nature of light and wave
Course Objective
nature of particle.
4. To distinguish the materials based on band theory and make the students
understand the basic functions of electronic devices
5. To make the students understand the production of lasers and propagation of light
through an optical fiber.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. distinguish the types of stress and relate the concept of elastic moduli with the
properties of materials and also explain the concept of heat conduction and
thermal conductivity.
2. explain the concept of reverberation time and outline the generation and
Course Outcome applications of ultrasonics.
3. explain the black body radiation, Compton Effect and also solve the Schrodinger’s
wave equations.
4. classify the materials based on band gap and also illustrate the functioning of
discrete devices.
5. outline the principle, working and application of lasers and optical fibers.
Prerequisites: Knowledge in fundamentals of Physics at higher secondary level
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PSO1 PSO2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO-1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 1
CO-2 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 3 - 1
CO-3 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 3 - 1
CO-4 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 3 1 1
CO-5 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 3 1 1

9
 1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – PROPERTIES OF MATTER & HEAT
Elasticity - Hooke’s law– Elastic Moduli – Young’s modulus of elasticity - Rigidity modulus -
Bulk modulus - Twisting couple on a wire - Torsional pendulum - determination of rigidity
modulus of a wire - Depression of a cantilever - Young’s modulus by cantilever - uniform and
CO-1
non-uniform bending.
BTL-3
Thermal conductivity – experimental determination of thermal conductivities of good and
bad conductors – Forbe’s method – theory and experiment – Lee’s disc method for bad
conductors.
MODULE 2 – ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS (9L)
Classification of sound - Characteristics of musical sound – intensity - loudness - Weber
Fechner law - Decibel - Reverberation - Reverberation time, derivation of Sabine’s formula
for reverberation time(Jaeger’s method) - absorption coefficient and its determination -
CO-2
factors affecting acoustics of building (Optimum reverberation time, loudness, focusing,
BTL-3
echo, echelon effect, resonance and noise) and their remedies
Ultrasonics- Production – Magnetostriction and Piezoelectric methods – properties –
applications
MODULE 3 – QUANTUM PHYSICS (9L)
Black body radiation- Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien's displacement law
and Rayleigh – Jean’s law from Planck's theory - Compton effect – Theory and experimental
verification CO-3
Schrödinger's wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical BTL-3
significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box - Extension to 3 dimension
(no derivation)
MODULE 4 – SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS (9L)
Band theory of solids - Classification of metals, semiconductors & insulators – Intrinsic &
Extrinsic Semiconductors (Qualitative Treatment) – Direct & Indirect band gap –
semiconductor Hall Effect – Determination of Hall Coefficient. CO-4
PN junction diode – Construction, working & VI characteristics, Zener diode - Construction, BTL-3
working & VI characteristics – Zener diode as voltage regulator – Transistors - Construction
& working – CE & CB Configuration characteristics curves.
MODULE 5 – PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS (9L)
Principle of lasers - Stimulated absorption - Spontaneous emission, stimulated emission -
population inversion - pumping action - active medium - laser characteristics – Nd-Yag laser
-CO2 laser - Semiconductor laser - applications - optical fiber - principle and propagation of CO-5
light in optical fibers - Numerical aperture and acceptance angle - types of optical fibers - BTL-3
single and multimode, step index and graded index fibers - fiber optic communication
system.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mani, P. (2011). Engineering Physics, Vol I & II, Dhanam Publications, Chennai.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gaur, R. K. and Gupta S.L. (2010). Engineering Physics, 8th edition, Dhanpat Rai publications (P) Ltd., New
1. Delhi.
2. Arthur Beiser, (2007). Concepts of Modern Physics, Tata McGraw – Hill Publications.

10
 Rajendran, V. Marikani , A. (2009). Applied Physics for engineers, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw –Hill publishing
3. company Ltd., New Delhi.
Avadhanulu, M. N. and Kshirsagar, P. G. (2018). A textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company
4. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.

E BOOKS
Aithal, P. S. and Ravindra, H. J. (2011). Textbook of Engineering Physics, 1st edition, ACME Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
1.
New Delhi https://zenodo.org/record/243407#.Ye_V3-pBxPY
John R. Gordon, Ralph V. McGrew and Raymond A. Serway. (2010). Physics for Scientists and Engineers 8th
2. edition, Brooks/Cole Cengage learning, USA
https://www.academia.edu/33716022/Physics_for_Scientists_and_Engineers_8th_Edition_Ebook
Avadhanulu, M. N. and Kshirsagar, P. G. (2018). A textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Pvt.
3. Ltd, New Delhi
https://www.quickstudyhelper.com/textbook-engineering-physics.html
Akma Binti Che Ishak et al (2021) Introduction to semiconductor
4.
https://anyflip.com/zflmv/ntnu/basic
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/115106061/

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/12

3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/physics/8-04-quantum-physics-i-spring-2016/index.htm

4. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/physics/8-04-quantum-physics-i-spring-2013/

ENGINEERING MATERIALS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)
COURSE 3-0-0-
CYA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S
CODE 2
24th ACM
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.5.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First
Second Periodical Seminar/ Surprise Test
Periodical Attendance ESE
Assessment Assignments/ Project / Quiz
Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

Course To make the students understand the basic concepts of Engineering Materials and their
Description applications.

11
 1. To make the students understand the basics of crystal structure and phase rule.
2. To provide an exposure on the fundamentals of powder metallurgy and applications of
inorganic materials and composites.
3. To give a strong foundation on the basic concepts of nanomaterials, the general synthetic
Course
methods with emphasis on their applications.
Objective
4. To illustrate the applications of conducting polymers and liquid- crystals, with a good
exposure on their basic terminologies.
5. To provide a knowledge on the theoretical basis of the chemical composition, properties
and applications of lubricants, adhesives and explosives.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Propose and justify suitable metals/materials for alloying.
2. State and select a suitable high-temperature material for industrial applications.
3. Suggest an appropriate technique for nanomaterial synthesis and also select a property-
Course
guided molecular material for a given application.
Outcome
4. Identify the materials which can be employed as organic conductors and liquid- crystals
in electronic devices.
5. Distinguish and select a suitable organic / inorganic material as lubricant / adhesive /
explosive based on its applications.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 -
CO-2 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-3 3 2 1 1 - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-4 3 2 1 1 - - 2 - - - - 2 2 -
CO-5 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 2 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND PHASE RULE (9L)
Basic crystal systems – Types, characteristics, examples – Space lattice, Unit cell – types – X-ray
diffraction and crystal structure.
CO-1
Basic terminology - Derivation of Gibbs Phase rule-Phase diagrams: One component system (water),
BTL-3
Two component system–- Reduced phase rule: Simple Eutectic system, examples, Phase diagram:
Ag-Pb system, Pb-Sn system–Applications of phase rule.
MODULE 2: POWDER METALLURGY, INORGANIC MATERIALS AND COMPOSITES. (9L)

12
 Steel – Composition, types, heat-treatment, Abrasives – Classification, Properties, Uses - Refractories
– Classification, Properties, Applications. Glasses – Properties, Types, Specialty glasses. Composites
CO-2
- Introduction - Definition – Constituents – Classification -Fiber-reinforced Composites –Types and
BTL-3
Applications.
Powder Metallurgy – Preparation of metal/alloy– Advantages and limitations.
MODULE 3: NANOMATERIALSAND MOLECULAR SIEVES (9L)
Introduction – Synthesis of Nanomaterials - Bottom-up and Top-down approaches – Methods of
preparation – Sol-gel process, Gas-phase condensation, Chemical Vapour Deposition. Properties –
Optical, Electrical, Magnetic, Chemical properties (introduction only).Characterization – FE-SEM, TEM CO-3
(Principle and Applications only). BTL-2
Zeolite Molecular sieves – composition, structure, classification - applications – ion exchange,
adsorption, separation, laundry, catalysis.
MODULE 4: MATERIALS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATONS (9L)
Liquid Crystals- Introduction – Characteristics – Classification- Thermotropic crystals- - Polymorphism
in Thermotropic Liquid Crystals – Molecular arrangement in various stsres of Liquid Crystals,
Lyotropic Liquid Crystals- Applications.
CO-4
Conducting and Super conducting Organic electronic materials - Applications.
BTL-2
Engineering plastics: Polycarbonate – Properties and uses- Conducting Polymers:Classification,
Intrinsic Conducting Polymers,Extrinsic Conducting Polymers, Applications - Biodegradable Polymers,
examples and applications.
MODULE 5: LUBRICANTS, ADHESIVES AND EXPLOSIVES (9L)
Lubricants – Mechanism of Lubrication, Classification and Properties, Semi Solid Lubricants, Solid
Lubricants, MoS2 and Graphite - Adhesives – Development of Adhesive strength, Physical and
CO-5
Chemical factors influencing adhesive action, Classification of Adhesives – Epoxy Resin (Preparation,
BTL-2
Properties and Applications). Explosives – Requisites, Classification, Precautions during storage –
Rocket propellants – Requisites - Classification.
TEXT BOOKS
1. P.S. Raghavan (2018), Engineering Materials, Dhanam Publications
2. P.C. Jain and Monicka Jain (2012), Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Raj Publication (P) Ltd, New Delhi
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Puri, Sharma and Pathania (2020), Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co. Jalandar.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering-chemistry-by-jain-and-jain-pdf-free-ebook.html
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/materials-science-engineering-misisx-mse1x

COURSE TITLE PROBLEM SOLVING USING C CREDITS 3

2-0-2-
COURSE CODE CSA4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S
2

13
 24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First
Second Periodical
Periodical Practical Component ESE
Assessment
Assessment
15% 15% 20% 50%
To introduce computers and programming in C and also explore the power of
Course
computational techniques that are currently used by engineers and scientists and to
Description
develop programming skills with reasonable complexity.
1. To acquire the basic knowledge in computer hardware, programming languages and
Problem-solving techniques.
Course 2. To learn the fundamentals of C programming.
Objective 3. To gain knowledge in Functions, arrays and strings in C programming.
4. To understand the pointers, Structures and Union in C programming
5. To gain Knowledge on Embedded Programming
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe the basics of digital computer and programming languages.
2. Demonstrate problem solving techniques using flowchart, algorithm/pseudo code to
Course
solve the given problem.
Outcome
3. Design and Implement C program using Control Statements and Functions.
4. Design and Implement C program using Pointers and File operations.
5. Identify the need for embedded C in real-time applications.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - - 1 2 2 -
CO-2 3 3 3 2 2 1 - 2 2 1 - 1 2 3
CO-3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - 1 3 3 2 1 2 3
CO-4 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1 2
CO-5 1 1 1 - 1 2 - 1 - - - 2 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND PROBLEM SOLVING TECHNIQUES (6L+6P=12)

14
Introduction – Fundamentals of digital computers - Programming languages -Programming
Paradigms – Types of Programming Languages – Language Translators – Problem Solving
Techniques: Algorithm – Flow Chart - Pseudo code.
Practical Component: CO-1
Drawing Flowcharts using E- Chart & Writing pseudo code for the following problems BTL-1
(i) Greatest of three numbers
(ii) Sum of N numbers
(iii) Computation of nCr
MODULE 2: FUNDAMENTALS OF C (6L+6P=12)
Evolution of C -Why C language - Applications of C language - Data Types in C – Operators and
Expressions – Input and Output statements in C – Decision Statements – Loop Control
Statements.
Practical Component:
(i) Program to illustrate arithmetic and logical operators
CO-2
(ii) Program to read and print data of different types
BTL-3
(iii) Program to calculate area and volume of various geometrical shapes
(iv) Program to compute biggest of three numbers
(v) Program to print multiplication table
(vi) Program to convert days to years, months and days
(vii) Program to find sum of the digits of an integer
MODULE 3: FUNCTIONS, ARRAYS AND STRINGS (6L+6P=12)
Functions – Storage Class – Arrays – Strings and standard functions - Pre-processor Statements.
Practical Component:
(i) Program to compute Factorial, Fibonacci series and sum of n numbers using recursion
(ii) Program to compute sum and average of N Numbers stored in an array
(iii) Program to sort the given n numbers stored in an array CO-3
(iv) Program to search for the given element in an array BTL-4
(v) Program to do word count
(vi) Program to insert a substring in a string
(vii) Program to concatenate and compare two strings
(viii) Program using pre-processor statements
MODULE 4: POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND UNION (6L+6P=12)
Pointers – Dynamic Memory allocation – Structure and Union – Files.
Practical Component:
(i) Program to compute sum of integers stored in a 1-D array using pointers and dynamic memory
allocation CO-4
(ii) Program to read and print records of a student/payroll database using structures BTL-3
(iii) Program to simulate file copy
(iv) Program to illustrate sequential access file
(v) Program to illustrate random access file
MODULE 5: INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED C (6L+6P=12)

15
 Structure of embedded C program - Data Types - Operators - Statements - Functions - Keil C
Compiler. CO-5
Practical component: BTL-2
Simple programs using embedded C
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jeyapoovan T, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, Vikas Publishing house, 2015.
2. Mark Siegesmund, "Embedded C Programming", first edition, Elsevier publications, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ashok Kamthane, “Computer Programming”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, Inc 2017.
2. Yashavant Kanetkar, “Let us C”, 15th edition, BPP publication, 2016.
S.Sathyalakshmi, S.Dinakar, “Computer Programming Practicals – Computer Lab Manual”,
3.
Dhanam Publication, First Edition, July 2013.
E BOOKS
1. https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/C_Programming
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105085/2
2. https://www.udemy.com/c-programming-for-beginners/
3. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/c-programming

COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE COURSE
EEB4101 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Test / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course provides an introduction to digital system using microprocessors, sensors
and actuators. Within this context, it introduces the fundamentals of Boolean algebra,
digital arithmetic, Sensors and Displays, Signal Conditioning Circuits, microprocessor
architecture and I/O, and Consumer Electronics and Communication System. Learning
Course
opportunities include: active-learning lectures; tutorials in which small teams work
Description
together to explore, discuss, apply and explain digital electronic circuits. The course is
designed to be one of the first undertaken by new students in electrical and electronic
engineering such that its successful completion will provide the necessary foundation
for more specialist learning in core engineering

16
 1. To gain knowledge on basic operation in digital systems
2. To study about sensors and display units
Course
3. To have knowledge on the concepts of signal processing and converting elements
Objective
4. To study about microcontroller and its interfacing
5. To gain knowledge about different types of communication
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Summarize basic operation in digital systems and instruments
2. Express knowledge on basic functioning of sensors and display units.
Course 3. Familiarize the concepts of signal processing and converting elements
Outcome 4. Choose industrial controllers, microcontrollers with interfacing for specific
applications
5. Explain the principles and operation of satellite communication, mobile
communication and home electric appliances
Prerequisites: Physics and Mathematics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-2 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-4 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-5 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SYSTEMS (9L)
Analog & Digital signals - Need for digital instruments – Elements of digital instruments –
Number systems: - Binary, Hexadecimal - Logic gates - Boolean algebra (Identities and
CO-1
Properties) - Digital controllers (ON-OFF).
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Basics of number systems
MODULE 2: SENSORS AND DISPLAYS (9L)
Sensors and Transducers –Classification, Potentiometer, Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric Sensor,
Linear Variable Differential Transformer, Resistance temperature detectors (RTD),
Thermocouples, Tactile transducers - Displays: - Light Emitting Diode (including OLED) CO-2
displays. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Primary sensing elements, introduction to displays
MODULE 3: SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS (9L)

17
 D.C. Bridge- Unbalanced, Push-Pull configuration, Operational amplifiers- Inverting, Non-
Inverting, Instrumentation Amplifier, Active filters: - Low pass, High pass - Analog to Digital
CO-3
Converter – Successive Approximation, Digital to Analog Converter - Weighted Resistor
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Basic network theorems
MODULE 4: INTRODUCTION TO MICRO CONTROLLERS (9L)
Introduction: Memory types, peripheral devices- Microcontroller (8 bit), Architecture,
Graphics Processing Unit (GPU)- Applications: -Interfacing of Digital Input/Output, Analogue
Input/Output, Display. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and PID CO-4
(Proportional + Integral + Derivative) Controller BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Electronics with Microcontroller interface
MODULE 5: CONSUMER ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (9L)
Consumer Electronics: Television, Mobile Phones, Air conditioners, Refrigerators, Washing
Machine. (Block diagram approach only.)
Communication System: - Satellite communication, Global Positioning Systems, Global System CO-5
for Mobile. (Block diagram approach only.) BTL-2
Suggested Reading:
Consumer Electronics User Manuals
TEXT BOOKS
1. Digital Fundamentals, Thomas l. Floyd, 11th edition, Pearson 2014.
2. Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Ramakant A. Gayakwad, 4th edition, Prentice
Hall, 2015.
3. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, David A. Bell, Oxford University Press,
2013.
4. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C, SepehrNaimi,
SarmadNaimi, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Second edition, 2017.
5. Programmable Logic Controllers, Frank D. Petruzella, McGraw-Hill Education, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Digital Logic and Computer Design, M. Morris Mano, Prentice-Hall, 2016
Linear Integrated Circuits, Roy Choudhury, New Age International Publishers, 4th edition,
2.
2011
3. C and 8051, Thomas W. Schultz, Thomas W. Schultz Publishers, 4th edition,2008
4. Consumer Electronics, S.P Bali, Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2008 Edition
Global Mobile Satellite Communications Applications (For Maritime, Land and
5.
Aeronautical Applications Volume 2), 2nd edition, Springer, 2018
E BOOKS

18
 1. http://www.ee.iitm.ac.in/~giri/pdfs/EE4140/textbook.pdf
2. https://electronics.howstuffworks.com/home-audio-video-channel.htm
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108099/Digital%20Systems.pdf

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod2.pdf

3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063/pdf/L-09(SS)(IA&C)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf

COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB CREDITS 0.5

COURSE
COURSE CODE GEA4131 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
Engineering Immersion Lab helps the students to understand and familiarize the
Course
basic knowledge on Computer, Electrical, Electronic and Mechanical Engineering
Description
domains
Course To make students trained on basic engineering experiments in Computer, Electrical,
Objective Electronic and Mechanical Engineering fields.
1. Identify and use of tools, accessories, trouble shooting, software installations,
Course Outcome Assembling and fabrication techniques in basic Engineering domains.
2. Have hands on experience on designing circuits for various applications.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 1 1
CO-2 2 1 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
GROUP A - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

19
I. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Welding: Arc welding: Butt joints
2. Lap joints
3. Machining: Facing
4. Turning
II. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
1. Dismantling and Studying of two stroke gasoline engine
2. Assembling of two stroke gasoline engine.
3. Dismantling and Studying of four stroke gasoline engine
4. Assembling of four stroke gasoline engine.
III. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of Flow Pattern around Various Objects.
2. Force measurement on Aircraft Model
3. Determination of Young's Modulus for Aluminum Cantilever Beam
4. Binary Addition & Subtraction using Microprocessor
IV. CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Plumbing- Basic Pipe Connection using valves, couplings and elbows.
2. Carpentry – Sowing, Planning and making common Joints.
3. Bar Bending
4. Construction of a 50 cm height brick wall without mortar using English Bond.
GROUP B - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
V. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of tools and accessories
2. Study of cables.
3. Staircase wiring, Tube light and Fan connection
4. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
VI. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Active and Passive Components.
2. Study of Logic Circuits.
3. Making simple circuit using Electronic Components.
4. Measuring of parameters for signal using CRO.
VII. COMPUTER SCIENCE
1. Troubleshooting different parts of the computer peripherals, Monitor, Keyboard & CPU.
2. Installation of various operating systems, their capabilities, Windows, Unix, Linux.
3. Installation of commonly used software like MS Office
4. Assembling digital computer.
VIII. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Key Elements of Mechatronics Systems
2. Sensors – Load Cell, Thermocouple
3. Actuators – Linear & Rotary Actuators
4. Interfacing & Measurements – Virtual Instrumentation

20
REFERENCE BOOKS
Jeyapoovan T and Saravanapandian M., Engineering practices lab manual, 4th Edition, Vikas
1
publishing House, New Delhi, 2015.
Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
2 Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
3
Delhi, 2011
Robert Quesada, Jeyapoovan T., Computer Numerical Control Machining and Turning Centers,
4
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006

ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 1
(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
COURSE
COURSE CODE PHA4131 BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CATEGORY
24th ACM - LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.5.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Experimental Calculation Result Viva Record ESE
30 10 10 20 10 20%
Course This course imparts practical knowledge on experimental methods to determine
Description mechanical and optical properties of materials.
1.
To train students to determine elastic properties of materials
2.
To provide a practical exposure to measure viscosity of liquids.
Course 3.
To train students to estimate the thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
Objective 4.
To equip students to utilize light beam to analyse materials.
5.
To impart hands-on training in plotting the V-I characteristics of p-n junction
diode
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. determine the Young’s modulus and rigidity modulus of materials
2. measure viscosity of liquids by Poiseuille’s flow
Course
3. determine thermal conductivity of a bad conductor by Lee’s disc method
Outcome
4. apply phenomena of light to determine the thickness of a thin wire and refractive
index of a material
5. analyse V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode.
Prerequisites: Knowledge in Physics practical at higher secondary level
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO- PO PO- PO- PO PO- PO- PO- PO PO- PO PO- PSO-
CO PSO-2
1 -2 3 4 -5 6 7 8 -9 10 -11 12 1
CO-1 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-2 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-3 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-4 3 3 - - 3 - - - 3 - - 3 1 -

21
CO-5 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PROPERTIES OF MATTER- SOLID . (9 P)
1. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a
wire. CO-1
2. Non Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus. BTL-3
3. Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
MODULE 2: PROPERTIES OF MATTER- LIQUID ( 3 P)
4. Viscosity – Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s CO-2
flow. BTL-3
MODULE 3: THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (3 P)
5. Lee’s Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor. CO-3
Preparation of urea-formaldehyde resin. BTL-3
MODULE 4: OPTICS (9 P)
6. Air – Wedge – Determination of thickness of a thin wire
CO-4
7. Spectrometer – refractive index of a prism
BTL-3
8. Semiconductor laser – Determination of wavelength of laser using grating
MODULE 5: SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES (3 P)
9. Semiconductor diode – VI characteristics CO-5
BTL-3
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mani, P. (2005). Engineering Physics Practicals, Dhanam Publications, Chennai.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Ayachit, N. H. and Mittal P. K. (2013), Engineering Physics: With laboratory Manual, I K International
1
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
Kulkarni, P. (2015). Experiments in Engineering Physics Bachelor of Engineering and Technology,
2.
Edition 2015
E BOOKS
1. http://www.aurora.ac.in/images/pdf/departments/humanities-and-sciences/engg-phy-lab-manual.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.vlab.co.in/broad-area-physical-sciences
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/105/115105110/#

MATERIALS CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 1
(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
COURSE
COURSE CODE CYA4131 BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-2
CATEGORY
24th ACM - LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.5.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Experimental Calculation Result Viva Record ESE
30 10 10 20 10 20%

22
 This course imparts practical exposure on basic techniques employed for the analyses
Course
of lubricants, refractories & other engineering materials and spectrophotometric
Description
analyses for metal ions.
1. To train the students in characterization of lubricants by viscosity measurement.
2. To give a practical exposure for the construction of phase diagram, for partially-
miscible liquids (phenol-water system)
Course 3. To provide the students practical knowledge in preparation of polymers (urea-
Objective formaldehyde resin)
4. To impart hands-on training in characterization of refractories.
5. To equip the students with practical skill in estimation of metal ions by
spectrophotometry.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. grade the lubricants based on viscosity
2. analyze the phase diagram and interpret the critical solution temperature.
Course 3. apply the practical knowledge gained on the preparation of polymers, for the
Outcome preparation of other similar macromolecules.
4. analyze the strength of refractories.
5. apply the spectrophotometric method for the determination of metal ions in
different environment.
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-2 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-3 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-4 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-5 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PROPERTIES OF LUBRICANTS (6 P)
1. Determination of viscosity of polymer using Ostwald Viscometer.
CO-1
2. Determination of Viscosity Index of lubricants.
BTL-3
3. Determination of viscosity of oil using Red-Wood Viscometer.
MODULE 2: PHASE DIAGRAM IN LIQUID SYSTEM (6 P)
4. Construction of phenol-water phase diagram. CO-2
5. Determination of adsorption isotherm for acetic acid on activated charcoal. BTL-3
MODULE 3: PREPARATION POLYMER RESIN. (6 P)
6. Preparation of urea-formaldehyde resin. CO-3
BTL-3
MODULE 4: BASIC PROPERTIES OF REFRACTORIES (6 P)

23
7. Determination of porosity of a refractory. CO-4
8. Determination of apparent density of porous solids. BTL-3
MODULE 5: ESTIMATION METAL ION CONTENTS IN THE SAMPLE (6 P)
9. Estimation of dye content in the effluent by UV-Visible spectrophotometry.
10. Determination of copper / iron content in the alloy by colorimetry. CO-5
11. Estimation of sodium and potassium ions by flame photometry. BTL-3
12. Verification of Beer-Lambert’s law using gold nanoparticles.
TEXT BOOKS
1. P.S. Raghavan (2018), Materials Chemicals Laboratory Manual, Dhanam Publications.
REFERENCE BOOKS
J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J.D. Barnes and N.J.K. Thomas (2009), Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
1.
Chemical Analysis, 6th Edition, Pearson Education.
E BOOKS
http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering-chemistry-by-jain-and-jain-pdf-free-
1.
ebook.html
MOOC
1. https://www.coursetalk.com/providers/coursera/courses/introduction-to-chemistry-1

SEMESTER II
COURSE TITLE ANALYTICAL MATHEMATICS CREDITS 4
COURSE CODE MAA 4117 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-1
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

Course To make the student understand the basic analytical mathematical skills that is
Description imperative for effective understanding of engineering subject using MATLAB.
1. To demonstrate the fundamental understanding of integrals
2. To apply problem solving skills vectors
Course
3. To understand the concepts of Laplace Transforms
Objective
4. To understand the concept of Fourier series
5. To understand the concepts of complex variables

24
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. evaluate surface and volume integrals
Course 2. perform vector operations and interpret the results geometrically
Outcome 3. solve the system of ordinary differential equations using Laplace Transform
4. develop any periodic function satisfying Dirichlet’s conditions as a Fourier series
5. construct the analytic function and finding the harmonic function.

Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - 1 1
CO-2 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-5 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (10L+2P=12)
Double integration – Cartesian and polar co-ordinates – Change of order of integration. Area
as a double integral – Triple integration in Cartesian coordinates – Volume as a triple integral
CO-1
– Change of variables between Cartesian and polar coordinates.
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Line Integrals
Lab: Area and Volume using double and triple integration.
MODULE 2:VECTOR CALCULUS (10L+2P=12)
Gradient, Divergence and Curl – Unit normal vector, Directional derivative – angle between
surfaces–Solenoidal and Irrotationalvector fields, Green’s theorem - Gauss divergence
theorem and Stoke’s theorem (without proof) – Verification and evaluation of the above
CO-2
theorems - Simple applications to regions such as square, rectangle, triangle, cuboids and
BTL-3
rectangular parallelopipeds.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Vectors
Lab: Area using Green’s theorem and Volume using Gauss divergence theorem.
MODULE 3:LAPLACE TRANSFORMS (10L+2P=12)
Laplace transform – Conditions of existence – Transform of elementary functions –
properties– Transforms of derivatives– Initial and final value theorems – Transform of
periodic functions. Inverse Laplace transforms using partial fraction and convolution
CO-3
theorem. Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients.
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Basics of Transform
Lab: Finding Laplace and Inverse Laplace Transform of Elementary Functions, Solutions of
Ordinary differential equations using Laplace transform

25
MODULE 4: FOURIER SERIES (10L+2P=12)
Dirichlet’s Conditions – General Fourier Series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine
and cosine series –Harmonic Analysis. CO-3
Suggested Reading: Basics of series BTL-3
Lab: Fourier series Expansion of simple functions, Harmonic Analysis
MODULE 5: COMPLEX VARIABLES (10L+2P=12)
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic function – Cauchy - Riemann equations
(Statement only) – Properties of analytic function (Statement only) – Construction of Analytic
CO-4
functions by Milne – Thomson method.
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Complex Numbers
Lab: Complex Numbers
TEXT BOOKS
Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition,
1.
New Delhi, 2016.
A.P.Santhakumaran, P.Titus, Engineering Mathematics - II, NiMeric Publications,
2.
Nagercoil, 2012
3. Chandrasekaran A, Engineering Mathematics- II, Dhanam Publication, 2014
Raj Kumar Bansal,Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications
4.
in Engineering”, Pearson Publication, Second Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Sastry, S.S, ―Engineering Mathematics", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 4thEdition,
1.
New Delhi, 2014
Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics ―Tata McGraw Hill
2.
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
Dean G. Duffy., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Third
3.
Edition 2013.
E BOOKS
1. nptel.ac.in/courses/111105035/22
MOOC
https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-engineering-mathematics-utarlingtonx-engr3-
1.
0x

ENGINEERING PHYSICS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ECE,EEE,CSE & IT)
COURSE
COURSE CODE PHA4102 BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-0
CATEGORY
24th ACM - LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.5.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

26
 Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise Test
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

This course will facilitate students to understand the concepts of properties of matter,
Course
heat, acoustics, ultrasonics, quantum physics, semiconducting materials and
Description
photonics to solve engineering problems
6. To impart knowledge on types of stress, elastic moduli, heat conduction and
determination of thermal conductivity.
7. To provide a strong foundation on the concepts and applications of acoustics and
ultrasonics.
8. To illustrate theoretically and experimentally the particle nature of light and wave
Course Objective
nature of particle.
9. To distinguish the materials based on band theory and make the students
understand the basic functions of electronic devices
10. To make the students understand the production of lasers and propagation of light
through an optical fiber.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
6. distinguish the types of stress and relate the concept of elastic moduli with the
properties of materials and also explain the concept of heat conduction and
thermal conductivity.
7. explain the concept of reverberation time and outline the generation and
Course Outcome applications of ultrasonics.
8. explain the black body radiation, Compton Effect and also solve the Schrodinger’s
wave equations.
9. classify the materials based on band gap and also illustrate the functioning of
discrete devices.
10. outline the principle, working and application of lasers and optical fibers.
Prerequisites: Knowledge in fundamentals of Physics at higher secondary level
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PSO1 PSO2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO-1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 1
CO-2 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 3 - 1
CO-3 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 3 - 1
CO-4 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 3 1 1
CO-5 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - 3 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – PROPERTIES OF MATTER & HEAT
Elasticity - Hooke’s law– Elastic Moduli – Young’s modulus of elasticity - Rigidity modulus -
Bulk modulus - Twisting couple on a wire - Torsional pendulum - determination of rigidity
CO-1
modulus of a wire - Depression of a cantilever - Young’s modulus by cantilever - uniform and
BTL-3
non-uniform bending.

27
Thermal conductivity – experimental determination of thermal conductivities of good and
bad conductors – Forbe’s method – theory and experiment – Lee’s disc method for bad
conductors.

MODULE 2 – ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS (9L)

Classification of sound - Characteristics of musical sound – intensity - loudness - Weber
Fechner law - Decibel - Reverberation - Reverberation time, derivation of Sabine’s formula
for reverberation time(Jaeger’s method) - absorption coefficient and its determination -
CO-2
factors affecting acoustics of building (Optimum reverberation time, loudness, focusing,
BTL-3
echo, echelon effect, resonance and noise) and their remedies
Ultrasonics- Production – Magnetostriction and Piezoelectric methods – properties –
applications
MODULE 3 – QUANTUM PHYSICS (9L)
Black body radiation- Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien's displacement law
and Rayleigh – Jean’s law from Planck's theory - Compton effect – Theory and experimental
verification CO-3
Schrödinger's wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical BTL-3
significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box - Extension to 3 dimension
(no derivation)
MODULE 4 – SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS (9L)
Band theory of solids - Classification of metals, semiconductors & insulators – Intrinsic &
Extrinsic Semiconductors (Qualitative Treatment) – Direct & Indirect band gap –
semiconductor Hall Effect – Determination of Hall Coefficient. CO-4
PN junction diode – Construction, working & VI characteristics, Zener diode - Construction, BTL-3
working & VI characteristics – Zener diode as voltage regulator – Transistors - Construction
& working – CE & CB Configuration characteristics curves.
MODULE 5 – PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS (9L)
Principle of lasers - Stimulated absorption - Spontaneous emission, stimulated emission -
population inversion - pumping action - active medium - laser characteristics – Nd-Yag laser
-CO2 laser - Semiconductor laser - applications - optical fiber - principle and propagation of CO-5
light in optical fibers - Numerical aperture and acceptance angle - types of optical fibers - BTL-3
single and multimode, step index and graded index fibers - fiber optic communication
system.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mani, P. (2011). Engineering Physics, Vol I & II, Dhanam Publications, Chennai.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Gaur, R. K. and Gupta S.L. (2010). Engineering Physics, 8th edition, Dhanpat Rai publications (P) Ltd., New
1. Delhi.
2. Arthur Beiser, (2007). Concepts of Modern Physics, Tata McGraw – Hill Publications.
Rajendran, V. Marikani , A. (2009). Applied Physics for engineers, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw –Hill publishing
3. company Ltd., New Delhi.
Avadhanulu, M. N. and Kshirsagar, P. G. (2018). A textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company
4. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.

28
 E BOOKS
Aithal, P. S. and Ravindra, H. J. (2011). Textbook of Engineering Physics, 1st edition, ACME Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
1.
New Delhi https://zenodo.org/record/243407#.Ye_V3-pBxPY
John R. Gordon, Ralph V. McGrew and Raymond A. Serway. (2010). Physics for Scientists and Engineers 8th
2. edition, Brooks/Cole Cengage learning, USA
https://www.academia.edu/33716022/Physics_for_Scientists_and_Engineers_8th_Edition_Ebook
Avadhanulu, M. N. and Kshirsagar, P. G. (2018). A textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Pvt.
3. Ltd, New Delhi
https://www.quickstudyhelper.com/textbook-engineering-physics.html
Akma Binti Che Ishak et al (2021) Introduction to semiconductor
4.
https://anyflip.com/zflmv/ntnu/basic
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/115106061/

2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/12

3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/physics/8-04-quantum-physics-i-spring-2016/index.htm

4. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/physics/8-04-quantum-physics-i-spring-2013/

ENGINEERING MATERIALS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)
COURSE 3-0-0-
CYA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S
CODE 2
24th ACM
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.5.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First
Second Periodical Seminar/ Surprise Test
Periodical Attendance ESE
Assessment Assignments/ Project / Quiz
Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

Course To make the students understand the basic concepts of Engineering Materials and their
Description applications.
1. To make the students understand the basics of crystal structure and phase rule.
2. To provide an exposure on the fundamentals of powder metallurgy and applications of
inorganic materials and composites.
3. To give a strong foundation on the basic concepts of nanomaterials, the general synthetic
Course
methods with emphasis on their applications.
Objective
4. To illustrate the applications of conducting polymers and liquid- crystals, with a good
exposure on their basic terminologies.
5. To provide a knowledge on the theoretical basis of the chemical composition, properties
and applications of lubricants, adhesives and explosives.

29
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Propose and justify suitable metals/materials for alloying.
2. State and select a suitable high-temperature material for industrial applications.
3. Suggest an appropriate technique for nanomaterial synthesis and also select a property-
Course
guided molecular material for a given application.
Outcome
4. Identify the materials which can be employed as organic conductors and liquid- crystals
in electronic devices.
5. Distinguish and select a suitable organic / inorganic material as lubricant / adhesive /
explosive based on its applications.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 1 -
CO-2 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-3 3 2 1 1 - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-4 3 2 1 1 - - 2 - - - - 2 2 -
CO-5 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 2 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND PHASE RULE (9L)
Basic crystal systems – Types, characteristics, examples – Space lattice, Unit cell – types – X-ray
diffraction and crystal structure.
CO-1
Basic terminology - Derivation of Gibbs Phase rule-Phase diagrams: One component system (water),
BTL-3
Two component system–- Reduced phase rule: Simple Eutectic system, examples, Phase diagram:
Ag-Pb system, Pb-Sn system–Applications of phase rule.
MODULE 2: POWDER METALLURGY, INORGANIC MATERIALS AND COMPOSITES. (9L)
Steel – Composition, types, heat-treatment, Abrasives – Classification, Properties, Uses - Refractories
– Classification, Properties, Applications. Glasses – Properties, Types, Specialty glasses. Composites
CO-2
- Introduction - Definition – Constituents – Classification -Fiber-reinforced Composites –Types and
BTL-3
Applications.
Powder Metallurgy – Preparation of metal/alloy– Advantages and limitations.
MODULE 3: NANOMATERIALSAND MOLECULAR SIEVES (9L)
Introduction – Synthesis of Nanomaterials - Bottom-up and Top-down approaches – Methods of
preparation – Sol-gel process, Gas-phase condensation, Chemical Vapour Deposition. Properties –
Optical, Electrical, Magnetic, Chemical properties (introduction only).Characterization – FE-SEM, TEM CO-3
(Principle and Applications only). BTL-2
Zeolite Molecular sieves – composition, structure, classification - applications – ion exchange,
adsorption, separation, laundry, catalysis.

30
MODULE 4: MATERIALS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATONS (9L)
Liquid Crystals- Introduction – Characteristics – Classification- Thermotropic crystals- - Polymorphism
in Thermotropic Liquid Crystals – Molecular arrangement in various stsres of Liquid Crystals,
Lyotropic Liquid Crystals- Applications.
CO-4
Conducting and Super conducting Organic electronic materials - Applications.
BTL-2
Engineering plastics: Polycarbonate – Properties and uses- Conducting Polymers:Classification,
Intrinsic Conducting Polymers,Extrinsic Conducting Polymers, Applications - Biodegradable Polymers,
examples and applications.
MODULE 5: LUBRICANTS, ADHESIVES AND EXPLOSIVES (9L)
Lubricants – Mechanism of Lubrication, Classification and Properties, Semi Solid Lubricants, Solid
Lubricants, MoS2 and Graphite - Adhesives – Development of Adhesive strength, Physical and
CO-5
Chemical factors influencing adhesive action, Classification of Adhesives – Epoxy Resin (Preparation,
BTL-2
Properties and Applications). Explosives – Requisites, Classification, Precautions during storage –
Rocket propellants – Requisites - Classification.
TEXT BOOKS
1. P.S. Raghavan (2018), Engineering Materials, Dhanam Publications
2. P.C. Jain and Monicka Jain (2012), Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Raj Publication (P) Ltd, New Delhi
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Puri, Sharma and Pathania (2020), Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co. Jalandar.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering-chemistry-by-jain-and-jain-pdf-free-ebook.html
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/materials-science-engineering-misisx-mse1x

COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH AND SOFT SKILLS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ELA4101 HS L-T-P-S 2-0-2-1
CATEGORY
24 ACM
LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details 30th May BTL- 3
LEVEL
2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Second Seminar/
First Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

31
 This course has been designed to meet students' current and future language and
communication needs. It attempts to develop their proficiency in the four language
Course
skills and knowledge of grammar and vocabulary. This course teaches students how to
Description
communicate accurately, appropriately and fluently in professional and social
situations.
1. To acquire self-confidence by which the learner can improve upon their informative
listening skills by an enhanced acquisition of the English language.
2. To provide an environment to Speak in English at the formal and informal levels and
use it for daily conversation, presentation, group discussion and debate.
3. To equip the students to Read, comprehend and answer questions based on literary,
Course scientific and technological texts.
Objective 4. To enhance the writing skills of the students via training in instructions,
recommendations, checklists, process-description, letter-writing and report
writing.
5. To equip the learners in analysing and applying creative thinking skills and
participate in brainstorming, mind-mapping, audiovisual activities and excel in
employability skills.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Demonstrate the ability to construct the grammatically correct sentences with
accuracy and syntax structures.
2. Integrate various components of English Language and determining it through
reading and listening.
3. Analyze and transcode data, construct different types of written essays, read
Course
complex passages and summarize ideas, create personal profiles in the form of a
Outcome
resume.
4. Organize and articulate ideas, concepts, and perceptions in a comprehensive
manner in written business correspondence, and speaking in formal and informal
situations.
5. Infer details about presentation skills and implementing it in various professional
situations.
Prerequisites: Plus Two English-Intermediate Level
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 1 1
CO-2 - - - - - - - 2 2 3 - - 1 1
CO-3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 1 1
CO-4 - - - - - - 2 - - 3 2 - 1 1
CO-5 - - - - - - - - 2 3 2 3 1 1

32
 1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: FUNCTIONAL GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY (6L + 6P=12)
Introduction to communication skills –Self Introduction - Basic grammar (tenses, subject verb
agreement) - Basic vocabulary (prefixes , suffixes, synonyms & antonyms, phrasal verbs and
idioms)- Topic sentences , paragraph writing
Suggested Activities:
Short conversations-Situational Communication-Dialogue Writing - Writing short
paragraph based on environment protection, societal issues, health, cultural contexts CO-1
etc., identifying topic sentences, linking pairs of sentences. BTL-2
Suggested Reading:
1. Dr. Bikram K. Das et al.(2009) An Introduction to Professional English and Soft Skills
with audio CD, Cambridge University Press.
2. John, Dolly(2014), English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T Skills, Pearson
Publications.
MODULE 2 – LISTENING AND SPEAKING SKILLS (6L + 6P=12)
Academic listening (listening to lectures different topics, audio excerpts and answering
question) - General listening (conversations, speeches: formal and informal) - Giving
instructions and suggestions- Active and Passive Voice
Suggested activities:
Listen and repeat, Listening to audio excerpts- Listening to native speakers - TED Talks,
short prepared speeches, Table topics – Speaking in different situations- MCQ’s - Cloze
exercises- Complete the Dialogue
CO-2
Suggested sources:
BTL-3
1. Bommelje, R. (2011). LISTEN, LISTEN, LISTEN. In The top 10 ways to strengthen your
self- leadership. International Listening Leadership Institute. Retrieved from
http://www.listening leaders.com/Articles.html
2. Hoppe, M. H. (2006). Active listening: Improve your ability to listen and lead [ebook].
Greensboro, NC: Center for Creative Leadership.
3. Barnes, D. (2008) Exploratory talk for learning in Mercer, N. and Hodgkinson, S. (eds)
Exploring Talk in School. London: Sage Publications
MODULE – 3 : FUNCTIONAL READING AND WRITING (6L+ 6P=12)
Reading comprehension (academic texts and general texts)-Reading and Interpreting
visual data, charts, tables and graphs-- Report writing- accident, industrial, survey,
general reports –Direct and Indirect speech
Suggested Activities:
Identify the errors in sentences, grammar exercise, reading passage for identifying the CO-3
contextual meaning, interpreting charts, tables and graphs, choose the right meaning of BTL-3
the word given
Assignment on suggested reading activity – Book review
Suggested sources:
1. Murphy, Raymond (2016) Essential English Grammar, Cambridge University Press.

33
MODULE – 4 : BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE (6L + 6P=12)
Memo-Notice - Agenda – Minutes of the Meeting-Action Taken report- Report Writing-
Connectives - Cause and effect
Suggested activities:
Drafting agenda, notice, memo, minutes of the meeting- ATR- Cause and effect exercises
CO-4
- Presentation in the language lab (Technical or Non-technical topic)
BTL-4
Suggested sources:
1. Bailey, E. (2008). Writing and speaking. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
2. Maynard-Smith, Julian. (2021), Ultimate Guide to Business Writing, All the Secrets of
Creating and Managing Business Documents, Routledge.
MODULE 5 – PRESENTATION SKILLS AND INTERVIEW SKILLS (6L + 6P=12)
Presentation Skills - Reading and Interpreting Advertisements—Job Application-
Covering Letter -Curriculum Vitae –E-mail - Project proposal –Interview skills (HR
questions) – Group Discussion
Suggested Activities: CO-5
Presentation in the language lab (Technical or Non-technical topic) BTL-4
Group Discussion (Technical or Non-technical topic)
Suggested Sources:
1. Manoharan. K(2016), Education and Personality Development, APH Publishing Home.
TEXT BOOKS
Professional Skills and Soft Skills(2020), Study Material, Hindustan Institute of Technology and
1.
Science.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Pillai, Sabina and Fernandez, Agna,(2018) Soft Skills & Employability Skills, Cambridge University
Press.
2. Steve Hart et al,(2016) Embark, English for Undergraduates, Cambridge University Press.
3. Butterfield, Jeff(2010) Soft Skills for Everyone, Cengage Learning.
4. Koneru, Aruna(2015) Professional Speaking Skills, Oxford University Publishers.
E BOOKS
1 https://www.britishcouncil.in/english/courses-business
2 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/features/pronunciation
3 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/
4 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/free-resources/write-and-improve/
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc-list.com/tags/english
2 https://www.mooc-list.com/course/adventures-writing-stanford-online
3 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/free-resources/mooc/

34
 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND COMPUTER AIDED
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
DESIGN
COURSE
COURSE CODE MEA4101 BS L-T-P-S 1-1-2-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Periodical Second Periodical
Practical Assessment ESE
Assessment Assessment
15% 15% 20% 50%
This course broadly introduces the mechanical design using computer aided design tools
and fundamentals of free hand sketching. It prepares the students to learn the basic
Course
concepts involved in technical drawing skills and computer graphics. It also emphasis on
Description
the principles and basic understanding of projections and visualizations aspects of
component designing.
1. To understand the basics of Engineering graphics and plane curvatures using
AutoCAD tool
2. To visualize the free hand sketch and orthographic projections and to solve simple
Course problems
Objective 3. To comprehend the various geometrical models and its developments
4. To understand the transformation of 2D drafting to 3D models using CAD tools
5. To generate associated views of 3D models and related geometric dimensioning and
tolerencing.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Use the AutoCAD commands to generate simple drawings and understand drafting
techniques.
2. Apply the acquired knowledge to solve simple problems involving straight planes
Course
and solids.
Outcome
3. Visualize solid objects and apply AutoCAD commands to generate the models.
4. Recognize and use 3D model commands in AutoCAD tool to generate solid objects.
5. Generate the various views of the geometrical solid model manually and using
AutoCAD as well.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-2 - - 2 - 3 - - - - - - - 1 -

35
CO-3 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - 1 1
CO-4 - - - - 3 - - - - - 1 - 1 1
CO-5 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: BASICS OF ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND PLANE CURVES (6L+6P=12)
Importance of graphics - BIS conventions and specifications - drawing sheet sizes - Lettering
– Dimensioning - Scales. Drafting methods - introduction to Computer Aided Drafting –
Computer Hardware – Workstation – Printer and Plotter – Introduction to software for
Computer Aided Design and Drafting – Exposure to Solid Modelling software – Geometrical
CO-1
Construction-Coordinate Systems/Basic Entities – 3D printer.
BTL-2
Practical component:
AutoCAD – Solid modelling tool - Basics.
Suggested Readings:
Basics of drafting and dimensioning
MODULE 2: VISUALIZATION, ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND FREE HAND SKETCHING (6L+6P=12)
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation
of Three Dimensional objects — Pictorial Projection methods - Layout of views- Free hand
sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of objects. Drafting of simple Geometric
Objects/Editing General principles of presentation of technical drawings as per BIS -
Introduction to Orthographic projections - Naming views as per BIS - First angle projection
CO-2
method. Conversion to orthographic views from given pictorial views of objects, including
BTL-2
dimensioning – Drafting of Orthographic views from Pictorial views.
Practical component:
2D drafting, Orthographic projections
Suggested Readings:
AutoCAD tool – Commands for sketching , Projections
MODULE 3: GEOMETRICAL MODELLING, ISOMETRIC AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES (6L+6P=12)
Principles of isometric projection and solid modelling. Isometric drawing – IsoPlanes and 3D
Modelling commands. Projections of Principal Views from 3-D Models. Solid Modeling –
Types of modelling - Wire frame model, Surface Model and Solid Model – Introduction to
graphic software for solid modelling. Development of Surfaces CO-3
Practical component: BTL-3
3D modelling and surface development
Suggested Readings:
Surface modelling and solid modelling
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING (6L+6P=12)

36
Preparation of solid models of machine components like slide block, solid bearing block,
bushed bearing, gland, wall bracket, guide bracket, shaft bracket, jig plate, shaft support
(open type), vertical shaft support etc using appropriate modelling software. 2D views and
sectional view, computer aided drafting and dimensioning. Generate 2D drawing from the
3D models – generate and develop the lateral surfaces of the objects. Presentation
CO-4
Techniques of Engineering Drawings – Title Blocks – Printing/Plotting the 2D/3D drawing
BTL-2
using printer and printing solid object using 3D printer.
Practical component:
2D to 3D transformation, plotting of drawings
Suggested Readings:
3D modelling – view generations and commands
MODULE 5: SIMPLE DESIGN PROJECTS – COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN (6L+6P=12)
Creation of engineering models and their presentation in standard 2D form, 3D Wire-Frame
and shaded solids, meshed topologies for engineering analysis, tool-path generation for
component manufacture, geometric dimensioning and tolerencing. Use of solid-modelling
software for creating associative models at the components and assembly levels in their
respective branch of engineering like building floor plans that include: windows, doors,
CO-5
fixtures such as WC, Sink, shower, slide block, etc. Applying color coding according to
BTL-3
drawing practice.
Practical component:
3D solid meshed topology, geometrical dimensioning, simple components
Suggested Readings:
AutoCAD dimensioning, assembly of solid components
TEXT BOOKS
Jeyapoovan, T. (2016). Engineering Drawing and Graphics Using AutoCAD, 7th Edition, Vikas
1.
Publishing House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Warren J. Luzadder and Jon. M. Duff. (2016). Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing,
1.
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., Eleventh Edition.
Jensen, J.D. Helsel, D.R. Short. (2012). Engineering Drawing and Design, McGraw-Hill, Sixth
2.
Edition.
E BOOKS
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering-graphics-j-
1.
benjamin-pentex-freeebook-pdf-download.html
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering-graphics-p-i-
2.
varghese.html
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104148/

37
COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CREDITS 3
COURSE
ECB4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2-0-2-0
CODE
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second
Seminar/ Surprise
Periodical Periodical Attendance ESE
Assignments/ Project Test / Quiz
Assessment Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Engineering design is the process of devising a system, component, or process to meet
desired needs. This purpose of this course is to excite the student on creative design and
Course its significance, to make the student aware of the processes involved in design, to make
Description the student understand the interesting interaction of various segments of humanities,
sciences and engineering in the evolution of a design and also to get an exposure as to
how to engineer a design.
1. Understand the broad scope of design engineering
2. Recognise the main drivers for design engineering
3. Describe how human variation impacts on design engineering
Course
4. Apply some basic concepts and methods from design engineering to explore
Objective
creative solutions to clearly defined real world problems
5. Demonstrate skills in communication, presentation, information handling and
numeracy through the completion of activities.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Identify different elements involved in good designs and to apply them in practice
when called for.
2. Interpolate the product oriented and user oriented aspects that make the design a
Course success.
Outcome 3. Select innovative designs incorporating different segments of knowledge gained in
the course
4. Interpret broader perspective of design covering function, cost, environmental
sensitivity, safety and other factors other than engineering analysis.
5. Summarize the economic and environmental Issues, trade aspects and IPR
Prerequisites : NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 3 - - 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 - 1

38
CO-2 2 3 3 - - 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 - -

CO-3 2 3 3 - - 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 - 1

CO-4 2 3 3 - - 2 2 1 2 1 - 2 - 1
CO-5 2 3 3 - - 2 2 1 2 3 - 2 - 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
Module 1:Introduction to Electronic System Design (7L + 2P)
Design and its objectives; Design constraints, Design functions, Design means and Design
from; Role of Science, Engineering and Technology in design; Engineering as a business
proposition; Functional and
Strength Designs. Design form, function and strength; How to initiate creative designs?
Initiating the thinking process for designing a product of daily use. Need identification; CO-1
Problem Statement; Market survey-customer requirements; Design attributes and BTL-3
objectives; Ideation; Brain storming approaches; arriving at solutions; Closing on to the
Design needs.
Project: An Exercise in the process of design initiation. A simple problem is to be taken up to
examine different solutions- Ceiling fan? Group Presentation and discussion.
Module 2: Electronic System Design Processes (7L + 2P)
Design process- Different stages in design and their significance; Defining the design space;
Analogies and “thinking outside of the box”; Quality function deployment-meeting what
the customer wants; Evaluation and choosing of a design. Design Communication;
Realization of the concept into a configuration, drawing and model. Concept of “Complex
CO-2
is Simple”. Design for function and strength.
BTL-4
Design detailing- Material selection, Design visualization- Solid modelling; Detailed 2D
drawings; Tolerance; Use of standard items in design; Research needs in design; Energy
needs of the design, both in its realization and in the applications.
Project:An exercise in the detailed design of any two products
Module 3: Prototyping in Electronics Engineering (4L + 5P)
Prototyping- rapid prototyping; testing and evaluation of design; Design modifications;
Freezing the design; Cost analysis.
Engineering the design – From prototype to product. Planning; Scheduling; Supply chains;
CO-3
inventory; handling; manufacturing/construction operations; storage; packaging; shipping;
BTL-4
marketing; feed-back on design
Project: List out the standards organizations. Prepare a list of standard items used in any
engineering specialization. Develop any design with over 50% standard items as parts
Module 4: Quality Aspects for Electronic System Design (4L+ 5P)

Design for “X”; covering quality, reliability, safety, manufacturing/construction, assembly, CO-4
maintenance, logistics, handling; disassembly; recycling; re-engineering etc. BTL-4

39
Project: Example: List out the design requirements(x) for designing a rocket shell of 3-meter
diameter and 8-meter length. Design mineral water bottles that could be packed compactly
for transportation.

Module 5: User Centered Designs for Electronic System (4L + 5P)

Product centered and user centered design. Product centered attributes and user centered
attributes. Bringing the two closer. Example: Smart phone. Aesthetics and ergonomics. Value
engineering, Concurrent engineering, Reverse engineering in design; Culture based design;
Architectural designs; Motifs and cultural background; Tradition and design; Study the
CO-5
evolution of Wet grinders; Printed motifs; Role of colours in design. Make sharp corners and
BTL-4
change them to smooth curves-check the acceptance. Design as a marketing tool; Intellectual
Property rights – Trade secret; patent; copy-right; trademarks; product liability. Group
presentation of any such products covering all aspects that could make or mar it.
Project: Examine the possibility of value addition for an existing product.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Balmer, R. T., Keat, W. D., Wise, G., and Kosky, P., Exploring Engineering, Third Edition: An
Introduction to Engineering and Design - [Part 3 - Chapters 17 to 27], ISBN13: 978-0124158917
ISBN-10: 0124158919
2 Dym, C. L., Little, P. and Orwin, E. J., Engineering Design - A Project based introduction - Wiley,
ISBN-978-1-118-32458-5
REFERENCE BOOKS
Eastman, C. M. (Ed.), Design for X Concurrent engineering imperatives, 1996, XI, 489 p. ISBN 978-
1
94-011-3985-4 Springer
Haik, Y. And Shahin, M. T., Engineering Design Process, Cengage Learning, ISBN-13: 978-0-495-
2
66816-9
Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J. and Grote, K. H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
3
Approach, 3rd ed. 2007, XXI, 617p., ISBN 978-1-84628-319-2
4 Voland, G., Engineering by Design, ISBN 978-93-325-3505-3, Pearson India
E BOOKS
1 https://www.kobo.com/us/en/ebook/engineering-design-3
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc-list.com/course/principles-engineering-futurelearn
2 https://www.mooc-list.com/course/decision-making-engineering-design-edx

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN CREDITS 4

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4116 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL

40
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module describes the reduction of the given logical expressions using Boolean
algebra also by algorithmic methods. It covers the combinational logic circuit problems,
Course sequential circuit analysis and synthesis, Semiconductor memories, programmable
Description devices and logic Families and their characteristics. Last module focusses completely on
the applications and gives an introduction about the Verilog software and design the
basic and complex circuits using HDL language.
1. To acquire the basic knowledge of digital logic levels and application of knowledge
Course to understand digital electronics circuits.
Objective 2. To prepare students to perform the analysis and design of various digital electronic
circuits.
Students will be able to
1. Analyze and reduce the given logical expressions using Boolean algebra also by
algorithmic methods
Course
2. Design the combinational logic circuits of basic and specified problem statement
Outcome
3. Design and analyze the function of specified sequential logic circuits
4. Implement the logic functions using Programmable devices
5. Use VHDL for digital logic design and simulation
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-2 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-4 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-5 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – BOOLEAN ALGEBRA & ITS SIMPLIFICATION TECHNIQUES (9L+3T)

41
Binary arithmetic – Logic Gates – Minimization of POS and SOP Reduction of switching
equations using Boolean algebra, Realization of switching function. DE Morgan’s Theorem.
Karnaugh map simplification method (up to 4 variables) – Advantages and Limitations – CO-1
Quine McClusky’s method. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Computational efficiency and cost requirement of circuits using various codes.

MODULE 2 – DESIGN OF BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (9L+3T)

Adders – Subtractors – Binary parallel adders, Parallel subtractors, Parallel adder/

subtractors, Binary decoders and encoders – Priority encoders – Multiplexers – MUX as
CO-2
universal combinational modules – De-multiplexers.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Advanced arithmetic (data manipulation) circuit to reduce delay and cost

MODULE 3 – FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN ANALYSIS OF SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (9L+3T)

Flip flops – SR, JK, D and T flip flops, Master – Slave flip flops, Characteristic and excitation
table – Shift registers – Counters – Synchronous and Asynchronous counters – Modulus
counters, Up/Down counters – State diagram, State table, State minimization techniques- CO-3
Design of synchronous sequential circuits BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Asynchronous digital circuit design methods and its challenges
MODULE 4 – SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES (9L+3T)
Semiconductor memories- Classification of memories –Programmable Logic Devices –Logic
Implementation with Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable Array Logic (PAL) –
concept of Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA). TTL, ECL and CMOS logic family concepts CO-4
and their characteristics BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Advanced materials and their characteristics used for memory construction
MODULE 5 –DESIGN TECHNIQUES USING VHDL LANGUAGE (9L+3T)
Introduction to Hardware description languages- Data types and objects- operators- type of
delays Entity and Architectural declaration- VHDL Modelling styles – Dataflow, Structural
CO-5
and Behavioral models for basic combinational circuits.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
VHDL tools like Xiinx
TEXT BOOKS
1. Morris Mano, “Digital design”, 5 th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2012
2. Anil K. Maini, “Digital Electronics: Principles, Devices and Applications”, Willey, 2007
3. Charles Roth, “ Digital System Design using VHDL” ,Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS

42
 1. Milos Ercegovac, Jomas Lang, “Introduction to Digital Systems”, Wiley publications,
2009.
2. John M. Yarbrough, “Digital logic: Applications and Design”, Thomas – Vikas Publishing
House, 2002.
3. R.P.Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”,4th Edition, TMH, 2010.
4. William H. Gothmann, “ Digital Electronics- An introduction to theory and practice” , PHI,
2 nd edition ,2006
E BOOKS
1 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/264005171_Digital_Electronics 2
2 http://free-ebook-download-links.blogspot.in/2008/08/free-books-on-digital-
electronics.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106086/1
2 https://www.openlearning.com/courses/SKEE1223x

COURSE TITLE NETWORK THEORY CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4117 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0

24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second
Seminar/ Surprise
Periodical Periodical Attendance ESE
Assignments/ Project Test / Quiz
Assessment Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Fundamental laws and theorems governing electrical circuits at dc and low frequencies
are discussed in this course using which the students can analyze a wide range of
complex circuits. Transient and steady state response of circuits are studied in this
Course
course can help the students to design better circuits for the desired function. Concept
Description
of two port networks, which we learn here, helps us understand and analyze different
two-port devices such as TV receiver, Transformers and other devices we use in
everyday life.
1. To learn techniques of solving circuits involving different active and passive
elements.
2. To analyze the behavior of the circuit’s frequency response.
Course
3. To predict the transient response of first and second order circuits
Objective
4. To understand the significance of network functions.
5. To make the students learn how to synthesize an electrical network from a given
impedance/admittance function.

43
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Identify the main circuit elements and apply Kirchhoff’s Laws to calculate currents,
voltages using a variety of analytical methods and reduce more complicated circuits
into the Thevenin’s and Norton’s equivalent circuits.
2. Obtain the maximum power transfer to the load and able to Analyze the series
resonant and parallel resonant circuits.
Course
3. Evaluate the time response of basic circuits with one energy storage element to the
Outcome
sudden application of DC voltage or current as well as to the sudden change in the
circuit configuration.
4. Analyze the two port network with various network parameter techniques and able
to understand the relation between all the network parameters
5. Synthesis the network parameters (such as , h & ABCD) and able understand the
various active filters.
Prerequisites: Trigonometric formulae, Methods of differentiation, Methods of integration, Partial
Fractions, Matrices, Laplace Transforms.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 -
CO-2 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO-3 3 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO-4 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO-5 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: CIRCUIT ANALYSIS & THEOREMS (9L+3T=12)
Kirchoff’s current and voltage laws – Nodal and Mesh analysis - series and parallel connection
of independent sources – R, L and C – Network Theorems – Thevenin, Superposition, Norton,
CO-1
Maximum power transfer and duality – Star-delta conversion
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Evolution of cyber security
MODULE 2: RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS (9L+3T=12)
Series and parallel resonance – their frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth -
Self and mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Tuned circuits – Single tuned circuits. CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Advances in Cyber Security: Principles, Techniques, and Applications
MODULE 3: TRANSIENT RESPONSE FOR DC & AC CIRCUITS (9L+3T=12)
Transient response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for DC input and A.C. CO-3
with sinusoidal input BTL-4

44
 Suggested Readings:
Best practices for Cyber security standards
MODULE 4: TWO PORT NETWORKS (9L+3T=12)
One port networks – Two port admittance Parameters (Y parameters) – Admittance
parameters analysis of terminated Two Port networks - Two port impedance Parameters (z-
parameters) – Impedance and Gain calculations of terminated Two Port networks modelled CO-4
by z-parameters BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Cyber-attacks, counter measures and protection schemes
MODULE 5: NETWORK PARAMETERS AND FILTERS (9L+3T=12)
Hybrid parameters (h- para)– Inverse Hybrid Parameters (g-para)- Transmission
parameters (ABCD parameters) - Various Combinations of Two port N/W.- Introduction and
CO-5
functions of active filters- band pass, low pass, high pass and band reject filters.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Next-generation digital forensics
TEXT BOOKS
1 Network Analysis & Synthesis By Franklin S. KUO, Wiley Publication, 2006.
2 Network Analysis: - By M.E Van Valkenburg PHI Publication, 2016.
Engineering Circuit Analysis: - By W H Hayt, J E Kemmerly, S M Durbin 6th Edition TMH Publication,
3
2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Electric Circuits and Networks: - By K. S. Suresh Kumar – Pearson Education, 2009.
Linear Circuits Analysis 2nd edition:-By DeCarlo/ Lin – Oxford University Press (Indian edition),
2
2001.
Electric Circuit Analysis By S N Sivanandam, Vikas Publishing House Introductory Circuit Analysis
3
by Robert Boylestad, Pearson, 2004.
E BOOKS
1 http://engineeronadisk.com/
2 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105159/
2 www.allaboutcircuits.com

SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING SYSTEMS

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 2
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)

45
 COURSE
COURSE CODE GEA4102 BS L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course focuses on the interactions of engineering, society and ecological systems.
Specifically, the program studies the relationship of engineering to economic development,
environmental impact, social structure, and the sustainability of natural resources. This
Course course examines how engineering activities influence human well-being as a whole
Description complex system and will provide students with knowledge and methods to analyze and
solve sustainable development problems. The module description of the Sustainable
Engineering Systems applies a holistic and systemic approach to solving problems and move
beyond the tradition of breaking designs down into disconnected parts.
Students will be able to
1. Outline the strategy of sustainability and apply for simple system design
2. Formulate and analyze the Technology readiness level and Life cycle assessment of
Course
a product / process
Objective
3. Study and analyze the impact of green engineering
4. Conceptualize the waste management purpose and strategies
5. Apply suitable water management solutions for societal needs
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Identify the strategies for retaining principles of sustainability and apply the
approach for simple system design with examples.
2. Interpolate the assessing technologies and their impact on environment.
Course
3. Predict the impact of Green Engineering.
Outcome
4. Use LCA approach for Management of natural resources and waste management
from various types of industries.
5. Select Sustainable Water technologies for assessment of waste water treatment
6. Interpret the Behavioral aspects of humans and feedback
Prerequisites: Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - - - - 3 1 2 2 - 2 1 1

46
CO-2 2 3 - - 3 - 3 1 2 2 - 2 - -
CO-3 2 3 - - - 1 3 1 2 2 - 2 - -
CO-4 2 3 - - - 1 3 1 2 2 - 2 1 1
CO-5 2 3 - - 2 2 3 1 2 2 - 2 - -
CO-6 1 1 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2 - - - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE SYSTEMS (5L)
Sustainability Definitions - Principles of Sustainable Design, Sustainable Engineering -
Frameworks for Applying Sustainability Principles - Summary & Activities. CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Biomimicry in Infrastructure, Technology and Design
MODULE 2: TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT AND LIFECYCLE ASSESSMENT (5L)
Technology as a part of anthropogenic environment - Technology readiness levels (TRL) –
technical metrics - Emerging, converging, disruptive technologies - Life Cycle Assessment
CO-2
(LCA) methodology - Summary & Activities
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Open LCA tools and Case study on non-sustainable products
MODULE 3: GREEN ENGINEERING (5L)
Principles of Green Engineering - Frameworks for assessment of alternatives - Green
Engineering examples - Multifunctional Materials and Their Impact on Sustainability -
CO-3
Summary & Activities.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Best practices for green buildings
MODULE 4: RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES (5L)
Waste management purpose and strategies - Recycling: open-loop versus closed-loop
thinking - Recycling efficiency - Management of food waste and composting technologies -
E-waste stream management - Reuse and redistribution programs - LCA approach to waste CO-4
management systems - Summary and Activities. BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
E waste schemes
MODULE 5: SUSTAINABLE WATER AND WASTEWATER SYSTEMS (5L)
Water cycle - Water conservation and protection technologies - Water treatment systems
Metrics for assessment of water management technologies - Summary & Activities. CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Water Conservation Strategies
MODULE 6: BEHAVIORAL ASPECTS AND FEEDBACKS (5L)
Collaborative Decision Making - Role of Community and Social Networking - Human Factor CO-6
in Sustainability Paradigm - Summary & Activities. BTL-2

47
TEXT BOOKS
Vanek, F.M., and L.D. Albright, Energy Systems Engineering. Evaluation and Implementation,
1
McGraw Hill, 2008.
2 C.U. Becker, Sustainability Ethics and Sustainability Research, Springer 2012.
J.B. Guinee et al., Life Cycle Assessment: Past, Present, and Future, Environ. Sci. Technol.,
3
2011, 45, 90-96.
Anastas, P.T., Zimmerman, J.B., Innovations in Green Chemistry and Green Engineering,
4
Springer 2013.
Solid Waste Technology & Management, Volume 1 & 2, Christensen, T., Ed., Wiley and Sons.,
5
2010.
Sterman, J.D., in Sustainability Science: The Emerging Paradigm, Weinstein, M.P. and Turner,
6
R.E. (Eds.), Springer Science+Business Media, LLC 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS
David T. Allen, David R. Shonnard, Sustainable Engineering Concepts, Design and Case
1
Studies, Pearson Education, December 2011. (ISBN: 9780132756587)
Gerald Jonker Jan Harmsen, Engineering for Sustainability 1st Edition, A Practical Guide for
2
Sustainable Design, Elsvier 2012. (ISBN: 9780444538475).
E BOOKS
1. https://www.oreilly.com/library/view/sustainable-engineering-concepts/9780132756563/
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/sustainability
2 https://www.academiccourses.com/Certificate/Sustainability-Studies/India/

3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ce08/preview

4 https://www.coursera.org/learn/ecosystem-services

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4141 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
To provide hand-on experience in designing and implementing digital/logic circuits. The
Course laboratory exercises are designed to give students ability to design, build, and implement
Description digital circuits and systems. The first half of the course uses standard TTL chips, wires
and a proto board. The second half of the course uses VHDL programming tool for

48
 simulation. Laboratory assignments progress from investigation of the properties of
basic logic gates and flip-flops to the design of combinational and sequential circuits.

1. To enable students to design and verify the operations of digital logic circuits
Course practically
Objective 2. To impart the practical approach through simulation program on the design and
operations of digital circuits.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course 1. Design and implement basic and other stated combinational logic circuits.
Outcome 2. Design and implement basic and other stated sequential logic circuits.
3. Design and Simulate basic Combinational logic circuits using VHDL language.

Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-2 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-3 3 2 - - 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING DIGITAL GATES AND ICS
1. Design and implementation of Adders and Subtractors using logic gates.
2. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ subtractor and BCD adder using IC 7483
3. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates
(i) BCD to excess-3 code and vice versa
(ii) Binary to gray and vice-versa
4. Design and implementation of 2Bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates and 8 Bit Magnitude
Comparator using IC 7485
5. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De-multiplexer using logic Gates
6. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates
7. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod-10 counters
8. Design and implementation of 3-bit synchronous up/down counter
9. Design and Verification of truth table of Master slave JK flip flop.
10. Design of Asynchronous up Counter.(MOD-6)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING VHDL LANGUAGE
1. Design of Adders and Subtractors using VHDL
2. Design of Multiplexers and De-Multiplexers using VHDL

49
 3. Design of 4 bit Ripple Counter and MOD 10 Counter using VHDL.
REFERENCE BOOKS
L K Maheswari and M M S Anand, “Laboratory Manual for Introductory Electronic
1.
Experiments”, New Age, 2010
S Poornachandra Rao and B Sasikala, “Handbook of Experiments in Electronics and
2.
Communication Engineering”,Vikas publishers, 2003.
MOOC
1. https://epd.sutd.edu.sg/undergraduate-courses/30110-digital-systems-laboratory/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-111-
2.
introductory-digital-systems-laboratory-spring-2006/

COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB CREDITS 0.5

COURSE
COURSE CODE GEA4131 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
Course Engineering Immersion Lab helps the students to understand and familiarize the basic
Description knowledge on Computer, Electrical, Electronic and Mechanical Engineering domains
Course To make students trained on basic engineering experiments in Computer, Electrical,
Objective Electronic and Mechanical Engineering fields.
1. Identify and use of tools, accessories, trouble shooting, software installations,
Course
Assembling and fabrication techniques in basic Engineering domains.
Outcome
2. Have hands on experience on designing circuits for various applications.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 1 1
CO-2 2 1 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
GROUP A - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. Welding: Arc welding: Butt joints

50
 2. Lap joints
3. Machining: Facing
4. Turning
II. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
1. Dismantling and Studying of two stroke gasoline engine
2. Assembling of two stroke gasoline engine.
3. Dismantling and Studying of four stroke gasoline engine
4. Assembling of four stroke gasoline engine.
III. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of Flow Pattern around Various Objects.
2. Force measurement on Aircraft Model
3. Determination of Young's Modulus for Aluminum Cantilever Beam
4. Binary Addition & Subtraction using Microprocessor
IV. CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Plumbing- Basic Pipe Connection using valves, couplings and elbows.
2. Carpentry – Sowing, Planning and making common Joints.
3. Bar Bending
4. Construction of a 50 cm height brick wall without mortar using English Bond.
GROUP B - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
V. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of tools and accessories
2. Study of cables.
3. Staircase wiring, Tube light and Fan connection
4. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
VI. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Active and Passive Components.
2. Study of Logic Circuits.
3. Making simple circuit using Electronic Components.
4. Measuring of parameters for signal using CRO.
VII. COMPUTER SCIENCE
1. Troubleshooting different parts of the computer peripherals, Monitor, Keyboard & CPU.
2. Installation of various operating systems, their capabilities, Windows, Unix, Linux.
3. Installation of commonly used software like MS Office
4. Assembling digital computer.
VIII. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Key Elements of Mechatronics Systems
2. Sensors – Load Cell, Thermocouple
3. Actuators – Linear & Rotary Actuators
4. Interfacing & Measurements – Virtual Instrumentation
REFERENCE BOOKS

51
 Jeyapoovan T and Saravanapandian M., Engineering practices lab manual, 4th Edition, Vikas
1
publishing House, New Delhi, 2015.
Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
2 Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi,
3
2011
Robert Quesada, Jeyapoovan T., Computer Numerical Control Machining and Turning Centers,
4
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006

ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 1
(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
COURSE
COURSE CODE PHA4131 BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CATEGORY
24th ACM - LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.5.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Experimental Calculation Result Viva Record ESE

30 10 10 20 10 20%
Course This course imparts practical knowledge on experimental methods to determine
Description mechanical and optical properties of materials.
1. To train students to determine elastic properties of materials
2. To provide a practical exposure to measure viscosity of liquids.
Course
3. To train students to estimate the thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
Objective
4. To equip students to utilize light beam to analyse materials.
5. To impart hands-on training in plotting the V-I characteristics of p-n junction diode
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. determine the Young’s modulus and rigidity modulus of materials
2. measure viscosity of liquids by Poiseuille’s flow
Course
3. determine thermal conductivity of a bad conductor by Lee’s disc method
Outcome
4. apply phenomena of light to determine the thickness of a thin wire and refractive
index of a material
5. analyse V-I characteristics of a p-n junction diode.
Prerequisites: Knowledge in Physics practical at higher secondary level
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING

52
 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-2 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-3 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-4 3 3 - - 3 - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
CO-5 3 -3 - - - - - 3 - - 3 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PROPERTIES OF MATTER- SOLID (9P)
1. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a wire.
2. Non Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus. CO-1
3. Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus. BTL-3

MODULE 2: PROPERTIES OF MATTER- LIQUID (3P)

4. Viscosity – Determination of co-efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s flow. CO-2
BTL-3
MODULE 3: THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (3P)
5. Lee’s Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad CO-3
conductor.Preparation of urea-formaldehyde resin. BTL-3
MODULE 4: OPTICS (6P)
6. Air – Wedge – Determination of thickness of a thin wire
CO-4
7. Spectrometer – refractive index of a prism
BTL-3
8. Semiconductor laser – Determination of wavelength of laser using grating
MODULE 5: ESTIMATION METAL ION CONTENTS IN THE SAMPLE (6P)
9. Semiconductor diode – VI characteristics CO-5
BTL-3
TEXT BOOKS
1. P. Mani, engineering Physics Practicals, Dhanam Publications, Chennai, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
Glenn V. Lo, Jesus Urrechaga - Aituna, Introductory Physics Laboratory Manual, Part-I, Fall 2005
1.
Edition.
P. Kulkarni, Experiments in Engineering Physics Bachelor of Engineering and Technology, Edition
2.
2015
E BOOKS
http://www.aurora.ac.in/images/pdf/departments/humanities-and-sciences/engg-phy-lab-
1.
manual.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.vlab.co.in/broad-area-physical-sciences
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/105/115105110/#

53
 MATERIALS CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 1
(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
COURSE
COURSE CODE CYA4131 BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-2
CATEGORY
24th ACM - LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.5.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Experimental Calculation Result Viva Record ESE

30 10 10 20 10 20%
This course imparts practical exposure on basic techniques employed for the analyses
Course
of lubricants, refractories & other engineering materials and spectrophotometric
Description
analyses for metal ions.
1. To train the students in characterization of lubricants by viscosity measurement.
2. To give a practical exposure for the construction of phase diagram, for partially-
miscible liquids (phenol-water system)
Course 3. To provide the students practical knowledge in preparation of polymers (urea-
Objective formaldehyde resin)
4. To impart hands-on training in characterization of refractories.
5. To equip the students with practical skill in estimation of metal ions by
spectrophotometry.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. grade the lubricants based on viscosity
2. analyze the phase diagram and interpret the critical solution temperature.
Course 3. apply the practical knowledge gained on the preparation of polymers, for the
Outcome preparation of other similar macromolecules.
4. analyze the strength of refractories.
5. apply the spectrophotometric method for the determination of metal ions in
different environment.
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-2 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-3 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
CO-4 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -

54
CO-5 3 2 1 - - - 2 - - - - 2 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PROPERTIES OF LUBRICANTS (6 P)
1. Determination of viscosity of polymer using Ostwald Viscometer.
CO-1
2. Determination of Viscosity Index of lubricants.
BTL-3
3. Determination of viscosity of oil using Red-Wood Viscometer.
MODULE 2: PHASE DIAGRAM IN LIQUID SYSTEM (6 P)
4. Construction of phenol-water phase diagram. CO-2
5. Determination of adsorption isotherm for acetic acid on activated charcoal. BTL-3
MODULE 3: PREPARATION POLYMER RESIN. (6 P)
6. Preparation of urea-formaldehyde resin. CO-3
BTL-3
MODULE 4: BASIC PROPERTIES OF REFRACTORIES (6 P)
7. Determination of porosity of a refractory. CO-4
8. Determination of apparent density of porous solids. BTL-3
MODULE 5: ESTIMATION METAL ION CONTENTS IN THE SAMPLE (6 P)
9. Estimation of dye content in the effluent by UV-Visible spectrophotometry.
10. Determination of copper / iron content in the alloy by colorimetry. CO-5
11. Estimation of sodium and potassium ions by flame photometry. BTL-3
12. Verification of Beer-Lambert’s law using gold nanoparticles.
TEXT BOOKS
1. P.S. Raghavan (2018), Materials Chemicals Laboratory Manual, Dhanam Publications.
REFERENCE BOOKS
J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J.D. Barnes and N.J.K. Thomas (2009), Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
1.
Chemical Analysis, 6th Edition, Pearson Education.
E BOOKS
http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering-chemistry-by-jain-and-jain-pdf-free-
1.
ebook.html
MOOC
1. https://www.coursetalk.com/providers/coursera/courses/introduction-to-chemistry-1

SEMESTER III
COURSE TITLE PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS CREDITS 4
COURSE COURSE
MAA4201 BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-1
CODE CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

55
 First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Course To make the student understand the basic concepts of partial differential equations
Description and transforms and its applications
1. To present the main results in the context of partial differential equations and to
study numerical methods for the approximation of their solution
Course 2. To introduce the wave equation including time and position dependence
Objective 3. To mathematically model the way thermal energy moves through the plate
4. To understand the concept of Fourier transform
5. To understand the concept of Z-transform and its properties

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. formulate and solve standard types of partial differential equations
Course 2. solve the Wave and Heat equations
Outcome 3. obtain the solution of two dimensional heat equations
4. evaluate the definite integrals using Fourier transform
5. compute the solution of difference equation using Z-Transform.

Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-2 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-5 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9L+3T=12)
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants, arbitrary
functions - Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations - Lagrange's
CO-1
linear equation - Linear partial differential equations of second order with constant
BTL-4
coefficients.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differentiation
MODULE 2: ONE DIMENSIONAL WAVE AND HEAT FLOW EQUATION (9L+3T=12)

56
Classification of second order linear partial differential equations - Solutions of one
dimensional wave equation (without proof) - One dimensional heat flow equation (without CO-2
proof) and application in string and rod problems. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Partial Differential Equations, Half range sine series.
MODULE 3: TWO DIMENSIONAL HEAT FLOW EQUATION (9L+3T=12)
Steady state solution of two dimensional heat equations and applications in finite plates and
CO-3
infinite plates problems.
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Partial Differential Equations, Half range sine series.
MODULE 4: FOURIER TRANSFORM (9L+3T=12)
Fourier Integral Theorem (without proof) - Fourier transform pair - Sine and Cosine
transforms - Properties - Transforms of Simple functions - Convolution theorem - Parseval's CO-3
identity. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Basic integration.
MODULE 5: Z-TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS (9L+3T=12)
Z-Transform - Elementary Properties - Inverse Z-Transform - Convolution theorem -
CO-4
Formation of Difference equations - Solution of difference equations using Z-Transform
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Basic calculus
TEXT BOOKS
P. Sivarama Krishna Das, C. VijayakumarL, "Transforms and partial differential equations",
1.
1 Pearson Publication, 2011
Grewal. B.S., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi,
2.
2012
Chandrasekaran A, "A Text Book of Transforms and Partial Differential Equations",
3.
Dhanam Publication, 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS
BaILN.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Laxmi
1.
Publications Pvt Ltd , 2007.
Datta.K.B., "Mathematical Methods of Science and Engineering", Cengage Learning India
2.
Pvt Ltd, Delhi, 2013.
Veerarajan. T., "Transforms and Partial Differential Equations", Tata McGraw Hill
3.
Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Second reprint, 2012.
E BOOKS
1. nptel.ac.in/courses/122107037/
2. nptel.ac.in/courses/122107037/22
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.o rg/course/introduction-differential-equations-bux-math226-1x-1
COURSE TITLE ANALOG ELECTRONICS CREDITS 4
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4201 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY

57
 24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise Test
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Analog Electronics deals with electronic systems that has a continuous variable signal.
Course In this course, the foundation of various analog electronic circuits that can be used to
Description design amplifiers, oscillators, filters, analog converters, waveform generators and
other analog circuits as required for the application is learned by the student.
1. To develop the principles behind the design of an amplifier.
2. To build tuned amplifier and feedback Amplifiers
Course 3. To design an operational-amplifier independently well before the end of the
Objective course
4. To select appropriate wave shaping circuits to solve problems
5. To familiarize the basic concepts of converters and ICs.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Apply different biasing, classify the types and solve problems on different
amplifier circuits.
Course
2. Analyse the characteristics of tuned amplifier and feedback Amplifiers
Outcome
3. Describe the linear Op‐Amps, its applications and special ICs
4. Identify appropriate wave shaping circuits to solve problems.
5. Discuss the applications of analog electronic circuits.
Prerequisites: PHA4102-Engineering Physics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - 1
CO-2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 - 1
CO-3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 - 1
CO-4 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 - 1
CO-5 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 - 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: SMALL SIGNAL AND LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS (9L+3T=12)
Fixed and self-biasing of BJT & FET – Small signal analysis of CE, CC & Common source
CO-1
amplifiers – Cascade and Darlington connections, transformer coupled class A, B & AB
BTL-4
amplifiers – Push-pull amplifiers.

58
Suggested Reading: Robert. L. Boylsted and Louis Nashelsky, "Electronic Devices and
Circuit Theory”, Pearson Education, 9th edition, 2009.

MODULE 2: FEEDBACK AND TUNED AMPLIFIERS (9L+3T=12)

Characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers – Voltage / current, series/shunt feedback
- Characteristics of tuned amplifiers – Single & double tuned amplifier, Stagger tuned and
CO-2
Synchronized tuned amplifiers and Neutralization Techniques.
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Robert. L. Boylsted and Louis Nashelsky, "Electronic Devices and
Circuit Theory”, Pearson Education, 9th edition, 2009.
MODULE 3: LINEAR OP-APMPs AND ITS APPLICATIONS (9L+3T=12)
Linear Circuits using operational amplifiers and their analysis, Inverting and Non inverting
Amplifiers, Differentiator, Integrator, Voltage to current converter, Instrumentation
amplifier, Low-pass and band-pass filters, Comparator, Triangular wave generator, CO-3
Precision rectifier, Log and Antilog amplifiers, Non-linear function generator. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Thomas L. Floyd, "Electronic Devices", 9th edition, Pearson
education, 2011.
MODULE 4: WAVE GENEATION AND WAVE SHAPING CIRCUITS (9L+3T=12)
Theory of sinusoidal oscillators – RC Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators using Op-
Amps – Comparators, Multivibrators: Monostable, Astable Multivibrators– Schmitt
CO-4
triggers, Triangular wave generator, Non-linear function generator
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Ramakant A. Gayakwad, 'Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits',
Prentice Hall of India, FourthEdition,2009
MODULE 5: D/A AND A/D CONVERTORS AND SPECIAL ICs (9L+3T=12)
Introduction, Basic DAC techniques, Weighted resistor DAC, R-2R ladder DAC, Inverted R-
2R DAC, Different types of ADCs - Flash ADC, Counter type ADC, Successive approximation
ADC and Dual slope ADC. PLL, VCO, Astable and Monostable Multivibrators using 555 CO-5
Timer, Voltage regulators. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: D. Roy Choudhury & Shail B. Jain, 'Linear Integrated Circuits', New
Age International Publishers, Fourth Edition, 2010
TEXT BOOKS
1. Robert. L. Boylsted and Louis Nashelsky, "Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”,
Pearson Education, 9th edition, 2009.
2. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits”, 6th Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2010.

59
 3. David A Bell, “Solid State Pulse Circuits", Oxford University Press, 2007

4. D. Roy Choudhury & Shail B. Jain, 'Linear Integrated Circuits', New Age International
Publishers, Fourth Edition, 2010.
5 Ramakant A. Gayakwad, 'Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits', Prentice Hall of
India, FourthEdition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jacob Millman, Christos C Halkias, Satyabrata Jit "Electron Devices and Circuits", Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rd edition 2010
2 Donald .A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design –2nd Edition, Tata Mc Graw
Hill, 2009.
3 Thomas L. Floyd, "Electronic Devices", 9th edition, Pearson education, 2011.
4 David A. Bell,” Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford Higher Education Press, 5th
Edition, 2010.
E BOOKS
http://www.qiau.ac.ir/teacher/files/24955/27-06-1387-13-58-57-Wiley%20-
1.
%20Fundamentals%20of%20Microelectronics%20%28Razavi,%202006%29.pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106062/
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-012-
microelectronic-devices-and-circuits-spring-2009/

COURSE TITLE ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS AND WAVES CREDITS 4

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4202 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-2
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course discusses classical electrostatic, magnetostatic, and electromagnetic
phenomena, and waveguides. Although an effort is made to revisit the main elements
of elementary vector calculus, coordinate systems, a good grasp of the fundamental
Course
notions of calculus, vector manipulation, are necessary for this course. The course
Description
prepares the students for the third-year courses where electromagnetic fields are
encountered, particularly those including an in-depth description of the antennas and
wave propagation.

60
 1. To introduce students with different coordinate systems.
2. To familiarize the students with the different concepts of electrostatic, magneto
static and time varying electromagnetic systems.
3. Apply Maxwell’s equations and their application to time-harmonic fields, boundary
Course
conditions, wave equations, and Poynting’s power-balance theorem
Objective
4. To expose the students to the ideas of electromagnetic waves and structure of
transmission line.
5. To solve problems involving lossless transmission lines with time-harmonic
excitation.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Solve simple problems related to different coordinate systems and apply basic
vector calculus theorems
2. Apply Gauss's law and Ampere's law to simple structures and problems and examine
electromagnetic forces on different charged elements.
Course
3. Analyze wave propagation through different media, differentiate different
Outcome
polarizations, and inspect various cases of reflection of plane waves
4. Apply Maxwell's equations to obtain solutions in parallel plate systems and examine
the characteristic features of wave – waveguide interaction.
5. Analyze rectangular and cylindrical waveguides using Maxwell's equations and
associated characteristics and solve associated simple problems
Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics & Applied Mathematics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO-2 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 3 -
CO-3 3 1 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - 3 -
CO-4 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 3 -
CO-5 3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 3 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: VECTOR ANALYSIS (4L+3T=7)
Coordinate Systems: Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical co-ordinate systems, Vector
Calculus: differential lengths, surfaces and volumes in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical
coordinate systems, del operator, gradient, divergence and curl. CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Vector algebra: Scalars and Vectors, Unit Vector, Vector Addition and Subtraction, Position
and Distance Vectors, Vector Multiplication.
MODULE 2: ELECTROSTATICS AND STATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS (12L+3T=15)

61
 Coulomb’s law, electric field intensity, field due to point charge, field due to line charge,
field due to sheet of charge, electric flux density, Gauss’s law, applications of Gauss’s law,
divergence theorem, potential difference and potential gradient, electric dipole and dipole
moment.
Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s circuital law and applications, Stokes theorem, Magnetic flux
CO-2
and magnetic flux density, Scalar and Vector magnetic potential, Force on a moving charge
BTL-4
(Lorentz’s force equation), Force on a differential current element, Force and Torque on a
closed circuit.
Suggested Readings:
Field streamlines, superposition theorem.
Force between differential current elements, magnetic dipole moment.
MODULE 3: TIME VARYING FIELDS AND WAVES (12 L+3T=15)
Faraday’s law, displacement current, ampere’s circuital law for time varying fields,
Maxwell’s equations in phasor form, differential and integral form, wave propagation in free
space, Helmholtz equation, uniform plane wave, pointing vector and the flow of power.
Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics, Plane Waves in Lossless Dielectrics, Plane Waves in
Free Space, Plane Waves in Good Conductors, skin effect, Wave polarization: linear, elliptical CO-3
and circular polarization, Reflection of uniform plane wave: normal and oblique incidence. BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Transformer and Motional emf, retarded potentials, MATLAB® programs for computations
and animations of EM principles, Snell’s law, critical and Brewster’s angle, standing waves,
MATLAB® programs for computations and animations of wave propagation.
MODULE 4: GUIDED WAVES (5L+3T=8)
Waves between parallel planes of perfect conductors – Transverse electric and transverse
magnetic waves – characteristics of TE and TM Waves – Transverse Electromagnetic waves
–Velocities of propagation – component uniform plane waves between parallel planes – CO-4
Attenuation of TE and TM waves in parallel plane guides – Wave impedances. BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Propagation, attenuation and impedance in parallel planes guides.
MODULE 5: RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDES (12L+3T=15)
Transverse Magnetic Waves and Transverse Electric Waves in Rectangular Waveguides –
characteristic of TE and TM Waves – Cut off wavelength and phase velocity – Impossibility
of TEM waves in waveguides – Dominant mode in rectangular waveguide –Attenuation of
TE and TM modes in rectangular waveguides – Wave impedances – characteristic
impedance – Excitation of modes. CO-5
Bessel functions – Solution of field equations in cylindrical co-ordinates – TM and TE waves BTL-4
in circular guides – wave impedances and characteristic impedance – Dominant mode in
circular waveguide – excitation of modes.
Suggested Readings:
Propagation, attenuation, excitation and impedances.
TEXT BOOKS

62
 1 Mathew. N. O. Sadiku “Principles of Electromagnetics”, 6th edition, Oxford University Press, 2015.
William H. Hayt, Jr., John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 8 th edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2
2011.
3 Jorden, Ballman, “Electromagnetic Fields & Radiating Systems”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
John Kraus, Daniel Fleisch, “Electromagnetics with applications”, 5th edition, McGraw Hill Education,
1
2017.
2 David. K. Cheng, “Fields and Wave electromagnetics, 2nd edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
E BOOKS
Constantine Balanis, “Advanced Engineering Electromagnetics”, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
1
2012.
Sophocles J. Orfanidis, “Electromagnetic Waves and Antennas”, 2016. Web page:
2
www.ece.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/ewa
3 Robert E. Collin, “Field Theory of Guided Waves”, 2nd edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1990.
MOOC
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-013-
1
electromagnetics-and-applications-spring-2009/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106073/ : Dr.Harishankar Ramachandran, IIT Madras.
3 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101057/40

4 www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/webpage_data/nptel/Electrical%20.../Lec46(m6).html

COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND LIFE SKILLS CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE GEA4216 BS L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course provides knowledge about Human Values, Ethics in Professional Engineering
Course
life and different types of theories. It also describes about society, communities, sense
Description
of survival, security & social responsibilities.

63
 1. To comprehend about Human values and ethics.
2. To identify the engineering ethics and types of moral development theories.
Course
3. To recognize the values of safety, risk, basic right of human.
Objective
4. To interpret the concepts of life skills and personal values and self-strengths.
5. To discuss about types of society, communities and sense of Survival and securities.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain about business ethics, Morals and train oneself to be ethical.
2. Illustrate about engineering ethical principle, Reasoning, Roles and responsibilities
Course 3. Demonstrate about corporate responsibilities towards product safety and reliability
Outcome and types of rights.
4. Analyze about values and value education, self-strengths and weaknesses.
5. Describe about society and communities, sense of survival, security & social
responsibilities.
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - - - - - 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 - -
CO-2 - - - - - 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 - -
CO-3 - - - - - 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 - -
CO-4 - - - - - 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 - -
CO-5 - - - - - 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: HUMAN VALUES (6L)
Definition of ethics-Morals values and ethics – integrity-Work ethics- Service learning-Civic
virtue-Respect for others-Caring-Sharing-Honesty-Courage-Valuing time-Cooperation-
Commitment-Empathy-Self confidence-Character-Spirituality-Introduction to Yoga and
CO-1
meditation for professional excellence and stress management
BTL-2
Self-Study: Case study of Discovery failure
Suggested Readings:
Basic of Morals and Ethics.
Module 2: ENGINEERING ETHICS (6L)

64
 Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas
– Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy –
Models of professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and
CO-2
Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories.
BTL-3
Self-study: Study the Bhopal gas tragedy
Suggested Readings:
Moral Development theory
MODULE 3: SAFETY, REPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS (6L)
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest –
Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights
CO-3
(IPR) – Discrimination.
BTL-3
Self-study: Chernobyl explosion, Nuclear and thermal power plant issues
Suggested Readings:
Safety , Risk and Human Rights
MODULE 4: LIFE SKILLS (6L)
Definition, Relevance, Types of values, changing concepts of values-aims and values of
value education- basic etiquette-morals and values in life-dealing with people. Personal
values – Self – Strengths (self-confidence, self-assessment, self-reliance, self-discipline,
determination, self-restraint, contentment, humility, sympathy and compassion, CO-4
gratitude, forgiveness) Weaknesses BTL-3
Self-study: Influences - Peer pressure, familial and societal expectations, media
Suggested Readings:
Life Values and self-strengths
MODULE 5: SOCIETIES IN PROGRESS (6L)
Definition of society; Units of society; Communities – ancient and modern – Agents of
change – Sense of survival, security, desire for comfort and ease sense of belonging, social
consciousness and responsibility CO-5
Self-study: Personal value and professional value of Engineers on societies perception BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Structure of Society and value of Engineers on societies
TEXT BOOKS
1. Subramanian R., Professional ethics, Oxford University press, 2010
Manoharan P.K., Education and Personality Development, APH Publishing Corporation,
2
New Delhi, 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS
Megan J. Murphy (Editor), Lorna Hecker (Editor), Ethics and Professional Issues in Couple
1
and Family Therapy
Andrew Belsey (Editor), Ruth Chadwick (Editor), Ethical Issues in Journalism and the Media
2
(Professional Ethics)

65
 3 Warwick Fox (Editor), Ethics and the Built Environment (Professional Ethics)
4 Ruchika Nath, Value Education, APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 2008
E BOOKS
1. https://easyengineering.net/professionalethicsinengineeringbooks/
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/ethics-technology-engineering
2 https://www.edx.org/course/moral-problems-and-the-good-life

COURSE TITLE ANALOG ELECTRONICS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4231 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
This laboratory is designed to meet the requirement of syllabus of Analog Electronics
for the students of III semester. In the lab students explore the design, construction and
Course
debugging of analog electronics circuit. Laboratory experiments investigate the
Description
performance characteristics of diode, transistors, JFET and Op-amp including the
construction of a small audio amplifier and preamplifier.
1. To prepare students to perform the analysis of any Analog electronics circuit.
2. To empower students to understand the design and working of BJT / FET
Course
amplifiers, oscillators and Operational Amplifier
Objective
3. To prepare the students for advanced courses in Communication system Circuit
Design.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Design the different biasing configurations of the amplifier circuits and obtain their
Course frequency response.
Outcome 2. Design and study the characteristics of tuned amplifier and feedback Amplifiers.
3. Design, debug and analyze various circuits using op-amps.
4. Design, debug and analyze the wave shaping circuits.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

66
CO-1 3 3 3 1 2 2 - - 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO-2 3 3 3 1 2 2 - - 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO-3 3 3 3 1 2 2 - - 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO-4 3 3 3 1 2 2 - - 1 1 1 1 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Plot the frequency response of a RC coupled BJT amplifier in common emitter configuration.
Calculate gain & Bandwidth.
2. Power amplifier – Class A & Class B power amplifiers: Efficiency calculations. Cross over distortion in
Class B power amplifiers.
3. Series and shunt feedback amplifiers: Frequency response, input and output impedance calculation.
4. Frequency response of Single Tuned Amplifier with gain and bandwidth calculations.
5. Inverting & Non-inverting amplifier, Integrator and Differentiator.
6. Instrumentation amplifier.
7. Low Pass and Bandpass filter design.
8. Phase shift & Wein Bridge Oscillator using op-amp.
9. Precision half wave and full wave rectifiers.
10. Triangular Wave generator.
11. Astable and Monostable using IC 555 timer.
12. PLL characteristics and frequency multiplier using PLL.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Jacob Millman, Christos C Halkias, Satyabrata Jit "Electron Devices and Circuits", Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rd edition 2010
2. Donald .A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design –2nd Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
2009
3. Thomas L. Floyd, "Electronic Devices", 9th edition, Pearson education, 2011.
4. David A. Bell,”Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford Higher Education Press, 5th Edition,
2010.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.qiau.ac.ir/teacher/files/24955/27-06-1387-13-58-57-Wiley%20-
%20Fundamentals%20of%20Microelectronics%20%28Razavi,%202006%29.pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106062/
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-012-
microelectronic-devices-and-circuits-spring-2009/

67
COURSE TITLE CIRCUITS SIMULATION LAB CREDITS 1
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4232 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
This course helps the students to acquire a deep understanding of the fundamental
Course effects that limit the performance of high-speed transistor circuits and op amp circuits
Description commonly found in electronic products. Knowledge acquired will prepare for a
successful career as a transistor level integrated circuit designer.
Course 1. To enable students to design and simulate the electronic circuits using multisim.
Objective 2. To impart the practical approach on the operations of electronic circuits.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course 1. Design and simulate basic simple circuits using diodes and passive elements
Outcome 2. Design and simulate basic amplifier circuits using BJT and FET.
3. Design and Simulate basic circuits using op-amp.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO-2 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO-3 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 1 1 2 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
LIST OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS USING MULTISIM
1. Verification of Low pass and High pass Filter
2. Verification of Clippers & Clampers
3. Design and Verification of Attenuators
4. Verification of Half–Wave and Full-Wave Rectifier
5. Design and Verification of Voltage Regulator

68
 6. Frequency Response of CE Amplifier
7. Frequency Response of CS Amplifier
8. Frequency Response of CC Amplifier
9. Design of Wein-Bridge and RC phase shift Oscillator
10. Design and Verification of Class-A Power Amplifier
11. Design and Verification of Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis circuits
12. Design and Verification of RC coupled amplifier
13. Design and Verification of Differential amplifier
14. Astable Multivibrator using op-amp
15. Monostable Multivibrator using op-amp
REFERENCE BOOKS
L K Maheswari and M M S Anand, “Laboratory Manual for Introductory Electronic
1.
Experiments”, New Age, 2010
S Poornachandra Rao and B Sasikala, “Handbook of Experiments in Electronics and
2.
Communication Engineering”,Vikas publishers, 2003.

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT - I CREDITS 1

COURSE COURSE
ECB4233 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CODE CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
PROJECT REPORT AND
FIRST REVIEW SECOND REVIEW THIRD REVIEW
VIVA VOCE
20% 30% 20% 30%
In this course, each team with maximum of four members is expected to design and
develop practical solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information
Course
Technology research. Software usage should be followed during the development.
Description
The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the current and previous
semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications.
1. To elaborate the concepts of development of a product from planning to
Course prototype
Objective 2. To analyze, apply and design electronic products using various software tools
and methodologies.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Demonstrate to identify and solve real time problems of the society
Course
2. Develop practical solutions to the societal problems
Outcome
3. Apply the knowledge of the engineering design concepts and its relevant
applications
Prerequisites: Engineering and Design, Digital System Design, Analog Electronics

69
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO-3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related

The design project shall be carried out in the field of Electronics & Communication
Engineering. Students shall work in convenient groups of not more than four members in a group.
Every team shall have a Supervisor. During this period the supervisor shall guide the students to
implement the Project. The students shall give periodical presentations of the progress made in the
design project.
Each group shall finally produce a report covering background information, literature survey,
problem statement, design details, analysis and conclusions with future scope. This final report shall
be typewritten form as specified in the guidelines.
Assessment
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 20%
Second Review 30%
Third Review & Demo 20%
Project report and Viva-
30%
Voce
TOTAL 100%

70
 SEMESTER IV
COURSE TITLE RANDOM PROCESS CREDITS 4
COURSE
COURSE CODE MAA4218 BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
To make the student understand the basic concepts and techniques of numerical
Course
solution of algebraic equation, numerical solution of differentiation, integration and
Description
their application to engineering and science.
1. To understand the concept of probability
2. To understand the concept of discrete and continuous case
Course
3. To understand about random variables in two dimensions
Objective
4. To classify the random process
5. To find the correlation and spectral density

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. formulate theorems about the concept of probability and Calculate probabilities
using Conditional probability.
Course 2. recognize the standard distributions and apply them appropriately in real time
Outcome problems
3. compute the covariance and correlation
4. classify the different types of random process
5. compute power spectral density and cross spectral density of a random process.

CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2 2
CO-2 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 2 2
CO-3 3 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2 2
CO-4 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO-5 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES (9L+3T=12)

71
Axioms of Probability– Bayes’ Theorem -Random variables – Moments – Moment generating
CO-1
functions.
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Basic Probability
MODULE 2: STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS (9L+3T=12)
Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions CO-2
Suggested Reading: Discrete and Continuous Functions BTL-4
MODULE3: TWO-DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES (9L+3T=12)
Joint distribution – Marginal and conditional distribution – Co-variance – Correlation and
CO-3
Regression
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Random Variables
MODULE 4: CLASSIFICATION OF RANDOM PROCESS (9L+3T=12)
Definition and examples– first order, second order, strictly, wide sense stationary and
CO-4
Ergodic processes– Markov process –Binomial, Poisson processes.
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Random Variable
MODULE 5: CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES (9L+3T=12)
Auto-correlation – Cross-correlation – Properties (Statement only) – Power spectral density
– Cross spectral density–Properties (Statement only) –Wiener-Khinchin relation (Statement CO-5
only) –Relationship between power spectrum and cross correlation function. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Correlation
TEXT BOOKS
Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., "Probability and Random Processes with Applications to
1.
Signal Processing and Communications", Academic Press, 2004.
A. Chandrasekaran, G.Kavitha,“Probability, Statistics, Random Processes and
2.
Queuing Theory”, Dhanam Publications, 2014
Raj Kumar Bansal, Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its
3.
Applications in Engineering”, Pearson Publication, Second Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Ibe. O.C., "Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes", Elsevier, 1st
1.
Indian Reprint, 2007.
Cooper. G.R., Mc Gillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", 3rd
2.
Indian Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2012.
Dean G. Duffy., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Third
3.
Edition 2013.
E BOOKS
1. http.//nptel.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Principles_of_Communication1/Pdfs/1_5.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-probability-science-mitx-6-041x-2

COURSE TITLE TRANSMISSION LINES AND NETWORKS CREDITS 4

72
 COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4216 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Courses introduce the various types of transmission lines and discuss the losses
Course associated with it. It also gives the thorough understanding about impedance
Description transformation and matching. Brings the impart knowledge on filter theories and
waveguide theories. Clears to solve problems using Smith chart.
1. To learn the fundamentals of T and Pi networks
2. To Analyze the fundamentals of passive filters
Course
3. To study attenuators and equalizers and solve problems on it.
Objective
4. To learn transmission line theory to solve problems
5. To understand Smith Chart for transmission line analysis.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Illustrate the fundamentals of T and Pi networks
Course 2. Analyze the fundamentals of passive filters
Outcome 3. Distinguish between attenuators and equalizers and solve problems on it.
4. Pertain transmission line theory to solve problems
5. Solve problems by Smith Chart for transmission line problems
Prerequisites: Calculations pertaining to electromagnetic fields, lay a strong foundation on the theory of
transmission lines and wave guides by highlighting their applications.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-3 3 3 3 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-4 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-5 3 3 3 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – Symmetrical & Asymmetrical networks (9L+3T)

73
Symmetrical networks, characteristic impedance and propagation constant. Asymmetrical
networks, Image and Iterative impedances. Image transfer constant and iterative transfer
CO-1
constant. Properties of L, T and Pi section types.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Two port network theory
MODULE 2- Passive Filters (9L+3T)
Classification of filters, filter networks, equation of filter networks, classification of pass band
and stop band, characteristics impedance in pass band and stop band, constant k-low pass
CO-2
and high pass filter, band pass filter, band elimination filter.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Microwave filter design, different methods
MODULE 3- Attenuators and Equalizers (9L+3T)
Attenuators and equalizers Attenuators-type, π-type, Lattice, Bridge, L-Type attenuators;
series, shunt, delay, attenuation equalizers CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Microwave Filters
MODULE 4 – Transmission Line Theory (9L+3T)
The Lumped-Element Circuit Model for a Transmission Line, Transmission line equations and
their solutions, Transmission line parameters, Characteristic impedance, Propagation
constant, Attenuation constant, Phase constant, Waveform distortion, Distortion less
transmission lines, Input impedance of lossless lines – reflection on a line not terminated by
Zo - Transfer impedance– reflection factor and reflection loss – T and Π Section equivalent to CO-4
lines. BTL-3
Practical component:
Slotted line impedance measurement.
Suggested Readings:
Impedance matching using transmission line sections.
MODULE 5 – Transmission Lines At Radio Frequencies (9L+3T)
Loading of transmission lines, Reflection coefficient and VSWR. Equivalent circuits of
transmission lines, Transmission lines at radio frequency. Open circuited and Short circuited
lines, Smith Chart, Application of the Smith Chart– Conversion from impedance to reflection
coefficient and vice-versa. Impedance to Admittance conversion and vice versa – Input
impedance of a lossless line terminated by an impedance – Stub matching: single stub CO-5
matching and double stub matching. BTL-4
Practical component:
Slotted line measurement of VSWR
Suggested Readings:
Applications of Smith Chart
TEXT BOOKS

74
 E.C.Jordan and Balmain, "Electro Magnetic Waves and Radiating Systems", PHI, 1968,
4.
Reprint 2005
J.D. Ryder, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, 2nd edition, Pearson Education India, 2015.
5.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 G.S.N. Raju, “Electromagnetic field theory and transmission lines”, 1st edition (3rd reprint),
Pearson Education India, 2009
2 John D.Kraus and Ronalatory Marhefka, "Antennas", Tata McGraw-Hill Book Company,
2002.
3 R.E.Collins, 'Antennas and Radio Propagation ", McGraw-Hill, 1985.
4 Ballany, "Antenna Theory " , John Wiley & Sons, second edition , 2003.
5 Prasad, K.D. “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, Khanna Publications, 2001.
E BOOKS
1 http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
2 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-630-
electromagnetics-fall-2006/index.htm
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-661-
receivers-antennas-and-signals-spring-2003/lecture-notes/
3 http://www.creativeworld9.com/2011/02/learn-antennas-and-wave-propagation.html

COURSE TITLE SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS CREDITS 4

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4217 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module provides the basic of signals and systems its representations and response.
Course
It also describe the different response using Laplace Transform, Z- transform and Fourier
Description
Transform too.

75
 1. To know about types of signals and systems and its representations.
2. To understand the LTI systems and its properties.
Course
3. To identify the response of signal using Laplace transform.
Objective
4. To visualize the effect of z Transform on the signals.
5. To interpret the effects of FS, FT on the signals.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Classify the continuous time & discrete time signals and systems
2. Apply the properties of LTI systems and perform time domain analysis of continuous
and discrete time signals and systems.
Course 3. Analyze and determine the impulse and step response of LTI systems using Laplace
Outcome transforms and its properties
4. Examine and determine the impulse and step response of LTI systems by applying Z-
transform, its properties and inverse Z-transform
5. Outline the properties of Fourier series, Fourier transform, discrete time Fourier
transform and Discrete Fourier Transform and analyze the given system.
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of differential and integral calculus, limits and adequate knowledge of
mathematics.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO-2 3 2 2 3 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO-3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO-4 3 2 2 3 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO-5 3 3 2 3 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems (9L+3T=12)
Mathematical representation, classification of Continuous Time and Discrete Time signals,
arithmetic operations on the signals, transformation of independent variable, Mathematical
representation, classification of CT and DT systems, Sampling and reconstruction, aliasing CO-1
effect BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Basic of Continuous and Discrete signals
MODULE 2: Time Domain Analysis of Continuous and Discrete Time Signals And Systems (9L+3T=12)
Properties of LTI systems, impulse and step response, Use of convolution integral and
convolution sum for analysis of LTI systems, Properties of convolution integral/sum. CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
LTI systems and convolution.

76
MODULE 3: Frequency Domain Analysis of Continuous Time System Using Laplace Transform
(9L+3T=12)
Need of Laplace transform, review of Laplace transform, properties, inverse of Laplace
transform, concept of ROC, poles and zeros, Unilateral Laplace transform, Analysis and
characterization of LTI system using Laplace transform: impulse and step response, causality,
CO-3
stability, stability of causal system, Block diagram representation of Continuous Time
BTL-4
systems.
Suggested Readings:
Laplace transform
MODULE 4: Frequency Domain Analysis of Discrete Time System Using Z- Transform
(9L+3T=12)
Need of Z transform, definition, properties of unilateral and bilateral Z Transform, mapping
with s plane, relationship with Laplace transform, Z transform of standard signals, ROC, poles
and zeros of transfer function, inverse Z transform, Analysis and characterization of LTI
CO-4
system using Z transform: impulse and step response, causality, stability of causal system,
BTL-4
Block diagram representation and system realization.
Suggested Readings:
Z- transform
MODULE 5: Frequency Domain Analysis of Continuous and Discrete Signals using Fourier
(9L+3T=12)
Review of Fourier series, Discrete time Fourier series and its properties, Fourier transform,
properties of Fourier transform, relationship with Laplace and Z transform, Discrete time
CO-5
Fourier transform, Properties, Frequency sampling, Discrete Fourier transform, Properties.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
DTFS, DTFT,FT
TEXT BOOKS
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H. Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Pearsons,2007
Edward W Kamen & Bonnie’s Heck, “Fundamentals of Signals and Systems”,
2
Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS
John G.Proakis and DimitrisG.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles,
1
Algorithms and Applications, 4th Edition, PHI, 2006.
2 B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, Second Edition, Oxford, 2009.
R.E.Zeimer, W.H.Tranter and R.D.Fannin, “Signals & Systems - Continuous and Discrete”,
3
Pearson, 2007.
4 John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007
M.J.Roberts, “Signals & Systems Analysis using Transform Methods & MATLAB”, Tata
5
McGraw Hill, 2007.
E BOOKS

77
 1. http://bookboon.com/en/introduction-to-digital-signal-and-system-analysis-ebook
MOOC
1 Signals and Systems (web), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074/

2 Signals and Systems (web), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055/

COURSE TITLE MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4218 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The microprocessors and microcontrollers are programmable integrated devices that
have computing and decision making capability similar to that of CPU of the computer.
Microcontrollers along with embedded systems have a wide range of applications in
Course
industry and day-today life. The module focuses on programming of various controllers
Description
and interfacing with peripheral devices. An introduction to embedded systems,
designing process of an embedded system and real time operating systems are also
discussed in this course.
1. To study architecture, instruction set, addressing modes and programming of 8085
& 8086
Course 2. To study architecture of 8051, ARM and programming of 8051
Objective 3. To study the concepts of interfacing peripherals.
4. To study the basics of Embedded Systems.
5. To study the basic concepts of Real Time Operating Systems.

78
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe the architecture, instruction set and programming of 8085 and 8086
microprocessor.
2. Describe the architecture of 8051 and ARM microcontroller
Course
3. Interface peripherals with microprocessor and microcontroller.
Outcome
4. Elaborate the concepts of embedded processors hardware, software and System on
a Chip.
5. Interpret the concepts of real time operating system, inter process communication
and their significance.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO-2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO-3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO-4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO-5 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: OVERVIEW OF MICROPROCESSOR (9L)
Overview of Microprocessor-Architecture-Interrupts- Instruction set -Assembly language
programming-8 bit arithmetic using 8085 & 8086 CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Evolution of Microprocessors
MODULE 2: MICROCONTROLLERS (9L)
8051 Functional block diagram –Addressing mode – Interrupts-Instruction set- Simple
Programming- Introduction to RISC processors; ARM microcontrollers interface designs. CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Introduction to microcontrollers
MODULE 3: PHERIPHERAL INTERFACING (9L)
Interfacing with peripherals - timer, serial I/O, parallel I/O, keyboard and display, A/D and
D/A converters. CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Concepts of interfacing
MODULE 4: INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (9L)
Introduction and Classification – Overview of Processors and hardware units in an embedded
system – Software embedded into the system –– Embedded Systems on a Chip (SoC)- CO-4
Examples of an Embedded System-Design tradeoff. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:

79
Applications of Embedded Systems

MODULE 5: REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (9L)

Operating System Services- Goals – Structures- Kernel –RTOS Task scheduling models - Inter
Process Communications using Signals – Semaphore Flag or mutex as Resource key –
Message Queues – Mailboxes – Pipes – Virtual (Logical) Sockets – Remote Procedure Calls CO-5
(RPCs)-Overview of real time programming language. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Applications of Real Time Operating Systems
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor – Architecture, Programming and Applications with
the 8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall. 2002.
2. K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications",
Penram Intl, 1996.
3. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TATA McGraw-
Hill, Second Edition-2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 William Kleitz, ‘Microprocessor and Micro Controller Fundamental of 8085 and 8051
Hardware and Software’, Pearson Education, 1998.
2 Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Second Edition-2003
3 David E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian
Reprint 2000.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.pdfdrive.net/the-8051-microcontroller-and-embedded-
e952238.html
2. http://www.ebooklibrary.org/articles/arm_architecture
3. engineersevanigam.blogspot.com/.../embedded-systems-by-raj-kamal-ebook-pdf.html
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs05

2 nptel.ac.in/courses/106105036/24

COURSE TITLE MATLAB AND SIMULINK LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4241 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018

80
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
This module gives an insight about the fundamental concepts of MATLAB programming.
MATLAB is used to model and simulate physical problems in the field of electronics and
communication engineering. To name a few it is used for scrutiny and analysis of
problems in control systems, communication systems, signal processing, image
Course
processing and neural networks. The study of simulink facilitates the student to work in
Description
a graphical programming environment for modeling, simulating and analyzing
multidomain dynamical systems which can be used for varied applications of interest.
The knowledge gained through this module helps the student to integrate computation,
visualization, and programming in an easy-to-use environment.
1. To enable students to implement the arrays, functions, conditional loops,
Course statements and arithmetic and logic operators in MATLAB.
Objective 2. To use the plotting functions in MATLAB
3. To implement modulation system using Simulink blocks
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Apply the concept of arrays, functions, conditional loops, statements and arithmetic
Course
and logic operators in MATLAB for developing simple programs.
Outcome
2. Analyze the various plotting and special plotting functions in MATLAB.
3. Utilize the Simulink block sets for modelling the basic modulation systems
Prerequisites: Familiar with MATLAB programming environment and the usage of Simulink block sets
for communication engineering
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 - 3 1 - - 2 1 - 1 1 2
CO-2 3 3 3 - 3 1 - - 2 1 - 1 1 2
CO-3 3 3 3 - 3 1 - - 2 1 - 1 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to MATLAB, MATLAB help system
2. Arrays, Multidimensional arrays, Operations
3. Functions
4. Arithmetic and Logical operators
5. Conditional statements and loops
6. Plotting, special plotting: 3D plotting

81
 7. Generation of various signals and sequences
8. Simulink Basics
9. Simulink modeling of basic modulation systems
10. Editing and Debugging MATLAB Programs
REFERENCE BOOKS
Rudra Pratap, (2004), “Getting Started with MATLAB 6.0”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press,
1.
1-187.
Duane Hanselman ,Bruce LittleField, (2005), “Mastering MATLAB 7” , Pearson Education Inc,
2.
pp. 1-825
William J.Palm, (2001) “Introduction to MATLAB 6.0 for Engineers”, Mc Graw Hill & Co, pp. 1-
3.
316.
Fausett L.V. (2007) “Applied Numerical Analysis Using MATLAB”, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education,
4.
pp.1-673
5. MATLAB Tutorial files, www.mathworks.com

COURSE TITLE MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4242 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
This course is intended to provide the learners with the basic concepts of programming.
Programming of microcontrollers can be done by using the instructions.
Course
Microcontrollers can be programmed to serve a variety of applications in industry and
Description
day-today life. The microcontrollers can be interfaced with various peripheral devices
for several applications in real time.
Course 1. To enable students to write assembly language programs using 8085,8086,8051
Objective 2. To Interface the peripheral devices with microcontroller for specific applications.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course
1. Programme and execute arithmetic and logical operations using 8085 , 8086 & 8051
Outcome
2. Interface the peripheral devices with microcontroller for specific applications.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

82
CO-1 3 3 3 - 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-2 3 3 3 - 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Addition and Subtraction of two 8 bit numbers and 16bit numbers using 8085
2. Multiplication and Division of two 16bit numbers using 8086
3. Programs for String manipulation operations using 8086
4. Interfacing ADC and DAC
5. Interfacing and Programming 8279 and 8253.
6. Addition and Subtraction of two 8bit numbers using 8051
7. Multiplication and Division of two 8bit numbers using 8051
8. Interfacing of Stepper Motor
9. Interfacing of Keyboard and LCD with ARM microcontroller using keiluvision software
10. Interfacing of Real time clock and LED with ARM microcontroller using keiluvision software
REFERENCE BOOKS
Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor – Architecture, Programming and Applications with the
1.
8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall. 2002.
K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications", Penram
2.
Intl, 1996.
Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TATA McGraw-Hill,
3.
Second Edition-2009.
William Kleitz, ‘Microprocessor and Micro Controller Fundamental of 8085 and 8051
4.
Hardware and Software’, Pearson Education, 1998.
5. Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Second Edition-2003
David E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint
6.
2000.
COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT -II CREDITS 1
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4243 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
PROJECT
FIRST REVIEW SECOND REVIEW THIRD REVIEW REPORT AND
VIVA VOCE
20% 30% 20% 30%

83
 This module gives a strong Engineering and Practical foundation for understanding the
Course different types of social problems and its solution based on engineering knowledge. It
Description is suitable for general engineering students to understand the importance of
engineering concepts and its relevant applications
Course 1. To find the real time needs of the society
Objective 2. To apply engineering concepts and find the solution
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course 1. Design and develop prototype based on the knowledge gained
Outcome 2. Propose a project and defend it as a team
3. Solve real time problem in electronics or communication domain
Prerequisites: All Subjects
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO-3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
In this project, each team with maximum of four members is expected to design and develop practical
solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research. Software usage
should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the
current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications.
At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work carried out.
Assessment
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 20%
Second Review 30%
Third Review & Demo 20%
Project report and Viva-
30%
Voce
TOTAL 100%

SEMESTER V
COURSE TITLE OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES CREDITS 4
COURSE
COURSE CODE MAA4301 BS L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL

84
 ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
To make the student develop a knowledge in the field of optimization techniques,
Course
their basic concepts, principles of linear and integer programming, assignment and
Description
transportation problems
1. To understand the concept of optimization
2. To formulate linear programming model
Course
3. To understand the concept of integer programming
Objective
4. To understand the assignment and transportation problem
5. To understand the concept of network analysis
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. formulate the linear programming problem
Course 2. determine the solutions of the linear programming problem
Outcome 3. obtain the solutions of integer programming problem
4. determine the optimal solution of assignment and transportation problem
5. construct the network diagram and compute the project duration
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - 1
CO-2 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - 1
CO-3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - 1
CO-4 3 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - 1
CO-5 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:INTRODUCTION TO OPTIMIZATION (9L+3T=12)
Introduction to operations research – Objective – Scope of OR – Limitations of OR –
CO-1
Introduction and formulation of linear programming – Solving LPP using Graphical method.
BTL-2
Suggested Reading: Basics of inequalities
MODULE 2:LINEAR PROGRAMMMING PROBLEM (9L+3T=12)
Solving LPP using simple method – Big-M method – Two phase method – Conversion of
CO-2
primal to dual.
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: System of equations
MODULE 3:INTEGER PROGRAMMING (9L+3T=12)
Integer programming – Cutting plane method – Gomory’s Mixed integer method – Branch CO-3
and Bound method BTL-3

85
Suggested Reading: System of equations
MODULE 4:ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM (9L+3T=12)
Hungarian Method – Maximization and unbalanced assignment problem – Basic feasible
solution of transportation problem – Modi method – Degeneracy – Unbalanced CO-4
Transportation problem. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Arithmetic Calculation
MODULE 5:PERT AND CPM (9L+3T=12)
Network diagram – Representation – Labeling – CPM – PERT probabilities of CPM – PERT
CO-5
probabilities of project duration.
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Basics of graphs
TEXT BOOKS
Chandrasekaran A, “A Text book of Operation Research”, Dhanam Publications, Chennai,
1.
2017
V. Sundaresan, K. S. Ganapathy Subramanian, K. Ganesan, “Resource Management
2.
Techniques”, A. R. Publications, 2004
3. S. D. Sharma, “Operation Research”, Kedarnath Ramnath & Co, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction (9th Edition)”, Prentice Hall, 2010
D S Hira & Prem Kumar Gupta, “Introduction to Operations Research”, S. Chand
2.
Publishing, 2012
E BOOKS
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106134/1
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_mg10/preview
MOOC
1. https://www.edx.org/course/operations-management-iimbx-om101-1x

COURSE TITLE CONTROL SYSTEMS CREDITS 4

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4301 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

86
 This course gives a strong theoretical foundation for understanding open loop and
Course closed loop control system analysis and is suitable for general engineering students. It
Description covers standard analytical tools such as Bode plot, Polar plot, root-loci and nyquist plots.
Later part of the course focus on the design of compensators using analysis tools.
1. Analyze representation of systems and to derive transfer function models,
2. Provide adequate knowledge in the time response of systems and steady state error
analysis,
Course 3. Give basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed–loop frequency
Objective responses of systems,
4. Provide the concept of stability of control system and methods of stability analysis
5. Study the three ways of designing compensation for a control system, various
components of control system
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1.Analyze electromechanical systems using mathematical modelling and to build
transfer function
2. Determine Transient and Steady State behavior of systems using standard test
Course
signals and compute Steady state error
Outcome
3. Analyze the stability of the system using frequency response plots
4. Analyze the stability of the system by applying various stability criteria.
5. Design a compensator for stable control system satisfying requirements of stability
and reduced steady state error
Prerequisites: Trigonometric formulas, Methods of differentiation, Methods of integration, Partial
Fractions, Matrices, Laplace Transforms.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 1 - - - -- -- -- 1 2 1 -
CO-2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
CO-3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
CO-4 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
CO-5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 2 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : SYSTEM REPRESENTATION (9L+3T=12)
Basic elements in control systems – Open and closed loop systems – Electrical analogy of
mechanical and rotational systems – Transfer function – Synchros – AC and DC servo motors
CO-1
– Block diagram reduction techniques – Signal flow graphs.
BTL-4
Suggested Reading:- Differential Equations, Laplace Transforms, Modelling Electrical
motors.
MODULE 2 : TIME RESPONSE (9L+3T=12)

87
Time response – Time domain specifications – Types of test input – I and II order system
response – Error coefficients – Generalized error series – Steady state error – P, PI, PID modes
CO-2
of feedback control.
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: - Error analysis, Time series, Binomial Series, Controller Design,
Continuous time systems analysis.
MODULE 3 : FREQUENCY RESPONSE (9L+3T=12)
Frequency response – Bode plot – Polar plot – Constant M and N circles – Nichols chart –
Determination of closed loop response from open loop response – Correlation between CO-3
frequency domain and time domain specifications. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: - Frequency Domain characteristics and Analysis.
MODULE 4: STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM (9L+3T=12)
Characteristics equation – Location of roots in S plane for stability – Routh Hurwitz criterion
– Root locus construction – Effect of pole, zero addition – Gain margin and phase margin – CO-4
Nyquist stability criteria. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: - Stability analysis of Systems.
MODULE 5: COMPENSATOR DESIGN (9L+3T=12)
Performance criteria – Lag, lead and lag-lead networks – Compensator design using bode
plot. Introduction to Digital Control Systems, Introduction to State Variable Analysis and CO-5
Design - Advances in Control Systems. BTL-4
Suggested Reading:- Compensator Design, SISO, MISO
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ogata.K, Modern Control System Engineering Fifth Edition –Pearsons, 2010.
I.J. Nagrath& M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, New Age International Publishers, Sixth
2.
edition, 2017.
“Automatic Control Systems” by B.C. Kuo, Tenth Edition, 2017, McGraw-Hill Education.
3

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. M. Gopal, Control Systems, Principles & Design, Fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1.
2012.
2 M.N. Bandyopadhyay, Control Engineering Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2009
E BOOKS
1. h http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
2. Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1. Control Engineering (web), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102044/
2. Control Engineering(video), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102043/
3. Advanced control system(video), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108103007/

88
COURSE
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CREDITS 3
TITLE
COURSE
ECB4302 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First
Second Periodical Seminar/ Assignments/ Surprise
Periodical Attendance ESE
Assessment Project Test / Quiz
Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course focusses on analysis and design of communication systems with an emphasis on
digital communications based on time and frequency domain analysis. Fourier transform
techniques, linear systems, and filtering are reviewed. Power and energy spectral density of
communication signals. Sampling and quantization of analog signals. Baseband and binary
Course
bandpass digital modulation including line coding, pulse shaping, and both pulse and carrier
Description
modulation techniques. Wireless communication system concepts including link budgets and
multiple access. Transmitter and receiver design concepts. Signal-to-noise ratio, bit error
rate, and their relationship. Analog techniques such as Amplitude Modulation (AM) and
Frequency Modulation (FM) radio will be reviewed for conceptual and comparative purposes.
1. To Compute the Fourier transform and the energy and power spectral densities of
communications signals.
2. To calculate the bandwidth and signal-to-noise ratio of a signal at the output of a linear
system or filter.
Course
3. To explain the operation of basic digital communication systems (both baseband and
Objective
bandpass) in both the time and frequency domains.
4. To evaluate the performance, in terms of bit error rate, of a digital communication link.
5. To explain the concepts of link budget and multiple access as it applies to wireless
communication.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Inspect and distinguish various digitization techniques and explain multiplexing
techniques.
2. Apply theory of sampling process to different pulse modulation techniques to
Course
comprehend the process and then compare them.
Outcome
3. Inspect and distinguish various digitization techniques and explain multiplexing
techniques
4. Analyze digital modulation schemes, M - ary techniques and examine their performance.
5. Distinguish and appraise the effectiveness of various channel coding techniques
Prerequisites: NIL

89
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 - 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO-2 3 3 3 - - - - - - 2 - 1 3 2
CO-3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - - - 1 3 2
CO-4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO-5 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 3 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (9L)
Introduction to Communication Systems: Modulation – Types - Need for Modulation. Theory of
Amplitude Modulation - Evolution and Description of SSB Techniques - Theory of Frequency and
Phase Modulation – Comparison of various Analog Communication System (AM – FM – PMBand
CO-1
Pass Signals and Systems, Band Pass Transmission, Bandwidth, Double Side Band Amplitude
BTL-2
Modulation – AM Signals and Spectra, DSB Signals and Spectra, Suppressed Side Band Amplitude
Modulation - Single Side Band Signals and Spectra, Single Side Band Generation, Vestigial Side
Band Signals and Spectra, Illustrative Problems.
MODULE 2 - PULSE MODULATION TECHNIQUES (9L)
Pulse amplitude modulation – Flat top sampling and Pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), Pulse-
CO-2
Time Modulation – Pulse Duration and Pulse Position modulations, PPM spectral analysis,
BTL-2
Illustrative Problems
MODULE 3 : DIGITIZATION TECHNIQUES (9L)
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - Generation and Reconstruction, Quantization Noise, Non-
CO-3
Uniform Quantization and Companding, PCM with Noise, Delta modulation, Adaptive Delta
BTL-3
Modulation, Differential PCM systems (DPCM), Digital Multiplexing-Multiplexers and Hierarchies
MODULE 4 – BAND PASS DIGITAL TRANSMISSION (9L)
Quadrature Carrier and M–ary Systems- Quadrature Carrier Systems,M–ary PSK Systems, M–ary
QAM Systems, M–ary FSK Systems, BPSK and FSK, Timing and Synchronization, Interference, Non- CO-4
Coherent Binary Systems, Non-Coherent FSK, Differentially Coherent PSK, Optimum Binary BTL-2
Detection, Coherent ASK (OOK (on-off keying)).
MODULE 5 - CHANNEL CODING (9L)
Error Detection & Correction - Repetition & Parity Check Codes, Interleaving, Code Vectors and
Hamming Distance, Forward Error Correction (FEC) Systems, Automatic Retransmission Query CO-5
(ARQ) Systems, Linear Block Codes – Matrix Representation of Block Codes, Convolutional Codes BTL-2
– Convolutional Encoding, Decoding Methods
TEXT BOOKS

90
 A. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, ―Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals &
1.
Noise in Electrical Communication‖, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010
2. Simon Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, Wiley-India edition, 3rd edition, 2010
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Sam Shanmugam,”Digital and Analog Communication Systems” ,John Wiley, 2005
E BOOKS
http://www.eem.anadolu.edu.tr/tansufilik/EEM%20409/icerik/Communication%20Systems%
1.
20-%204ed%20-%20Haykin.pdf
2. http://www.freebookcentre.net/Electronics/Communications -Systems-Books.html
3. https://www.efxkits.co.uk/download-free-ebook-on-communication-systems/
MOOC
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/104/108104091/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/102/117102059/

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING CREDITS 4

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4303 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment Test / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

This course covers theory and methods of digital signal processing including basic
Course
principles, the analysis and design of discrete-time systems. Aim to provide working
Description
knowledge of design, implementation and analysis of various DSP systems.

1. To compute Discrete Fourier transform effectively using its properties

Course 2. To identify the frequency characteristics of discrete-time signals and systems
Objective 3. To design FIR and IIR digital filters as per the required specifications
4. To manipulate (up or down) the original sampling rate value
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Compare the performances of DFT using FFT algorithms.
Course 2. Design IIR filters as per the given specifications
Outcome 3. Design and compare the responses of practical FIR Filter as per the given
specifications

91
 4. Analyze the effects of quantization errors and the need of Multirate sampling
techniques
5. Layout the internal building blocks and their functionality of different DSP
Processor family.

Prerequisites: MAA4201- Partial Differential Equations and Transforms and ECB4217- Signals and
Systems
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 3 3 - - -- 1 1 - 2 2 3
CO-2 3 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 2 3 3
CO-3 3 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 2 3 3
CO-4 3 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 3
CO-5 3 3 2 3 - - - - 1 1 - 2 3 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – EXISTENCE OF FOURIER TRANSFORM IN DSP (9L+3T)
The Discrete Fourier Transform –Frequency Domain Sampling, Properties of DFT.
Computation of DFT - FFT Algorithms (Radix 2 only), Linear Filtering and Correlation using
CO-1
DFT.
BTL-3
Suggested reading:
Application of FFT in real time examples
MODULE 2 – FIR FILTER DESIGN TECHNIQUES (9L+3T)
Design of FIR Filters- FIR Filters using Window method and Frequency Sampling Method,
Design of Linear-Phase FIR Filters. CO-2
Suggested reading: BTL-4
Kaiser window technique and its importance
MODULE 3 – IIR FILTER DESIGN CONCEPTS (9L+3T)
Design of IIR Digital Filters from Analog Filters- IIR Filter Design by Impulse Invariance, IIR
Filter Design by Bilinear Transformation. Implementation of efficient Filter structures: CO-3
Suggested reading: BTL-4
Performance comparison of Butterworth and Chebyshev filter design concepts
MODULE 4: FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS IN DSP (9L+3T)
Analysis of finite word length effects- Quantization noise, round off errors, input and
output quantization error, limit cycles in IIR filters. Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing- CO-4
Decimation and Interpolation concepts - Sampling Rate Conversion for real time BTL-4
applications

92
Suggested reading:
Need for QMF and Poly phase filters for real time applications

MODULE 5: ARCHITECTUREL DESCRIPTIONS OF DSP PROCESSORS (9L+3T)

Computer architecture for signal processing - Architecture of TMS320C 5416 and 6713
processors and its functional characteristics, Case study of multistage sampling
CO-5
applications in real time.
BTL-3
Suggested reading:
Selection of appropriate DSP processor to perform the given real time task
TEXT BOOKS
1. John G Proakis, Dimitris G Monolakis-Digital Signal Processing, 4/e, PHI. 2006
B.Venkataramani & M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processor Architecture, Programming and
2.
Application, TMH 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sanjith K Mitra: Digital Signal Processing, 4/e, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2010
Rulph Chassaing, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416
2
DSK, Wiley Inter-science, 2005.
Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jervis: Digital Signal Processing, 2/e, Pearson Education
3
/PHI, 1993.
4 P.P. Vaidyanathan, Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, PHI, 2004.
Avtar singh, S.Srinivasan, “DSP Implementation using DSP microprocessor with
5
Examples” from TMS32C54XX -Thamson / Brooks cole Publishers, 2003
E BOOKS
http://electronicsforu.com/resources/cool-stuff-misc/8-free-ebooks-digital-signal-
1.
processing
2. http://www.freebookcentre.net/Electronics/DSP-Books-Download.html
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104070/

https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-008-digital-signal-processing-spring-
2.
2011/readings/

COURSE TITLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4331 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY

93
 24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%

Communication lab have the objective of demonstrate the analog and digital
Course
modulation schemes and simulation of digital pulse modulation techniques using
Description
MATLAB tool.
1. Implement the line coding techniques
Course
2. To help in demonstrating and apply digital pulse modulation
Objective
3. To help students to develop algorithm using MATLAB.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Demonstrate analog modulation and demodulation scheme
2. Demonstrate the digital modulation & Demodulation scheme
Course 3. Demonstrate the concept of line coding techniques
Outcome 4. Simulation of BPSK, QPSK & QAM signal constellation, FSK PSK & DPSK digital
modulation schemes using MATLAB
5. Simulation using communication link (MATLAB Simulink) & also the error control
coding, equalization
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 - 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 - 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 1
CO-3 3 3 3 - 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 1
CO-4 3 3 3 - 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 1
CO-5 3 3 3 - 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

94
1. Signal Sampling and reconstruction.
2. Time Division Multiplexing.
3. AM Modulator and Demodulator
4. FM Modulator and Demodulator.
5. Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation.
6. Delta Modulation and Demodulation Observation (simulation) of signal constellations of BPSK, QPSK
and QAM
7. Line coding schemes
8. FSK, PSK and DPSK schemes (Simulation)
9. Error control coding schemes - Linear Block Codes (Simulation)
10. Communication link simulation
11. Zero forcing & LMS algorithm
REFERENCE BOOKS
A. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, ―Communication Systems – An Introduction to Signals &
1.
Noise in Electrical Communication‖, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 5th Edition, 2010
2. Simon Haykin, ―Communication Systems‖, Wiley-India edition, 3rd edition, 2010

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4332 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
The aim of this course to consolidate student’s theoretical knowledge on DSP
concepts by revisiting using MATLAB and Simulink software. This course is also
Course
aimed to provide Code composer studio software package skill to embed it with
Description
Texas instrument’s hardware such as TMS320C5416, 6317 for DSP characteristics
analysis.
1. To handle discrete/digital signals using MATLAB and Simulink tool
Course 2. To code and perform the basic operations of Signal processing concepts
Objective 3. To analyze the spectral characteristics of various window functions
4. To Design IIR and FIR filters- band pass, band stop, low pass and high pass.

95
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Analyze and observe the simulated characteristics of digital signal processing
Course concepts using MATLAB and Simulink software tool
Outcome 2. Analyze and observe the characteristics of real-time and Non real-time signal
Processing algorithms, such as filtering & noise reduction using TEXAS Instruments
DSP evaluation board
Prerequisites: ECB4241- MATLAB and Simulink Lab
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 1 3 1 - - 1 1 2 2 2 3
CO-2 3 3 3 - 3 1 - - 1 1 2 2 2 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
MATLAB & SIMULINK Based Experiments:
1. Generation of various Signals thereby to understand their characteristics
2. Calculation of Linear and circular convolution for the given two sequences
3. Analyze the Sampling process and effect of Aliasing due to sampling
4. Design of various FIR filter for the given specifications as per the application
5. Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev analog filters for the given specifications
6. Calculation of FFT and IFFT of a time domain signal.
7. Design of digital IIR filter for the given specifications based on Impulse Invariant and
Bilinear Transformation method
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING DSP PROCESSOR-TMS C 4516,6713,6748
1. Experiments using DSP processor and Code composer studio tools
2. Understand various addressing modes of Digital Signal Processors using simple
programming examples.
3. Calculate Sample values of the given continuous sinusoidal input signal.
4. Calculation of Linear and circular convolution between two sequences
5. Calculation of FFT.
6. Real time Audio signal processing using TMS C 6748processor and Noise reduction of real
time signal using TMS C 6748processor
TEXT BOOKS
1. S. J. Orfanidis, DSP Lab Manual, 2011
S. J. Orfanidis, Introduction to Signal Processing, Prentice-Hall, 1996, and available freely
2.
oline http://www.ece.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/intro2sp/
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. R. Chassaing and D. Reay, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the

96
 TMS320C6713and TMS320C6416 DSK, 2nd ed., Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2008
2. D.L. Jones, "Effective DSP Laboratory Course Design," DSPSFest'99, Houston, Texas, August
4-6, 1999
MOOC
1. http://www.ti.com/product/TMS320C6748
2. http://www.ti.com/processors/dsp/overview.html

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT- III CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4333 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CATEGORY
Approval 24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
Details 30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
PROJECT
FIRST REVIEW SECOND REVIEW THIRD REVIEW REPORT AND
VIVA VOCE
20% 30% 20% 30%
This module gives a strong Engineering and Practical foundation for understanding the
Course different types of social problems and its solution based on engineering knowledge. It
Description is suitable for general engineering students to understand the importance of
engineering concepts and its relevant applications
Course 1. To find the real time needs of the society
Objective 2. To apply engineering concepts and find the solution
Upon completion of the course the students will be able to:
Course
1. Identify and develop the system for the real life needs of the society
Outcome
2. Realize and apply the Engineering concepts in product development
Prerequisites: ECB4243, ECB4301, ECB4302, ECB4303, MATLAB, MULTISIM
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO-3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LAB/MINI PROJECT

97
In this project, each team with maximum of four members is expected to design and develop practical
solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research. Software usage
should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the
current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications.
At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work carried out.
Assessment
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 20%
Second Review 30%
Third Review & Demo 20%
Project report and Viva- Voce 30%
TOTAL 100%
SEMESTER VI

COURSE TITLE COMPUTER NETWORKS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4316 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module introduces computer networks, with a special focus on the Internet
architecture and protocols. Data communication and Networks have changed the way
Course
business and other daily affair works. Through this module Graduates are focused on
Description
Performances of computer Networks: Transit time, Response time, Number of users,
Reliability, Security.
1. To Describe how computer networks are organized with the concept of layered
approach
Course
2. To obtain a theoretical understanding of data communication and computer
Objective
networks
3. To implement a simple LAN with hubs, bridges and switches.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Categorize different computer networking concepts based on their performance.
Course 2. Identify the appropriate switching/ Routing technology for the given Source and
Outcome destination pair.
3. Classify the characteristics of connection-oriented and
connectionless communication protocols

98
 4. Identify the proper IP addressing scheme for effective data forwarding mechanism
of the given scenario
5. Validate the error-free received information using the appropriate
6. security protocols
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basics of computers and computer programming.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 - - - 2 1 - - - - - - 3 1
CO-2 `3 - 3 - 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO-3 3 - 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 3 1
CO-4 2 - 2 3 1 1 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO-5 3 - 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - 2 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER NETWORKS (9L)
Introduction to computer networks and the Internet - Application layer - Principles of
network Applications - The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - File transfer - Electronic
CO-1
mail – Domain name system - Peer-to-Peer file sharing - Socket programming - Layering
BTL-2
concepts.
Suggested Reading: IEEE Standards and Specifications.
MODULE 2 : SWITCHING IN NETWORKS (9L)
Classification and requirements of switches, a generic switch, Circuit Switching, Time-
division switching, Space-division switching, Crossbar switch and evaluation of blocking
probability, 2-stage, 3-stage and n-stage networks, Packet switching, blocking in packet CO-2
switches, Three generations of packet switches, switch fabric, Buffering, Multicasting, BTL-3
Statistical Multiplexing.
Suggested Reading: Queuing Theory Applications.
MODULE 3 : TRANSPORT LAYER (9L)
Connectionless transport - User Datagram Protocol, Connection oriented transport –
CO-3
Transmission Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call.
BTL-2
Suggested Reading: Internet Traffic Management.
MODULE 4: NETWORK LAYER (9L)
Logical addressing: IPv4, IPv6 addresses Internet Protocol: Internetworking – IPv4, IPv6 -
address mapping – ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, ICMP, IGMP, Delivery - Forwarding - Routing CO-4
– Unicast, Multicast routing protocols. BTL-2
Suggested Reading: ISP responsibilities.
MODULE 5: APPLICATION LAYER (9L)

99
 Domain Name System (DNS) – E-mail – FTP – WWW – HTTP – Multimedia Network Security:
Cryptography – Symmetric key and Public Key algorithms - Digital signature – Management CO-5
of Public keys – Communication Security – Authentication Protocols. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: DES and AES algorithms
TEXT BOOKS
Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Fourth
1.
edition, July 2017.
William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second
2.
Edition,2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Andrew S. Tannenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition,2010.
E BOOKS
1. http://intronetworks.cs.luc.edu/
2. https://www.topfreebooks.org/free-books-on-computer-networking/
3. https://www.kobo.com/us/en/ebook/basics-of-computer-networking
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/30
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-263j-data-
2.
communication-networks-fall-2002/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-976-high-
3.
speed-communication-circuits-and-systems-spring-2003/

COURSE TITLE OPTICAL COMMUNICATION CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4317 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives an introduction about optical communication, optical fiber modes
Course configuration and various signal degradation factors associated with optical fibers. It
Description covers optical sources and receivers. Final part of the course focusses on optical
networks and system transmission.

100
 1. To learn mode theory of light propagation through fibers
2. To brief the different loss mechanism in fibers
Course
3. To compare different optical sources
Objective
4. To summarize the concepts of various photodetectors and their applications.
5. To familiarize digital optical transmission system.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Comprehend the mode theory of light propagation through fibers
2. Identify the different loss mechanism in fibers
Course
3. Analyze the performance of different optical sources and compare them
Outcome
4. Distinguish between APDs and PIN photo detectors and calculate error performance
of simple systems
5. Illustrate the design aspects of digital optical transmission system
Prerequisites: Communication Systems
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-3 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-4 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO-5 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 - - - - 1 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL COMMUNICATION (9L)

Evolution of fiber optic system- Element of an Optical Fiber Transmission link- Ray Optics-
Optical Fiber Modes and Configurations –Mode theory of Circular Wave guides- Overview of
Modes-Key Modal concepts- Linearly Polarized Modes –Single Mode Fibers-Graded Index CO-1
fiber structure, Photonic Crystal Fibers (PCF) and characteristics BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Wireless optical communication systems.

MODULE 2 – SIGNAL DEGRADATION ON OPTICAL FIBERS (9L)

Attenuation – Absorption losses, scattering losses, Bending Losses, Core and Cladding losses,
Signal Distortion in Optical Wave Guides-Information Capacity determination –Group Delay-
Material Dispersion, Wave guide Dispersion, Signal distortion in SM fibers-Polarization Mode CO-2
dispersion, Intermodal dispersion, Pulse Broadening in GI fibers-Mode Coupling. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
PCF and its working principle.
MODULE 3 – FIBER OPTIC SOURCES AND COUPLING (9L)

101
Direct and indirect Band gap materials-LED structures –Light source materials – Modulation
of a LED, lasers Diodes-Modes–External Quantum efficiency –Resonant frequencies –Laser
Diodes, Temperature effects, Introduction to Quantum laser, Fiber amplifiers- Power CO-3
Launching and coupling, Lensing schemes, Fiber –to- Fiber joints, Fiber splicing BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
VCSEL and its applications.
MODULE 4 – RECEIVERS (9L)
PIN and APD diodes –Photo detector noise, SNR, Detector Response time, Avalanche
Multiplication Noise –Comparison of Photo detectors –Fundamental Receiver Operation –
CO-4
preamplifiers, Error Sources –Receiver Configuration –Probability of Error – Quantum Limit.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Performance analysis of optical communication systems.
MODULE 5 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM (9L)
Point-to-Point links System considerations –Link Power budget –Rise - time budget –Noise
Effects on System Performance-Operational Principles of WDM, Solitons-Erbium-doped
Amplifiers. Basic on concepts of SONET/SDH Network. Passive Optical Networks-FTTH CO-5
Systems BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
ATM, GPON etc.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication” McGraw –Hill International, 4th ed., 2010
2. J.Senior, “Optical Communication, Principles and Practice”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of
India, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Keiser, “Optical Communication essentials”, McGraw-Hill Companies (28 July 2003)
2 G.P Agrawal, “Fiber-Optic Communication Systems”, Wiley; Third edition, 2007
E BOOKS
1 http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
2 https://www.intechopen.com/books/optical-communication
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/101/117101002/

COURSE TITLE ANTENNA AND WAVE PROPAGATION CREDITS 4

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4318 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

102
 First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Course This course covers in depth knowledge of Basic antenna principles, concepts of antenna
Description wave propagation, antenna theory, design, and measurements.
1. To explain the antenna fundamentals and the radiation of the thin linear wire
antennas
2. To discuss the array of point sources and uniform linear arrays and know about the
Course loop antennas
Objective 3. To summarize the radiation mechanism of travelling wave and wideband antennas
4. To analyse the radiation of rectangular aperture, slot, parabolic reflector and lens
antennas
5. To know the basic propagation and its types.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Comprehend the radiation mechanism of wired antennas and measurement of
antenna parameters
2. Develop the performance characteristics of antennas arrays, its operating
Course
principles, methods, and concepts to design
Outcome
3. Design and analyze wide band antennas
4. Design and analyze aperture antennas and smart antennas
5. Comprehend the behavior of nature on EM wave propagation and identify the type
of radio-wave propagation for different communication
Prerequisites: Electromagnetic Fields and Waves
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - 2 1 3 3 3
CO-2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - 1 1 2 3 3
CO-3 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 - - 1 1 1 3 3
CO-4 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 - - 1 1 1 3 3
CO-5 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - 1 1 2 3 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS AND RADIATION FIELDS OF WIRE ANTENNAS
REPRESENTATION (9L+3T=12)

103
 Radiation intensity. Directive gain. Directivity. Power gain. Beam Width. Band Width. Gain
and radiation resistance of current element. Half-wave dipole and folded dipole. Reciprocity
principle. Effective length and Effective area. Relation between gain effective length and
radiation resistance. Concept of vector potential. Modification for time varying, retarded CO-1
case. BTL-2
Fields associated with Hertzian dipole. Power radiated and radiation resistance of current
element. Radiation resistance of elementary dipole with linear current distribution.
Radiation from half-wave dipole and quarter-wave monopole.
MODULE 2: ANTENNA ARRAYS AND LOOP ANTENNAS (9L+3T=12)
Antenna Arrays: Expression for electric field from two and three element arrays. Uniform
linear array. Method of pattern multiplication. Binomial array. Use of method of images for
CO-2
antennas above ground.
BTL-3
Loop Antennas: Radiation from small loop and its radiation resistance. Helical antenna.
Normal mode and axial mode operation.
MODULE 3: BROADBAND ANTENNAS (9L+3T=12)
Radiation mechanisms of traveling wave on a wire. Analysis and design of Rhombic antenna.
CO-3
Coupled Antennas-Self and mutual impedance of antennas. Yagi antennas. Log periodic
BTL-4
antenna.
MODULE 4: APERTURE ANTENNAS (9L+3T=12)
Huygens’ principle, radiation from rectangular and circular apertures, design considerations,
Babinet’s principle, Radiation from sectoral and pyramidal horns, design concepts of
Microstrip antennas CO-4
Basic Concepts of Smart Antennas: BTL-3
Concept and benefits of smart antennas, Fixed weight beamforming basics, Adaptive
beamforming
MODULE 5: WAVE PROPAGATION (9L+3T=12)
The three basic types of propagation; ground wave, space wave and sky wave propagation.
Sky wave propagation: Structure of the ionosphere. Effective dielectric constant of ionized
region. Mechanism of refraction. Refractive index. Critical frequency. Skip distance. Effect of
earth’s magnetic field. Energy loss in the ionosphere due to collisions. Maximum usable
frequency. Fading and Diversity reception. CO-5
Space wave propagation: Reflection from ground for vertically and horizontally polarized BTL-3
waves. Reflection characteristics of earth. Resultant of direct and reflected ray at the
receiver. Duct propagation.
Ground wave propagation: Attenuation characteristics for ground wave propagation.
Calculation of field strength at a distance
TEXT BOOKS
E.C.Jordan and Balmain, "Electro Magnetic Waves and Radiating Systems", PHI, 1968,
1.
Reprint 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS

104
 John D.Kraus and Ronalatory Marhefka, "Antennas", Tata McGraw-Hill Book Company,
1
2002.
2 R.E.Collins, 'Antennas and Radio Propagation ", McGraw-Hill, 1987.
3 Ballany , "Antenna Theory " , John Wiley & Sons, second edition , 2003
4 Prasad, K.D./ Antennas and Wave Propagation/ Khanna Publications, 2001.
E BOOKS
1 http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
2 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 Antenna and wave propagation(web), http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/117101057/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-661-
2
receivers-antennas-and-signals-spring-2003/lecture-notes/
3 http://www.creativeworld9.com/2011/02/learn-antennas-and-wave-propagation.html

COURSE TITLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4319 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Wireless communication have the main objective of study about the basics wireless
Course
LAN concepts ,Fundamentals of cellular basics, Bluetooth technology and MIMO
Description
techniques
1. Summarize the Wireless signal types and propagation models and classify various
fading techniques of wireless communication
Course
2. Interpret the cellular system design fundamentals
Objective
3. Choose the concepts of wireless LAN and Bluetooth technologies suitable for IEEE
std communication

105
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the fundamental concept and architecture of cellular system.
Course
2. Familiarize with fundamentals of wireless LAN concepts.
Outcome
3. Use standard concepts of Bluetooth technology.
4. Recognize the features of MIMO techniques.
Prerequisites: COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 - 2 2 1 1 - - - - 2 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 3 2
CO-3 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO-4 2 2 - 3 2 1 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO-5 1 2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 1 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: Basics of Wireless Communication (9L)

History of Wireless Communication - General Model of Wireless Communication Link - Types

of Signals - Wireless Channel and Radio Communication - Free Space Propagation Model -
Channel Noise and Losses – Fading - Multipath Fading - Fading Effects on Signal and CO-1
Frequency – Shadowing - Wireless Channel Modeling: AWGN Channel, Rayleigh Channel, BTL-2
Rician Fading Channel.
Suggested Reading:Nakagami Fading Channel, Ocumura and Hata Path Loss Model.

MODULE 2: Medium Access Alternatives for Wireless Communication (9L)

Spread Spectrum Modulation - Pseudo-Noise Codes with Properties and Code Generation
Mechanisms - DSSS and FHSS Systems - Time Hopping and Hybrid Spread Systems;
Multicarrier Modulation Techniques - Zero Inter Symbol Interference Communication CO-2
Techniques - Detection Strategies - Diversity Combining Techniques: Selection Combining - BTL-2
Threshold Combining - Equal Gain Combining - Maximum Ratio Combining.
Suggested Reading: CDMA, TDMA and FDMA
MODULE 3: Cellular System Design Fundamentals (9L)
Introduction to Cellular Communications - GSM system for mobile Telecommunication -
Frequency reuse - Multiple Access Technologies - Cellular Processes ‐ Call Setup, Handover - CO-3
Teletraffic Theory - General Packet Radio Service – EDGE Technology - CDMA Based BTL-3
Standards: IS 95 to CDMA 2000 - Wireless Local Loop.
MODULE 4: Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Technology (9L)

106
Introduction to Mobile Adhoc Networks – IEEE 802.11 Architecture and Services - Bluetooth
– Bluetooth Protocol Stack - Wi-Fi Standards - WiMax Standards – WLAN Technology – CO-4
Requirements of WLAN – Infrared Communication - Li-Fi Communication. BTL-2
Suggested Reading: Piconets and Scatternets
MODULE 5: LTE and MIMO Technologies (9L)
Ultra-Wideband Communication - Mobile data networks - Introduction to 4G and concept
of NGN - Long Term Evolution (LTE) - Mobile Satellite Communication - Introduction to MIMO
CO-5
- MIMO Channel Capacity - SVD and Eigenmodes of the MIMO Channel - MIMO Spatial
BTL-2
Multiplexing – MIMO Diversity – MIMO ‐ OFDM.
Suggested Reading: Wireless Geo Location
TEXT BOOKS
T.S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communication-Principles and practice”, Pearson
1.
Publications, Second Edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
UpenaDalal and Manoj K. Shukla, “Wireless and Mobile Communication”, Oxford Press
1
Publications, 2016.
Ezio Biglieri and Robert Calderbank, “MIMO Wireless Communications”, Cambridge
2
University Press, 2015..
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs37/

COURSE TITLE BUSINESS ECONOMICS CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE GEA4304 BS L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-2
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives the broad idea of business economics that studies the financial,
organizational, market-related, and environmental issues faced by corporations. It
Course
helps the students to deal with the problems, analyze the financial aspects and involve
Description
in decision making. It enables them to know the fundamental concepts related to cost,
consumer and producer’s behavior, budget and financial services.

107
 1. To understand the concepts of business economics
2. To know the fundamentals of cost analysis
Course
3. To build knowledge about the consumer’s and producer’s behaviour
Objective
4. To explain the key concepts of budget
5. To elaborate the financial services in economic sector
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline the fundamentals of economics
Course 2. Explain the importance of cost analysis
Outcome 3. Summarize the laws related to consumer’s and producer’s behaviour
4. Describe the various concepts pertaining to the budgetary aspects
5. Elaborate the different financial services that aid in business decisions.
Prerequisites:NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 - - - - - - 2 1 - - - - -
CO-2 - - - 1 2 - - 2 1 - 2 2 - -
CO-3 - - 3 2 - - - 2 1 - - 2 - -
CO-4 - - - - - 2 - 2 1 - 2 2 - -
CO-5 - - - - 2 - - 2 2 1 2 2 - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS (6L)
Introduction to Economics- Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Concept of
Engineering Economics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering
CO-1
economics.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Micro and macro economics
MODULE 2: COST ANALYSIS (6L)
Types of Cost, Element of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity
cost, Break-even analysis, Economies of Scale Cost Classification CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Demand and supply analysis
MODULE 3: CONSUMER’S AND PRODUCER’S BEHAVIOUR (6L)
Consumer Behavior: Law of Diminishing Marginal utility – Equi marginal Utility – Consumer’s
Equilibrium - Indifference Curve – Production: Law of Variable Proportion – Laws of Returns
CO-3
to Scale – Producer‘s equilibrium – Economies of Scale Cost Classification
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Supply Chain

108
MODULE 4: BUDGET (6L)
Process of budgeting in India –classification of budgets trends – evaluation systems – types
of deficits – fiscal policy – indicators –– taxation – centre, state and local – public debt and
CO-4
management.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Goods and Service Tax
MODULE 5: FINANCE (6L)
Basics of finance and financial environment – instruments of financial markets – financial
intermediation – investment banking and brokerage services – securities – types of
securities – market for securities – how and where traded – initial public offering (IPO) – CO-5
secondary markets – trading on exchanges and trading with margins. BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Basics of Stock exchange
TEXT BOOKS

1. S.Shankaran, Business Economics - Margham Publications, 2012.

H.L. Ahuja, Business Economics – Micro & Macro - Sultan Chand & Sons - New Delhi – 55,
2.
2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 S.A.Ross, R.W.Westerfield, J.Jaffe and Roberts: Corporate Finance, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
2 Joseph E Stiglitz: Economics of the Public Sector, 2015.
E BOOKS
https://sites.google.com/site/readbookpdf7734/pdf-download-business-economics-
1.
by---mark-taylor-read-online
2. https://bookboon.com/en/economics-ebooks
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/specializations/managerial-economics-business-analysis

2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/financial-markets-global

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/101/110101005/

COURSE TITLE COMPUTER NETWORKS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4341 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

109
 CIA ESE

80% 20%
This lab is designed to develop the knowledge and skill level in computer networking
Course
domain. Students will carry out the experiments using both hardware and software
Description
tools for performance measurement analysis.
1. To learn and measure the performance of various networking concepts and
Course algorithms
Objective 2. To compare the performance of different Routing programs
3. To exchange the data between nodes using socket programming

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. Evaluate the performance measurements of various networking concepts and
Course algorithms
Outcome 2. Create the computer network scenario to measure routing delay
3. Write the Socket Processing techniques using TCP & UDP protocols to exchange the
data between computer nodes

Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 - - - 1 1 - - 1 - - - 1 -
CO-2 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 1 - - 1 1 -
CO-3 1 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 - - - 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
The following experiments are conducted using the Hardware.
1. PC to PC Communication.
Parallel Communication using 8 bit parallel cable.
Serial communication using RS 232C.
2. Ethernet LAN protocol.
To create scenario and study the performance of CSMA/CD Ethernet protocols using simulation.
3. Token bus and token ring protocols.
To create scenario and study the performance of token bus and token ring protocols through
simulation.
4. Wireless LAN protocols
To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA / CA protocol and
Compare with CSMA/CD protocols.

110
5. Implementation of distance vector and Link state routing algorithm.
6. Transfer of files from PC to PC using Windows / Unix socket processing.
The following experiments are conducted using MATLAB.
7. Basic WLAN Link Modeling
8. Design & Model WLAN Link.
9. Analysis of the performance of an IEEE® 802.11ac™ link by using beamforming
10. 802.11ax Parameterization for Waveform Generation and Simulation.
11. Generate an IEEE® 802.11ac™ transmission containing MAC frames suitable for performing radio
packet error rate (PER) receiver test
12. 802.11ac Packet Error Rate Simulation for 8x8 TGac Channel
13. 802.11ac Signal Recovery with Preamble Decoding
14. WLAN Link Modeling in Simulink

TEXT BOOKS
Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw-Hill,Fourth
1.
edition, July 2017.
William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second Edition,
2.
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Andrew S. Tannenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2010.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/30
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-263j-data-
communication-networks-fall-2002/
3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-976-high-
speed-communication-circuits-and-systems-spring-2003/

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT – IV CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4342 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-5
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
PROJECT
FIRST REVIEW SECOND REVIEW THIRD REVIEW REPORT AND
VIVA VOCE
20% 30% 20% 30%

111
 In this course, each team with maximum of four members is expected to design and
develop practical solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information
Course Technology research. Software usage should be followed during the development. The
Description theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the current and previous semesters
should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications. At the end of
the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work carried out.
1. Design and develop prototype based on the knowledge gained
Course
2. Propose a project and defend it as a team
Objective
3. Solve real time problem in electronics or communication domain
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course 1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society.
Outcome 2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem.
3. Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant application.
Prerequisites: ECB4333 - Design Project -III, ECB4316 – Computer Networks, ECB4317 – Optical
Communication, ECB4318 – Antenna and Wave Propagation, ECB4319 – Wireless Communication
Systems, MATLAB, MULTISIM
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO-3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
The Project Work shall be carried out in the field of Electronics & Communication
Engineering. Students shall work in convenient groups of not more than four members in
a group. Every Project Work shall have a Supervisor. During this period the supervisor
shall guide the students to implement the Project. The students shall give periodical
presentations of the progress made in the Project Work.
Each group shall finally produce a report covering background information, literature
survey, problem statement, Project work details and conclusions. This final report shall
be typewritten form as specified in the guidelines
Assessment
Review / Exam Weightage
CO-1, 2,3
First Review 20%
BTL-5
Second Review 30%
Third Review & Demo 20%
Project report and Viva-
30%
Voce
TOTAL 100%

112
 COURSE TITLE COMPREHENSION CREDITS 1
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4343 PC L-T-P-S 1-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Periodical Assessment Second Periodical Assessment Third Periodical Assessment
Basic Sciences (MCQ) Core Engineering (MCQ) Emerging areas (Presentation)
20% 50% 30%
This course helps the Electronics and Communication Engineering students to
Course understand and comprehend any given problem related to their field by using
Description appropriate technology and helps the students to organize, present and communicate
information to address a range of audiences, purposes and genres.
Course
To develop the skills required for employability.
Objective
Upon completion, students will be able to
1. Develop the analytical and technical skills
Course
2. Perform as an individual, and as a member or leader of a team
Outcome
3. Communicate effectively on complex engineering matters with technical and non-
technical audiences.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO-2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO-3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
SEMESTER VII
COURSE TITLE VLSI DESIGN TECHNIQUES CREDITS 4
COURSE CODE ECB4401 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
24THACM, LEARNIN
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 G LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

113
 First
Second Periodical Seminar/ Assignments/ Surprise Attendan
Periodical ESE
Assessment Project Test / Quiz ce
Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The aim of this course is to provide an introduction to the design and layout of Very Large
Scale Integrated (VLSI) circuits for complex digital systems. It covers custom design, cell-
Course based hierarchical design, and algorithmic aspects of VLSI CAD tools. With a focus on CMOS
Description technology, students generate layouts of CMOS chips on engineering workstations in an
associated laboratory. By the end of the course, students will have designed, laid out, and
testing all digital circuits.
1. To comprehend the fabrication concepts and CMOS circuits
2. To study MOS transistor theoretical concepts
Course
3. To familiarise the VLSI concepts in combinational and sequential circuits
Objective
4. To discuss ASIC and FPGA architecture.
5. To develop VERILOG code for digital circuits
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Illustrate the techniques used for VLSI fabrication, design of CMOS logic circuits, Layout
and Stick Diagram.
Course 2. Analyze the behavior of a DC characteristics of MOS Transistor
Outcome 3. Analyze and design combinational and sequential circuits using CMOS gates.
4. Interpret the techniques of chip design using programmable devices.
5. Demonstrate the knowledge of Verilog HDL and to design the digital circuits Verilog
language.
Prerequisites: ECB4116-DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3
CO-2 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2
CO-3 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3
CO-4 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 3
CO-5 2 1 1 2 3 - - - 1 - 1 - 1 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – CMOS TECHNOLOGY (9L+3T=12)

114
MOS transistor, CMOS logic- Inverter, NAND gate, NOR gate, logic gates, compound gates,
Pass transistors and Transmission gates, multiplexers, CMOS Fabrication and Layout-
CO-1
Inverter fabrication process, Layout design rules, Gate layouts and Stick diagram.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
MOS transistor, IC fabrication, logic gates
MODULE 2 – MOS TRANSISTOR THEORY (9L+3T=12)

MOS transistor introduction, Long channel I-V characteristics, Non ideal I-V characteristics,
DC transfer characteristics, Delay- Elmore delay model, Power- Sources of power dissipation,
CO-2
Dynamic power and Static power.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
VI characteristics ,power dissipation

MODULE 3 – COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS (9L+3T=12)

Examples of combinational circuit, Static and dynamic latches and registers, Timing issues,
Pipelines, Clock strategies, Memory and memory control circuits, Synchronous and
CO-3
Asynchronous design.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Latches, flipflops, registers, memory
MODULE 4 – ASIC AND FPGA ARCHITECTURE (9L+3T=12)
CMOS chip design options-Full custom ASICs, Std. Cell based ASICs, Gate Array based ASICs
Channeled, Channel less and structured GA, FPGA, Fusible link technologies, Anti-fuse
technologies, Mask programmable devices, PROM’s, EPROM, EEPROM, FLASH, SRAM- based CO-4
technologies, Fine-, medium- & coarse-grained architectures. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Memory, SRAM, DRAM
MODULE 5 – VERILOG HDL (9L+3T=12)
Basic Concepts: Identifiers, gate primitives, value set, ports, gate delays, structural gate level
and switch level modeling, Design hierarchies, Behavioral and RTL modeling: Operators,
timing controls, Procedural assignments conditional statements, Data flow modeling and CO-5
RTL. BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Digital circuits, gates, combinational circuits and sequential circuits
TEXT BOOKS
CMOS VLSI Design A Circuits and Systems Perspective, Fourth Edition by Neil H.E. Weste, David
1.
Money Harris, 2011

2. M.J. Smith, ―Application specific integrated circuits‖, Addisson Wesley, 2002.

Samir Palnitkar; Verilog HDL - Guide to Digital design and synthesis, III edition, Pearson Education,
3.
2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS

115
 Jan Rabaey, AnanthaChandrakasan, B.Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
1
Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
2 A.Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, “BASIC VLSI Design”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Prentice
3
Hall of India 2005
E BOOKS
1. https://www.pinterest.com/pin/348677196134415137/
2 http://www.freebookcentre.net/electronics-ebooks-download/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101058/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092/2

COURSE
RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING CREDITS 4
TITLE
COURSE COURSE
ECB4402 PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
RF and Microwave engineering pertains to the study and design of microwave circuits,
components and systems. Fundamental principles are applied to analysis, design and
Course
measurement techniques in this field. This course deals with analysis of circuit properties
Description
of active and passive devices. It also focus on the measurement techniques of various
microwave parameters.
1. To lay a strong foundations in the basics techniques of RF components and filters.
2. To impart the knowledge of Scattering Matrix and establish the S-Matrix for various
Course types of microwave junctions.
Objective 3. To provide in-depth knowledge of semiconductor devices relevant for high frequency-
microwave operation.
4. To introduce the basic techniques of modern RF and microwave measurements.

116
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Relate microwave measurement parameters and identify, design and solve elements
in impedance matching and filter circuits.
2. Apply the concepts of reciprocity, scattering matrix in Microwave Components,
determine resonance frequencies and Q‐value for open or short‐circuited
Course
transmission line resonators.
Outcome
3. Choose analysis methods to determine circuit properties of passive or active
microwave devices.
4. Design microwave high frequency and broadband amplifiers.
5. Analyze the measurement techniques of various microwave parameters and
experimental setup.
Prerequisites: Transmission Lines and Waveguides
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO-2 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO-3 3 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO-4 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO-5 3 1 2 2 2 2 - - 2 1 - 2 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – RF COMPONENTS AND FILTERS (9L+3T=12)
Transmission Line Transformers , Baluns, Wilkinson Power Dividers/Combiners, Couplers; CO-1
Filter Design; Microwave applications, relation between dB, dBm, dBw. BTL-2
MODULE 2 – MICROWAVE NETWORK ANALYSIS AND WAVEGUIDE COMPONENTS (9L+3T=12)
Impedance and Admittance Matrices, The Scattering Matrix, Power Waves and
Generalized Scattering Parameters, Three-Port Networks (T-Junctions), Basic Properties of CO-2
Dividers and Couplers, Ferrites— Composition and Characteristics, Faraday Rotation, BTL-2
Ferrite Components — Gyrator, Isolator, Circulator.
MODULE 3 – MICROWAVE DEVICES (9L+3T=12)
Microwave Tubes: Klystron, TWT, Magnetron; Schottky Diodes and Detectors, PIN Diodes
and Control Circuits, Varactor Diodes, Heterojunction Bipolar Transistor, High Electron CO-3
Mobility Transistor, Avalanche Transit Time (ATT) Devices, Transfer Electron Devices – BTL-3
GUNN Diode.
MODULE 4 – MICROWAVE HIGH EFFICIENCY BROADBAND AND POWER AMPLIFIER (9L+3T=12)

117
Overdriven Class B, Class-F Circuit Design, Inverse Class F, Class E with Shunt Capacitance
Class E with Finite DC-Feed Inductance, Bode-Fano Criterion, Matching Networks with
CO-4
Lumped Elements, Matching Networks with Mixed Lumped and Distributed Elements,
BTL-3
Matching Networks with Transmission Lines, Power Amplifiers with Lossy Compensation
Networks, Broadband Class-E Power Amplifiers
MODULE 5 – MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION AND MEASUREMENTS (9L+3T=12)
Microwave Antennas (parabolic reflector Antennas), RADAR Systems, The RADAR
Equation, Types of RADAR, RADAR Ranging, Theory and Applications of Radiometry, The
CO-5
Dicke Radiometer, Description of microwave bench, Noise at microwave frequency and
BTL-4
measurement of noise figure, Power measurement, attenuation, frequency, impedance,
VSWR, EIRP and Gain Over Noise Temperature (G/T)
TEXT BOOKS

1. Gottapu Sasi Bhushana Rao "Microwave and Radar Engineering" Pearson Education, 2013

Andrei Grebennikov, “RF and Microwave Power Amplifier Design”, McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd
2.
Ed, 2015
3. Samuel V. Liao “Microwave Devices and Circuits” Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2003
4. A. Das and S.K. Das, “ Microwave Engineering” TMH, 2nd Ed., 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 David M Pozar Microwave Engineering” Wiley Publications, 4th Ed , 2012
2 R.E. Collin “Foundations for Microwave Engineering” IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd Edition, 2002.
Matthew M Radmanesh “Advanced RF and Microwave Circuit Design: The Ultimate Guide to
3
Superior Design”, Author House, 2009
E BOOKS
1. http://www.ibook4u.com/2014/03/microwave-engineering-by-david-m-pozar.html
https://www.accessengineeringlibrary.com/browse/rf-and-microwave-power-amplifier-
2.
design-second-edition#fullDetails
MOOC
1 https://www.conted.ox.ac.uk/courses/practical-rf-microwave-design

COURSE TITLE INTERNET OF THINGS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4403 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project

118
 15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The Internet of Things (IoT) is everywhere. It provides advanced data collection,
Course connectivity, and analysis of information collected by computers everywhere. This
Description course gives a foundation in the Internet of Things, including the components, tools, and
analysis by teaching the concepts behind the IoT and a look at real-world solutions.
1. To provide knowledge on the significance of the Internet of Things
Course
2. To Discuss the architecture, operation, and business benefits of an IoT solution
Objective
3. To Explore the relationship between IoT, cloud computing, and big data
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Interpret the basic concepts and scope of internet of things
2. Apply the concepts of networking and communication in IoT and design a simple
projects with sensors, Arduino and Raspberry PI
Course 3. Interpret the Edge Architecture Model & Cloud-Cloud device connectivity in a typical
Outcome IoT system.
4. Analyze the IoT & iCore Reference model, different Architecture and the need of
privacy in preserving and sharing of data in IoT for various applications
5. Apply the concept of IoT in Industry and also explain the challenges to be taken into
consideration during the implementation.
Prerequisites: Embedded systems, Microprocessor and microcontrollers, Programming in C
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-2 `3 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 -
CO-3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO-4 3 2 - 2 - - - - - 1 - -- 3 -
CO-5 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 - 2 2 2 3 3 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS (9L)
The technology of the internet of things, making the internet of things, Elements of an IoT CO-1
ecosystem, design principles for connected devices, Web thinking for connected devices. BTL-2
MODULE 2 : NETWORKS AND COMMUNICATION (9L)

119
Networking Technology, Communication Technology, Processes Data Management,
Prototyping embedded devices, Sensors and actuators, Embedded computing basics,
Introduction to ARDUINO, RASPBERRY PI CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Working Principle of different sensors and Actuators, Network and Communication
Protocols
MODULE 3 : FOUNDATIONAL ELEMENTS OF AN IOT SOLUTION (9L)
The Edge of the IoT, An Abstract Edge Architecture Model, Device Types, The Cloud-to- CO-3
Device Connectivity, Topology of the Cloud Data Normalization and Protocol Translation BTL-2
MODULE 4: COMMON ARCHITECTURAL APPROACH FOR IOT EMPOWERMENT (9L)
The IoT Reference Model, IoT Reference Architecture, The iCore Functional architecture, CO-4
Privacy-preserving Sharing of IoT Data BTL-4
MODULE 5: IOT APPLICATIONS (9L)
IoT Applications — Value Creation for Industry, Value Creation and Challenges, The Smart
Factory Initiative, Cost-effective Process Integration of IoT Devices, IoT for Retailing Industry CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Case study on few IOT applications
TEXT BOOKS
Ovidiu Vermesan ,Peter Friess “Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart
1.
Environments and Integrated Ecosystems”, 2013 River Publishers
Joe Biron and Jonathan Follett “ Foundational Elements of an IoT Solution The Edge, The
2.
Cloud, and Application Development” , 2016 O’Reilly Media, Inc.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Adrian McEwen,Hakim Cassimally “Designing the Internet of Things” 2014 John Wiley and
1.
Sons, Ltd.
E BOOKS
1. https://webofthings.org/2016/04/24/free-book-using-the-web-to-build-the-iot/
2. http://spmkck.co.in/Notes/Learning%20Internet%20of%20Things.pdf
3. http://www.qorvo.com/design-hub/ebooks/internet-of-things-for-dummies
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105166/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs22/preview

120
COURSE TITLE MACHINE LEARNING AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE CREDITS 4
COURSE CODE ECB4404 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Periodical Second Periodical Seminar/ Surprise
Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment Assignments/ Project Test / Quiz
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives a basic introduction to machine learning (ML) and artificial intelligence
(AI). Through an algorithmic approach, the students are given a practical understanding
of the methods being taught, through making their own implementations of several of
Course
the methods. The course covers supervised classification based on e.g., artificial neural
Description
networks (deep learning), as well as unsupervised learning (clustering), regression,
optimization (evolutionary algorithms and other search methods) and reinforcement
learning.
To understand the concepts of machine learning
1. To know the fundamentals of regression and neural networks
Course
2. To comprehend the classifiers based on supervised and unsupervised learning
Objective
3. To explain the key concepts of AI models
4. To elaborate the logical inferences in AI
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Solve real world machine learning problems with fundamental of Machine learning
data, variable model representation (Single, gradient and multi etc.)
2. Apply basic regression, classification methods, propagation algorithms to train the
Course neural network
Outcome 3. Distinguish between supervised and unsupervised learning and its application in
machine learning task (computational problems, models, algorithm etc.,)
4. Apply the basic principles, models and algorithms to AI to recognize, model and
solve problems in the analysis and design of information systems.
5. Analyze, evaluate and verify the correctness of logical inferences in AI.
Prerequisites:NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO-2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2

121
CO-3 3 2 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - 2
CO-4 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO-5 - - 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 2 - 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING LANGUAGE (9L+3T=12)
Idea of Machine learning from data, Classification of problems – Regression and
classification, Supervised and Unsupervised learning, Model representation for single
variable, Single variable cost function, Gradient Decent for Linear Regression, Multivariable
CO-1
model Representation, Multivariable cost function, Gradient Decent in Practice, Normal
BTL-2
Equation and non-invertibility.
Suggested Readings:
Symbolic and fuzzy regression
MODULE 2: LOGISTIC REGRESSION AND NEURAL NETWORKS (9L+3T=12)
Classification, Hypothesis Representation, Decision Boundary, cost function, Advanced
optimization, Multi-classification, Problem of Over fitting, Regularization, Non-linear
Hypothesis, Biological neurons, Model Representation, Intuition for neural Networks,
CO-2
Multiclass classification, Cost function, Back Propagation Algorithm, Back Propagation
BTL-3
Intuition, Weight Initialization, Neural Network Training.
Suggested Readings:
Perceptron Networks
MODULE 3: SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES AND UNSUPERVISED LEARNING (9L+3T=12)
Optimization Objective, Large Margin classifiers, Kernels, SVM practical, Consideration,
Unsupervised learning introduction, k-means Algorithm, Optimization objective, Random
Initialization, choosing number clusters, Problem Formulation, Content based CO-3
recommendations, Collaborative Filters, Vectorization, Implementation Details. BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Linear Discriminant Classifiers
MODULE 4: FUNDAMENTALS AND SEARCH TECHNIQUES (9L+3T=12)
Defining Artificial Intelligence, Defining AI Techniques, defining problems as state space
search, Production Systems and characteristics, Hill climbing, Breadth first and depth first
search, Best first search, Representations and Mapping, Approaches to knowledge CO-4
representation. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Basics on Expert Systems
MODULE 5: PREDICATE LOGIC,KNOWLEDGE RULES AND SYMBOLIC LOGIC (9L+3T=12)
Representing simple facts in logic, Computable functions and predicates, Procedural vs
Declarative knowledge, Logic programming, Forward vs Backward reasoning, Non CO-5
Monotonic reasoning, Logics for Non-monotonic reasoning. BTL-3
Suggested Readings: AI application in medicine

122
TEXT BOOKS
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”,McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Math; 1997.
2. Rich and Knight. “Artificial Intelligence”: 2nd Edition, 2017
REFERENCE BOOKS
Staurt Russel, Peter Norvig,“Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Pearson New
1
International Edition, 2014.
Christoper M Bishop, “Neural Network for pattern recognition”, Oxford university press,
2
2008
Richert and Coelho, “Building Machine Learning System with Python”, Packt
3
Publishing 2013
E BOOKS
https://www.pdfdrive.com/machine-learning-step-by-step-guide-to-implement-machine-
1.
learning-algorithms-with-python-e158324853.html
2. https://twimlai.com/ebooks/
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/machine-learning
2 https://online-learning.harvard.edu/subject/artificial-intelligence

COURSE TITLE VLSI DESIGN LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4431 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%

This laboratory course helps to develop and design combinational and sequential
Course
circuits using Verilog HDL. This course helps the students to know about the application
Description
of these circuits in system on chip.

To enable students to learn Verilog HDL concepts.

Course
1. To develop and design digital circuits using Vivado 2015.3 tool.
Objective
2. To practice the layout of CMOS logic gates using Tanner EDA tool.

123
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Develop HDL modules using the Verilog HDL concepts.
Course
2. Design the Combinational and Sequential Circuits using HDL.
Outcome
3. Design the advanced digital circuits using HDL.
4. Design, simulate and extract the layouts of analog IC using EDA too.
Prerequisites: Digital System Design
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 - - 1 2
CO-2 2 2 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 - - 1 2
CO-3 2 2 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 - - 1 2
CO-4 2 2 1 - 2 - - - 1 1 - - 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
FPGA Based Experiments:
1. HDL based Design entry and Simulation using Combinational Logic Circuits
2. Synthesis, Area, Power and Timing report generation using Sequential Circuits
3. Verilog implementation of carry look ahead adder
4. Design of finite state machines based on Mealy.
5. Design of finite state machines based on Moore.
IC DESIGN EXPERIMENTS: (BASED ON TANNER/CADENCE/EQUIVALENT)
1. Schematic design of transistor level Inverter using CMOS logic
2. Schematic design of transistor level NAND and NOR gates using CMOS logic
3. Schematic design of 4:1 Multiplexer using Pass Transistor
4. Schematic design of D-Latch and D-Flip Flop
5. Layout design of CMOS Inverter
TEXT BOOKS
Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th
1.
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
2. M.J. Smith, ―Application specific integrated circuits‖, Addisson Wesley, 1997
Samir Palnitkar; Verilog HDL - Guide to Digital design and synthesis, III edition, Pearson
3.
Education, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Jan Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, B.Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
1
Perspective”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
A.Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, “BASIC VLSI Design”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2
2007.

124
E BOOKS
1. https://www.pinterest.com/pin/348677196134415137/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101058/

2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092/2

COURSE TITLE MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECB4432 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CATEGORY
24TH ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-5
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

CIA ESE

80% 20%
This laboratory course provides in depth knowledge to the students to analyze, design
Course and build the microwave and optical equipment using RF tool box, microwave and
Description optical bench setup. This course also helps them to do the experiments using software
such as Optsim Software and MATLAB.
1. To learn the various characteristics of optical sources, detectors and links in Optical
systems.
2. To provide knowledge on the concepts of DWDM communication system and EDFA
Course and simulate using Optsim software
Objective 3. To enhance the knowledge of microwave components and practice the microwave
measurement procedures.
4. To familiarize the RF tool box in MATLAB to understand the characteristics of RF
components.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Analyze the various characteristics of optical sources, detectors and links in Optical
systems.
2. Design, implement and test DWDM communication system and EDFA using Optsim
Course
Software.
Outcome
3. Apply the basic knowledge of waveguide and microwave resonator circuits.
4. Assess the methods used for generation and amplification of the microwave power.
5. Analyze the characteristics of RF components and S parameters using RF tool box
and MATLAB.
Prerequisites: Optical communication, RF and Microwave fundamentals
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING

125
 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO-2 3 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO-3 3 3 2 - - 1 - - 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO-4 3 3 2 - - 2 - - 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO-5 3 3 2 1 - - - - 1 1 2 3 2 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Comparison of NRZ, RZ, CRZ and CSRZ modulations using Optsim Software
2. Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) link using Optsim Software
3. Gain Characteristics of EDFA amplifier using Optsim Software
4. Effect of ISI on BER study using Optsim Software
5. Characteristics of Photodiode - Hardware
6. Characteristics of LED -Hardware
7. Fiber optic links – Hardware
8. Introduction to microwave measurements:
 Detection of RF power
 Measurement of SWR and Impedance of an unknown load
 S-parameter calculation for RF component networks using RF Toolbox
9. To plot the S- parameters of Two Port Network for the given frequency using MATLAB
10. Obtain Power coupling using directional coupler
11. Study of Reflex Klystron Repeller mode characteristics
12. Study of GUNN Diode characteristics
13. Study of radiation pattern of Microstrip patch antenna
14. Radio-frequency characteristics of components using RF toolbox
15. Analyzing gain and noise figure of transmitters using RF budget analyzer App
TEXT BOOKS

1 Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication” McGraw –Hill International, 4th ed., 2009.

2 Annapurna Das, Sisir K. Das “Microwave Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2000.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 G.P Agrawal, “Fiber-Optic Communication Systems” , Wiley; Third edition, 2007
E BOOKS
1 https://www.intechopen.com/books/optical-communication
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104127/

126
 2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT - V CREDITS 1

COURS
E
COURSE CODE ECB4433 PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CATEG
ORY
Approv
LEARNING
Version 1.0 al 24TH ACM, 30.05.2018 BTL- 5
LEVEL
Details
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
FIRST PROJECT REPORT AND
SECOND REVIEW THIRD REVIEW
REVIEW VIVA VOCE
20% 30% 20% 30%
This module gives a strong Engineering and Practical foundation for understanding the
Course different types of social problems and its solution based on engineering knowledge. It is
Description suitable for general engineering students to understand the importance of engineering
concepts and its relevant applications.
1. To allow students to demonstrate a wide range of the skills learned during their
course of study by delivering a product that has passed through the design, analysis,
testing and evaluation
2. To encourage multidisciplinary research by integrating the concepts learned in a
Course various courses.
Objective 3. To allow students to develop problem solving, analysis, synthesis and
evaluation skills.
4. To encourage teamwork.
5. To improve students' communication skills by emphasizing them to prepare project
report, poster and oral presentation
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course 1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society
Outcome 2. Implement practical solutions to the societal problem
3. Demonstrate the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant application
Prerequisites: ECB4342, ECB4401,ECB4402, ECB4403, ECB4404, MATLAB, MULTISIM, TANNER TOOL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

127
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO-2 `3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 3 3
CO-3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related

LAB / MINI PROJECT

In this project, each team with maximum of five members is expected to design and develop
practical solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology
research. Software usage should be followed during the development. The theoretical
knowledge gained from the subject in the current and previous semesters should be applied
to develop effective solutions to various applications. At the end of the course the group
should submit a complete report of the project work carried out. Assessment is made as
follows

BTL 5
Assessment
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 20%
Second Review 30%
Third Review & Demo 20%
Project report and Viva-
30%
Voce
TOTAL 100%

128
 SEMESTER VIII

COURSE TITLE PROJECT AND VIVA VOCE CREDITS 8

0-0-24-
COURSE CODE ECB4441 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S
11
24TH ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
THIRD PROJECT REPORT AND
FIRST REVIEW SECOND REVIEW
REVIEW VIVA VOCE
10% 20% 20% 50%
The aim of this course will vary in nature from design and make to computational and
research-based projects. All proposed projects will give the opportunity to achieve the
learning outcomes. The module aims to provide students with a vehicle to develop
Course
and/or integrate knowledge and skills as well as discover and (in some cases) create new
Description
knowledge using literature, experimentation or modelling and analysis where
appropriate. The module also aims to reward curiosity and motivation with a satisfying
experience involving close interaction with an academic supervisor.
1. To make students apply data mining tools for various phases of data mining.
2. To enable students to implement the classification techniques with different
algorithms.
Course
3. To help in demonstrating and apply clustering techniques with different
Objective
algorithms.
4. To apply association rule for mining.
5. To help students design a single and multi-layer neural network.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
Course 1. Design and develop prototype based on the knowledge gained
Outcome 2. Propose a project and defend it as a team
3. Solve real time problem in electronics or communication domain
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3
CO-2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3
CO-3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related

129
 The Project Work shall be carried out in the field of Electronics & Communication Engineering.
Students shall work in convenient groups of not more than four members in a group. Every Project Work
shall have a Supervisor. During this period the supervisor shall guide the students to implement the
project. The students shall give periodical presentations of the progress made in the Project Work.
Each group shall finally produce a report covering background information, literature survey,
problem statement, project work details and conclusions. This final report shall be typewritten form as
specified in the guidelines.

Assessment
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 20%
Third Review & Demo 20%
Project report and Viva-
50%
Voce
TOTAL 100%

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES
SEMESTER III
COURSE TITLE LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN WITH VHDL CREDITS 3
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4251 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course provides knowledge to design and simulate VHDL model using concurrent
Course and sequential modelling techniques. It covers the design of hazard free combinational
Description circuit and also to design and analyse the sequential function using Moore and Mealy
machine.

130
 1. To Identify, eliminate and design hazard free combinational circuits.
2. To derive State diagram, State Table and circuit diagram for the given sequence
Course
3. To interpret the VHDL design syntax and concept.
Objective
4. To write VHDL code for combinational circuits.
5. To write VHDL code for sequential.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Design hazards free combinational circuits.
2. Analyze and apply Moore and Mealy machine concept to design sequential circuits
such as Sequence detection and Sequence generation.
Course
3. Write the VHDL design syntax.
Outcome
4. Design combinational circuits such as Adders, Subtractors, Multiplexers and
Comparators using VHDL language.
5. Design sequential circuits such as Flip Flops, Shift registers, Counters and FSM using
VHDL language.
Prerequisites: ECB4116 – Digital System Design
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-3 3 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO-4 3 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO-5 3 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: REALIZATION OF HAZARD FREE DIGITAL FUNCTIONS (9L)
Hazards in combinational circuits. Design of hazard free combinational logics. Set up and
Hold time concepts in Flip flop. Excitation tables and conversion of flip flop from one type to
CO-1
another type
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Dynamic Hazards and Essential Hazards
MODULE 2: DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF SEQUENTIAL FUNCTIONS (9L)
Structure of sequential circuits: Moore and Melay machines-State tables, state diagrams and
timing diagrams. FSM techniques to design the sequential functions for sequence detection
CO-2
and sequence generation
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Sequence Counting
MODULE 3: VHDL DESIGN CONCEPTS (9L)

131
Introduction to Hardware description language- Assignment statements, sequential
statements and process, conditional statements, case statement, Array and loops, Packages
CO-3
and Libraries, concurrent statements
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Access types and File Types
MODULE 4: COMBINATIONAL CIRCUIT DESIGN (9L)
VHDL design of combinational circuits such as Full Adder, Full Subtractor, Multiplexers,
Demultiplexers, encoders, decoders , code converters, comparators, implementation of
CO-4
Boolean functions, Serial and Parallel adder.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Different Types of Adders
MODULE 5: DESIGN OF LOGIC SYSTEM USING VHDL (9L)
VHDL design of Sequential Circuits such as Flip flops, Shift Registers, Counters, Basic ROM
and Finite State machine. CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Design of real time systems using FSM
TEXT BOOKS

1. Morris Mano, “Digital design”, 5 th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2012

Parag K. Lala, “Digital System Design Using Programmable Logic Devices” first Edition, BS
2.
Publications/BSP Books (2003)
REFERENCE BOOKS
Albert Paul Malvino, Donald P Leach, Gautam Saha, “Digital Principles and Applications”,
1
7 Edition- Tata McGraw - Hill Education ,2011
John M. Yarbrough, “Digital logic: Applications and Design”, Thomas – Vikas Publishing
2
House, 2002.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/264005171_Digital_Electronics
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106086/1
2 https://www.openlearning.com/courses/SKEE1223x

COURSE TITLE BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4252 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

132
 First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This Course deals with the fundamentals of house wiring and its significance so that the
students can use this concept for their own needs. This course also allows the students
Course
to learn the essence of electrical machines such as DC motor, DC generator,
Description
Transformer, Induction motor and Alternator and their characteristics in order to
choose a suitable machine for a given application
1. To understand the wiring types used for domestic and Industry
2. To acquire knowledge on DC machines
Course
3. To know the performance of Transformer
Objective
4. To understand Synchronous and Induction machines
5. To get ideas on Electrical energy and Energy conservation
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Analyze the basic concepts of electrical wiring and distinguish between single phase
and three phase circuits
2. Discuss the working principles and Constructions of DC machines and analyze their
Course Performance
Outcome 3. Describe the construction and operational characteristics of Transformer under
various load types and analyze the performance
4. Interpret the construction, operation and starting methods of Induction and
synchronous machines and examine the characteristics.
5. Discuss the basics of renewable and non-renewable electrical energy sources
Prerequisites: CSB231 – Engineering Mathematics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO-2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO-3 3 1 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO-4 3 1 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO-5 1 1 1 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – HOUSE WIRING & SAFETY (9L)

133
Single phase and three phase system – phase, neutral and earth-Basic house wiring ‐ tools and
components for wiring -Types of wiring – Wiring for staircase, florescent lamp and ceiling fan-
CO-1
Basic safety measures at home and industry-Earthing
BTL-3
Suggested reading:
Electrical Wiring of Tube light, Fan, Staircase etc.
MODULE 2 – DC MACHINES (9L)
Construction of DC machines – Theory of operation of DC generators – Characteristics of DC
generators‐ Operating principle of DC motors – Types of DC motors and their characteristics –
CO-2
Speed control of DC motors‐ Applications.
BTL-3
Suggested reading:
Efficiency test on dc machines
MODULE – 3 : TRANSFORMER (9L)
Introduction – Single phase transformer construction and principle of operation – EMF equation of
Transformer‐Transformer no–load phasor diagram –– Transformer on–load phasor diagram ––
CO-3
Equivalent circuit of transformer – Regulation of transformer –Transformer losses and efficiency
BTL-3
Suggested reading:
Efficiency test on Transformers
MODULE–4 : INDUCTION MACHINES AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES (9L)
Principle of operation of three‐phase induction motors – Construction –Types – Equivalent circuit –
Construction of single‐phase induction motors – Types of single phase induction motors – Double
revolving field theory – starting methods ‐ Principles of alternator – Construction details – Types – CO-4
Equation of induced EMF – Voltage regulation- Methods of starting of synchronous motors BTL-3
Suggested reading:
Regulation test on Alternator
MODULE 5 – ELECTRICAL ENERGY AND CONSERVATION (9L)
Introduction to conventional and non‐conventional sources of Electrical Energy- Working of
Thermal Power Plant-Introduction to Solar PV- Basics of Windmill- Electrical Energy
CO-5
Conservation-Working of energy efficient devices- CFL-LED
BTL-2
Suggested reading:
Solar module testing, testing of LED lamps
TEXT BOOKS
D. C. Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private
1.
Limited, 1st Edition, 2011.
D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, 'Electric Machines', Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd,
2.
Reprint 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS
Edward Hughes, Ian Mckenzie Smith, Dr John Hiley, Keith Brown Hughes, “Electrical and Electronic
1.
Technology”, Pearson Publishers, 2016.
Hambley, “Electrical Engineering: Principles and Applications”, Phi Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2.
2016.Del Toro, Vincent "Electrical Engineering Fundamentals", Phi Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2014

134
 E BOOKS
https://www.pdfdrive.com/basic-electrical-engineering-e187288438.html
1.
https://www.pdfdrive.com/basic-electrical-engineering-e185233224.html
MOOC
1 https://alison.com/course/introduction-to-electrical-wiring-systems-revised

COURSE
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING CREDITS 3
TITLE
COURSE COURSE
ECC4253 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-5
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test /
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Instrumentation engineering is the science of the measurement and control of process
variables within a production or manufacturing area. This course describes the basic functions
of instruments, characteristics, error mechanism and calibration. It covers the basic
Course
mechanical, electrical and electronics instruments system and their applications. Transducer,
Description
classification, characteristics and digital technology also included in this module. Last module
focus completely on the applications of the real time world and identifying the suitable
instrumental method of analysis such applications
1. To understand the performance characteristics of instruments
2. To Analyze the fundamentals of mechanical instruments
Course
3. To study transducers and their performance.
Objective
4. To learn basic electronic instruments
5. To understand PLC and its implementation.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Discuss the basic functions of instruments and different characteristics of electronic
instruments.
2. Classify the various types of mechanical measurement system and their applications.
Course 3. Summarize the principle of transduction, classifications, characteristics of different
Outcome transducers and its applications.
4. Categorize different types of electronic measurement and instrument relevance with
digital technology
5. Explain the fundamental concepts of PLC and its implementation using basic Boolean
functions
Prerequisites:NIL

135
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-3 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 -
CO-4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-5 1 1 2 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 Measurement, Instrumentation and Calibration (9L)
Introduction to instrument and measurement, Scope of instrumentation in Industrial
Organization Generalized instrumentation systems with block diagram representation,
Performance Characteristics-static and dynamic characteristics. Errors in instrumentation, CO-1
Calibration and Standards BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Measurements, instrumentation, error
MODULE 2 – Mechanical Instrumentation (9L)
Basics of temperature measurement, Basics of pressure measurement, Basics of force
Measurement, Basics of torque measurement, Basics of flow Measurement CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Force, flow, pressure, torque concepts
MODULE 3 –Electrical Instrumentation (9L)
Passive: Resistive temperature, pressure, strain, displacement transducers, Inductive
displacement thickness transducers, capacitive displacement and moisture transducers.
Active: Piezoelectric (force, pressure, strain), Magneto-striction transducer, Electrochemical
CO-3
transducers (reference, pH), electromechanical transducer (Tachometer), electromagnetic
BTL-3
flow meter, photoelectric transducer (volatile, emissive), Digital Tachometer.
Suggested Readings:
Strain, temperature, photo voltaic
MODULE 4 –Electronic Instrumentation (9L)
Digital electronic meters: Ammeter, Voltmeter, ohmmeter, Multimeter, CRO’s (Traditional,
Sampling, dual trace, storage),Signal generator, function generator, Spectrum Analyzer. CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Analog Ammeter, voltmeter, multimeter, sources.
MODULE 5 –PLC (9L)
PLC-Basics, types, Applications, parts of PLC, Principle of operation, AND,OR,NOT function
,XOR, Boolean algebra, Hardware components, Discrete I/O module, Analog I/O module, CO-5
Memory types, CPU BTL-4
Suggested Readings:

136
 Applications of PLC
TEXT BOOKS
1. Transducers & Instrumentation, by DVS Murthy, PHI 2013, 2nd edition.
Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation by AK Sawhney; DhanpatRai and
2.
Co., New Delhi, 1985.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation by JB Gupta; S.K Kataria and Sons
Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
2 Doeblin & Manek, Measurement Systems, 4/e, McGraw Hill, New York, 1992, 5th edition..
3 H.S Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2010.
4 D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, PHI, 2nd edition, 2003.
5 Frank D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2005.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.kelm.ftn.uns.ac.rs/literatura/si/pdf/Measurement%20Instrumentation%20Sens
ors.pdf
2 http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
3 https://www.studynama.com/community/threads/electrical-measurements-
instrumentation-pdf-download-ebook-lecture-notes.325/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105064/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103105064/35

3 http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/108106070/

COURSE TITLE MICROPROCESSOR AND APPLICATIONS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4254 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Second Seminar/
First Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

137
 This course describes the basic microprocessors 8085 & 8086, followed by its
applications in modern processors. It covers the basic architecture, registers,
Course instructions, addressing modes and interrupts. Assembly language programming is also
Description developed for 8 bit and 16 bit microprocessors. Last module focusses completely on
the applications and gives an introduction about the ARM and PIC processors that are
used in real world applications.
1. To illustrate the 8085 architecture and explain the 8085 MPU signals.
2. To write assembly language program using 8085 instruction set.
Course
3. To illustrate the 8086 architecture and explain the 8086 MPU signals.
Objective
4. To write assembly language program using 8086 instruction set.
5. To identify the applications of Microprocessor and ARM processors.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline the concepts of Microprocessor and summarize the role of 8085 MPU
signals and interrupts.
Course 2. Develop Assembly Language Program using 8085 Instruction set.
Outcome 3. Illustrate the Architecture and Instructions pertaining to 8086 MPU.
4. Construct Assembly Language Program using 8086 Instruction set.
5. Identify the applications of Microprocessor and ARM processors with various
Peripheral Interface.
Prerequisites: Digital Systems
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-2 2 1 - - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2
CO-3 2 1 - - 2 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO-4 2 1 1 - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2
CO-5 2 1 1 - 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: 8085 MICROPROCESSOR (9L)
Introduction to Micro Computers, Microprocessors and Assembly Languages - 8085
MPU- signals- Internal architecture- Interrupts CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
8085 signals and Internal architecture
MODULE 2: 8085 INSTRUCTION SET (9L)

138
 8085 Instruction set –data transfer instructions-stack instructions-I/O instructions-
arithmetic instructions-logical instructions-branch instructions-machine control
CO-2
instructions- Addressing modes
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
8085 Instruction set and Addressing modes
MODULE 3: 8086 MICROPROCESSOR (9L)
8086 MPU -Functional block diagram –Interrupts – Instruction set-string instructions-
Addressing modes CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
8086 Internal architecture, Instruction set and addressing modes
MODULE 4: 8086 ASSEMBLY PROGRAMMING (9L)
8086 Assembly programming- arithmetic operations - addition- subtraction- addition
with carry- multiplication- division-logical operations-block transfer of data CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
8086 assembly programming for arithmetic and logical operations
MODULE 5: 8086 APPLICATIONS AND OVERVIEW OF HIGHER PROCESSORS (9L)
8086 applications-stepper motor speed control- keyboard and display interfacing-
introduction to PIC processor- introduction to ARM processor (qualitative analysis)
CO-5
Suggested Readings:
BTL-2
Stepper motor speed control, keyboard and display interfacing and overview of PIC and
ARM Processors
TEXT BOOKS
Ramesh S. Gaonkar, (2002) “Microprocessor – Architecture, Programming and
1.
Applications with the 8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall. pp. 1-820.
A K Ray and K M Burchandi (2006) “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals”, 3 rd
2.
edition, Tata McGraw Hill, pp. 1- 685.
REFERENCE BOOKS
A. Mathur, (1993), 'Introduction to Microprocessor', Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
1
Publishing Co. Ltd., pp. 1-612.
Lyla Das (2013), “Embedded Systems: An integrated approach”, First edition, Pearson
2
publication, pp. 1-784.
M.A.Mazidi, J.C.Mazidi (2007), “Microcontroller and Embedded systems using Assembly
3
& C”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, pp. 1-560.
E BOOKS
1. https://userpages.umbc.edu/~squire/intel_book.pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/

AN INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING THE INTERNET

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
OF THINGS (IOT)

139
COURSE COURSE
ECC4255 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-5
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course enables the students to design and implement real word applications.
Arduino receives the information from sensors and can control the world around it by
Course
adjusting lights, motors and other actuators. This module describes the digital and analog
Description
Input/output devices and how to interface them with Arduino. This also introduces the
use of software libraries with an Arduino IDE.
1. To provide knowledge of different Smart System applications.
Course 2. To familiarize students with Arduino as IDE, programming language & platform.
Objective 3. To provide knowledge of Arduino boards and basic components.
4. To develop skills to design and implement various smart system application.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1.Summarize embedded system characteristics and illustrate 8-bit micro controller
architecture
Course
2. Demonstrate the Arduino development board and its functions
Outcome
3. Analyze the interfacing of Digital and Analog I/O devices with Arduino
4. Develop code for embedded C Program in Arduino IDE environment
5. Design Embedded system Applications with Arduino

Prerequisites: Embedded systems, Microprocessor and microcontrollers, Programming in C

CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 -
CO-2 3 - - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 1 3 1
CO-3 3 2 2 1 3 1 - - 2 2 1 1 3 1
CO-4 3 1 1 1 3 1 - - - 1 - 1 3 1
CO-5 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 3 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : EMBEDDED SYSTEM AND 8 BIT MICROCONTROLLERS (9L)

140
Introduction to Embedded system, Components of Embedded system, Characteristics
&Applications. 8-bit Microcontroller: AVR microcontrollers and features, Types, Architecture,
CO-1
Block diagram of controller (At mega 8), Functions of each pins of AT mega.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Case study on few Embedded system Applications& Microcontrollers
MODULE 2 : INTRODUCTION TO ARDUINO (9L)
ARDUINO History and Family. Functional Block diagram of Arduino, Architecture, Pin functions.
Introduction to sensors and actuators, Working principle of IR sensor, Ultrasonic sensor, Fire
CO-2
sensor and other basic electronic components.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Working Principle of different sensors and Actuators
MODULE 3 : INTERFACE DIGITAL AND ANALOG I/O DEVICES (9L)
Introduction to TINKERCAD, General Hardware Interfacing-LED’s, Switches, Seven segment
display, Relay’s, LCD, Buzzer, POT, LM35, Digital and Analog Sensors.
CO-3
Practical component:
BTL-
TINKERCAD SIMULATION
3&BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Basic Electronic Devices
MODULE 4: PROGRAMMING ARDUINO (9L)
Learning Arduino platform, Arduino IDE, writing, saving, compiling and uploading sketches,
Programming in Embedded C, Concepts of C Language, Looping Techniques, Decision making
CO-4
Techniques
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Embedded C coding
MODULE 5: EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATIONS (ARDUINO) (9L)
Mini projects on embedded system using Arduino, Home automation, Solar street light system,
Alarm clock, Car parking system, Line follower robot. Etc… CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-5
IOT Applications
TEXT BOOKS
Simon Monk, (2013) “30 Arduino Projects for Evil Genius’’ McGraw- Hill professional,
1.
Second edition, pp.1-199
Michael McRobetrs, (2010), “Beginning Arduino”, Technology in Action, Second edition,
2.
pp. 1- 424
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Dale Wheat, (2012) “Arduino Internas”, Technology in Action, First edition, pp. 1-392
John-david, Warren Josh Adams, Harald Molle, (2008) “Arduino Robotics, Technology in
2.
Action, First edition, pp. 1-581
E BOOKS

141
 1 Rajesh Singh, Anita Gehlot, Bhupendra Singh, and Sushabhan Choudhury, (2017)
“Arduino-Based Embedded Systems”, CRC press, pp. 1-312
2 Ashwin Pajankar (2018), “Arduino Made Simple”, BPB Publications, First edition, pp. 1-
189
3 Michael Pont (2007), “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, Second edition, pp. 1-312
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/arduino-platform
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/interface-with-arduino
3. https://www.coursera.org/learn/arduino

COURSE TITLE DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS USING C CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4256 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course enables the students to know the common data structures that are used in
Course various computational problems. The data structures are implemented in C
Description programming language. This course helps to understand what is going on inside a
particular built-in implementation of a data structure and what to expect from it.
1. To familiarize with basic techniques of algorithm analysis
2. To develop programming skills to write programs based on pointers, structures,
arrays and hash tables.
3. To analyse and make difference between stack, list and queue with different
Course
examples
Objective
4. To master the implementation of linked data structures such as linked lists and
binary trees.
5. To familiarize with several sub-quadratic sorting algorithms including quicksort,
mergesort and bubblesort

142
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the fundamentals of data structures and its datatypes.
Course 2. Write programs based on pointers, structures, arrays and Hash tables.
Outcome 3. Differentiate linked list, stack and queue.
4. Develop programs for different types of trees.
5. Develop programs for different kinds of sorting.
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 - - 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 2
CO-2 3 - - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - 1 2
CO-3 3 2 2 1 3 1 - - 2 2 1 - 1 2
CO-4 3 1 1 1 3 1 - - - 1 - - 1 2
CO-5 3 2 2 2 - 2 - - 2 2 2 3 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES (9L)
Introduction to DS, Algorithm, Asymptotic Analysis, Fundamental of DS, Types of DS CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Case study on data structures algorithms
MODULE 2 : POINTERS, STRUCTURES,ARRAYS & HASH TABLES (9L)
Introduction to pointers & structures, Types of Arrays (Linear, Non-linear, DS & 2D), Array CO-2
Representation, Introduction to Hash tables and its applications, Applications of pointers & BTL-3
structures, Applications of arrays in real time
Suggested Readings:
Case study on pointers, hash tables and arrays
MODULE 3 : LINKED LIST, STACK AND QUEUE (9L)
Linked list, Types of linked list-(Singly linked list, Doubly linked list, Circular Doubly list and Skip
list & Difference between list, linked list representation
DS STACK: DS stack, Array implementation and linked list implementation.
DS QUEUE: Introduction to Queue, Types of Queue, Circular Queue, Deque and Priority Queue CO-3
Difference between Array & Linked list BTL-3
Difference between Stack & Queue
Suggested Readings:
Case study on linked list, stack and queue
MODULE 4: TREES, GRAPH AND SEARCH (9L)

143
 Trees: Introduction to Trees, Types of trees (DS tree, binary, binary search tree, AVL tree, B
tree & B+ tree), difference between- (Binary & Binary search tree, RED black tree & AVL tree,
B tree& B+ tree)
Graph: Introduction to graphs, Graph implementation, BFS & DFS algorithm, Spanning tree,
CO-4
Difference between BFS & DFS, difference between tree & graph
BTL-3
Search: Introduction to search, Types of Search (linear & binary), Difference between linear &
binary tree
Suggested Readings:
Case study on trees, graph and search
MODULE 5: SORTING (9L)
Introduction to sorting, Types of sorting (Bubble, Insertion, Merge, Quick, Selection, etc),
Applications of sorting CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Case study on sorting
TEXT BOOKS
Robert Horvick (2012), “Algorithms and Data Structures – Part 1”, Syncfusion, Inc, First
1.
edition, pp.1-111
Jay Wengrow (2017), “A common-sense Guide to Data structures and Algorithms”,
2.
Pragmatic Bookshelf, First edition, pp. 1-222.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Karumanchi, Narasimha, (2011), ”Data Structures and Algorithms made easy”, Second
1.
edition, pp.1-417
Alfred V.Aho, John E.Hopcroft, Jeffrey D.Ullman ,”Data Structures and Algorithms”,
2.
Pearson publications, pp.1-448
E BOOKS
1 John Bullinaria, (2019), “Lecture notes for Data Structures and Algorithms”, University of
Birmingham, pp.1-126
MOOC
1. https://www.javatpoint.com/data-structure-tutorial

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102064/

COURSE TITLE CIRCUIT SIMULATION USING PSPICE CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4257 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

144
 First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course enables the students to verify how the operational amplifier and power
Course
switching converter circuits will actually work. Moreover, it helps to understand how to
Description
use PSpice for basic circuit analysis.
1. To familiarize the basics of PSPICE
2. To simulate and analyse different DC circuits
Course
3. To simulate and analyse different AC circuits
Objective
4. To simulate and analyse different operational amplifier based circuits
5. To simulate and analyse oscillator circuits and logic gates
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the procedures of creating projects in PSPICE software.
Course 2. Demonstrate the basics of DC circuits Simulation and Analysis
Outcome 3. Illustrate the basics of AC circuits Simulation .and Analysis
4. Assess the transient analysis ,Frequency analysis and OP amp based basic Circuits
5. Simulate Logic Gates, Oscillators and Differential Amplifiers.
Prerequisites: Digital System Design and Microprocessors
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-4 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-5 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : SPICE INTRODUCTION (9L)
Starting Capture -Creating a PSpice Project - Symbols and Parts - Quick Place of PSpice CO-1
Components - PSpice Modeling Applications - Design Templates -Exporting Capture Designs - BTL-3
Saving a Project –Examples of diode characteristics
Suggested Readings:
Basics of PSPICE
MODULE 2 : DC CIRCUIT SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS (9L)

145
Netlist Generation - Displaying Bias Points -Save Bias Point -Load Bias Point-DC Voltage Sweep CO-2
–Markers-Simulating Diode , BJT and Darlington pair amplifier Characteristics. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Basics of Biasing, amplifier characteristics
MODULE 3 : AC CIRCUIT SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS (9L)
Simulation Parameters - AC Markers-Simulating half and full wave Rectifiers-Diode Clipper,
Clamper Circuit simulation and other required examples. CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Rectifiers, wave shaping circuits
MODULE 4: TRANSIENT ANALYSIS, FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND OP AMP CIRCUITS (9L)
Parametric sweep- Stimulus Editor-Transient Analysis –Simulation of frequency response of
BJT, Filters design , Differentiators and Integrators . CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Transient analysis, frequency response
MODULE 5: OSCILLATORS, DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIERS AND BASIC GATES (9L)
Simulation of wein Bridge Oscillators, Differential Amplifiers , Logic gates and other required
Examples . CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Rectifiers, wave shaping circuits
TEXT BOOKS
Dennis Fitzpatrick (2011), “Analog Design and Simulation Using OrCAD Capture and PSpice,
1.
Elsevier, second edition, pp.1-329
James W. Nilsson ,Susan A. Riede (2014), “Introduction to PSpice for Electric Circuits,
2.
Addison-Wesley Longman publication, Fifth edition, pp.1-164
Paul. W. Tuinenga, (1991), “SPICE: A Guide to Circuit Simulation and Analysis Using PSpice”,
3.
Prentice Hall, Second edition, pp.1-254
Sedra and Smith (1992), “Mircoelectronic Circuits”, Oxford University Press, Fourth edition,
4.
pp.1-1237
Behzad Razavi (2002), “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, Tata Mc-Graw-Hill
5.
publication, Second edition, pp.1-684
MOOC
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105147/

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108166/

3. https://www.udemy.com/course/orcad-pspice-tutorial-course-for-beginners/

4. https://www.udemy.com/course/electronic-circuits-analysis-by-pspice/

SEMESTER IV

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING CREDITS 3

146
COURSE CODE ECC4266 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1

24th ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second
Seminar/ Surprise
Periodical Periodical Attendance ESE
Assignments/ Project Test / Quiz
Assessment Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module provides an introduction to basic concepts, methodologies and algorithms
of digital image processing focusing on the following two major problems concerned
with digital images: (1) image enhancement and restoration for easier interpretation of
Course images, and (2) image analysis and object recognition. Some advanced image processing
Description techniques (e.g., wavelet and multiresolution processing) will also be studied in this
course. The primary goal of this course is to lay a solid foundation for students to study
advanced image analysis topics such as computer vision systems, biomedical image
analysis, and multimedia processing & retrieval.
1. Describe and explain basic principles of digital image processing.
2. Design and implement algorithms that perform basic image processing (e.g. noise
Course removal and image enhancement).
Objective 3. Design and algorithms for advanced image analysis (e.g. image compression, image
segmentation).
4. Assess the performance of image processing algorithms and systems
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the general terminology of digital image processing
2. Apply the various types of image transformations in image processing applications
3. Make use of the different filtering techniques for image enhancement and
Course
restoration
Outcome
4. Utilize the image compression and decompression techniques to image processing
applications
5. Apply the image segmentation and morphological image processing techniques to
various images and examine them
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of Linear algebra, Statistics and Signal processing.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 - 2 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 1 2

CO-2 2 2 - 2 - 1 - 1 - - - 2 1 2

147
CO-3 2 2 - 2 - - 1 - - - - 2 1 2

CO-4 2 3 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 2
CO-5 2 - 3 2 1 - 1 1 - - - 2 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS (8 L)
Fundamental steps in DIP, Components of digital image processing system, Structure of
human eye, Image formation in the eye, Brightness adaptation and discrimination, light,
Image sensing and acquisition, Image formation model, Pixels, Basic relationship between CO-1
pixels, coordinate conventions, Imaging Geometry, sampling and quantization, Basic BTL-2
geometric transformations.
Suggested Reading:- Image formation
MODULE 2 – IMAGE TRANSFORMS (7L)
Definition of image transforms, Need for transforms, applications, Two dimensional
Fourier transform, properties, Walsh, Hadamard, Discrete Cosine Transform, Haar, CO-2
Karhunen – Loeve transforms. BTL-2
Suggested Reading:- Wavelet Transform
MODULE 3 – IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION (10L)
Intensity transformations, contrast stretching, histogram equalization, Spatial filtering:
Smoothing filters, sharpening filters, gradient and Laplacian, Frequency domain filtering,
CO-3
Homomorphic filtering, Restoration techniques, Noise characterization, Noise restoration
BTL-3
filters, Adaptive filters, Inverse Filtering, MMSE (Wiener) Filtering.
Suggested Reading:- Mathematical expressions for Noise models
MODULE 4 – IMAGE COMPRESSION (8L)
Encoder-Decoder model, Lossy and Lossless compression, Transform Coding, Sub-image size
selection, blocking artifacts, Run length coding, Bit-plane encoding, Bit-allocation, Zonal CO-4
Coding, Threshold Coding, JPEG, Lossless predictive coding, Lossy predictive coding. BTL-3
Suggested Reading:- Predictive coding
MODULE 5 – IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND REPRESENTATION (6L)
Point, line detection, Edge detection, Thresholding, Region-based segmentation, Boundary
representation: chain codes- Polygonal approximation – Boundary segments – boundary CO-5
descriptors: Simple descriptors-Fourier descriptors - Regional descriptors –Simple BTL-4
descriptors- Texture.
MODULE 6 – MORPHOLOGICAL IMAGE PROCESSING (6L)
Basics, SE, Erosion, Dilation, Opening, Closing, Hole filling, Connected components, convex CO-6
hull, thinning, thickening, skeletons and pruning. BTL-4
TEXT BOOKS
1. Gonzalez & Woods ―Digital Image Processing, 3rd ed., Pearson education, 2008
2. Anil K. Jain ―Fundamentals Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall India, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS

148
 1. Pratt W.K ―Digital Image Processing, 3rd ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2007
2. Chanda Dutta Magundar – Digital Image Processing and Applications, Prentice Hall of India, 2000.
3. S. Sridhar - Digital Image Processing, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, 2016.
E BOOKS
1. http://bookboon.com/en/digital-image-processing-part-one-ebook
2. http://bookboon.com/en/digital-image-processing-part-two-ebook
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105079/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105032/
3 http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/digital-image-processing.html
4 EGGN 510 - Image and Multidimensional Signal Processing
5 https://www.coursera.org/learn/digital
6 Video lectures by Dr. Mubarak Shah (UCF - Center for Research in Computer Vision) (UCF
Computer Vision Video Lectures 2012)

COURSE TITLE BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4267 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Second Seminar/
First Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives a strong theoretical foundation for understanding the basics of
electronics in Biomedical domain including the origin of Bio-potentials, its
Course
characteristics and the methods used to record the bio-signals. It also focuses on the
Description
equipment and the internal blocks used in assisting devices and in radiological devices.
Final module focuses on the applications in medical field.
1. To brief the origin of bioelectric potentials and its recording setup.
2. To analyse the characteristics of biopotentials and the instrument associated with
Course it.
Objective 3. To experiment the working of cardiac pacemaker and defibrillators.
4. To explain the use of radioisotopes and the radiological equipments.
5. To summarize the application of medical instruments in medical field.

149
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Summarize the origin of Bio-potentials and recording methods of various bio signals
Course 2. Measure and analyse the characteristics of various bio signals
Outcome 3. Discuss the significance of cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Bio-telemetry
4. Describe about the radiological equipment.
5. Explain the role of various medical equipment and its applications in medical field

Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-4 2 - - 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-5 2 - - 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO-POTENTIAL RECORDING (9L)
The origin of Bio-potentials; biopotential electrodes, biological amplifiers, ECG, EEG,
EMG, PCG, EOG, lead systems and recording methods, typical waveforms and signal
CO-1
characteristics.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Biological amplifiers, ECG, EEG, EMG recording setup and working
MODULE 2: BIO-CHEMICAL AND NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENT (9L)
PH, PO2, PCO2, PHCO3, Electrophoresis, colorimeter, photometer, Auto analyzer, Blood
flow meter, cardiac output, respiratory measurement, Blood pressure, temperature,
CO-2
pulse, Blood cell counters.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Parameters to measure the biosignals
MODULE 3: ASSIST DEVICES AND BIO-TELEMETRY (9L)
Cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Telemetry principles, frequency selection, Bio-
telemetry, radio-pill and tele-stimulation. CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Applications of Assist devices in medical field
MODULE 4: RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENTS (9L)

150
Ionosing radiation, Diagnostic x-ray equipments, CT – scanners, use of Radio Isotope in
diagnosis, Radiation Therapy. CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Applications of Radiological equipments in medical field
MODULE 5: RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION (9L)
Thermograph, endoscopy unit, Laser in medicine, Diathermy units, Elements of Electrical
safety, Built-in safety features for medical instruments. CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
How medical instruments are used practically in medical field
TEXT BOOKS
Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, (2013) “Biomedical Instrumentation
1. and Measurement”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2nd Edition, Reprint, pp.1-
536.
L.A Geddes and L.E.Baker , (2008) “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation‟
2.
Third Edition, John Wiley and sons, pp.1-616.
Khandpur R.S, (2014) “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill,
3.
New Delhi, 3rd Edition, pp.1-944.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper, (2007) “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
1
Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, pp.1-460.
John G.Webster, (2009), 'Medical Instrumentation Application and Design', 4th edition,
2
John Wiley and Sons, New York, pp.1-712.
E BOOKS
https://www.academia.edu/39250912/Handbook_of_Second_Edition_Biomedical_Ins
1.
trumentation
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/learn/biomedical-engineering

COURSE TITLE NANO ELECTRONICS AND DEVICES CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4268 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

151
 The progress in electronics has been driven by miniaturization. But as electronic devices
approach the molecular scale, classical models for device behavior must be abandoned.
The rapid growth of the integrated circuit (IC) industry has led to the emergence of nano
microelectronics process engineering as a new advanced discipline. Thus, there is a need
Course
to impart quality education at a sufficiently advanced level in the current state of art
Description
Nano electronics and Nano Micro Fabrication and design discipline. To prepare for the
next generation of electronic devices, this course teaches the basic principles that
govern the operation and electrical characteristics of nanoelectronic devices and
nanotechnology
1. To review the background of nanotechnology.
2. To design the logic gates using nano devices.
Course 3. To familiarize the principle of quantum transport devices.
Objective 4. To introduce the operation of memory devices constructed using molecular
electronics.
5. To review the process of nanolithography fabrication.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Analyse the concepts involved in nanotechnology and the process involved in
preparation of nanomaterials.
2. Interpret the fundamentals of logic devices and to design logic gates using
Course
nanotechnology.
Outcome
3. Describe the working principle of Silicon MOSFET devices and Quantum transport
tunneling devices.
4. Examine the fundamentals and working of molecular devices.
5. Illustrate the nanolithography process.
Prerequisites: - Engineering Physics, Engineering Materials, Analog Electronics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 1
CO-2 2 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2
CO-3 3 2 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-4 3 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 1 2
CO-5 2 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY (9L)

152
Background to nanotechnology: Types of nanotechnology and Nano machines – periodic
table –atomic structure – molecules and phases – energy – molecular and atomic size –
surface and dimensional space – top down and bottom up approach; Molecular
CO-1
Nanotechnology: microscope –atom manipulation – Nano dots. Nanomaterial’s preparation
BTL-2
process, applications of nanomaterial’s and Nano Machines
Practical component:
Suggested Readings: History of the atom, Bohr Model
MODULE 2: FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOELECTRONICS (9L)
Fundamentals of logic devices: dynamic properties – threshold gates; classifications – two
terminal devices – field effect devices – Design of logic gates using nano devices – coulomb
blockade devices – spintronics – quantum cellular automata – quantum computing – DNA
computer; performance of information processing systems: basic binary operations, CO-2
measure of performance processing capability of biological neurons – performance BTL-2
estimation for the human brain, ultimate computation.
Practical component:
Suggested Readings: Design of digital circuits using QCA
MODULE 3: SILICON MOSFETs, QUANTUM TRANSPORT DEVICES & CARBON NANOTUBES (9L)
Silicon MOSFETS: scaling rules – silicon-dioxide based gate dielectrics – metal gates –
junctions & Contacts. Quantum Transport Devices (QTD) : Electron tunnelling – resonant
tunnelling diodes & devices; Single electron devices for logic applications; Carbon Nanotube:
Fullerenes - types of nanotubes – formation of nanotubes-electronic properties – synthesis CO-3
of carbon nanotubes – carbon nanotube interconnects – carbon nanotube FETs –Nanotube BTL-3
for memory applications – prospects of an all carbon nanotube in Nano electronics.
Practical component:
Suggested Readings: Advanced MOSFET Concepts
MODULE 4: MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS (9L)
Electrodes & contacts: functions – molecular electronic devices –fabrication; Random
Access Memory – mass storage devices. Single Molecule Magnet (SMM)-Conductive
Polymer-Molecular Conductance-Molecular logic Gate- Molecular Wires-Molecular CO-4
Assembler-Molecular Machine. BTL-2
Practical component:
Suggested Readings: Monomolecular Digital Logic Structures
MODULE 5: NANO ENGINEERING DEVICES & NANO LITHOGRAPHY (9L)
Lab-On-a-Chip-Micro machinery-Nano Motor-Nano Pore-Nano Sensor-Quantum Point-
Synthetic Molecular Motors-medical Applications of Nano Materials. Dip pen
nanolithography-Electron Beam Lithography-Ion Beam Sculpting-Nano Imprint Lithography- CO-5
Photo Lithography BTL-2
Practical component:
Suggested Readings: Alternate Nanolithography Techniques
TEXT BOOKS

153
 Rainer, Weiser (2012). Nanoelectronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic
1.
Materials and Novel Devices, 3rd Edition.
Hanson, George W. “Fundamentals of nanoelectronics” , Pearson Education, 2008.
2.

REFERENCE BOOKS
Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons and Burkhard
1 Raguse, “Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies” , Chapman & Hall /
CRC, 2002
Phani Kumar, “Principles of Nano Technology:-Materials, Tools and Process at Nano Scale”
2
SCITECH Publications,2017
E BOOKS
https://download.e-bookshelf.de/download/0009/7901/42/L-G-0009790142-
1.
0019135941.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/fundamentals-nanoelectronics-basic-purduex-nano520x
2 https://www.edx.org/course/fundamentals-nanoelectronics-part-b-purduex-nano521x

COURSE TITLE ROBOTICS AND CONTROL CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4269 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The purpose of this course is to introduce the basics of modeling, design, planning, and
control of robot systems. In essence, the material treated in this course is a brief survey
of relevant results from geometry, kinematics, statics, dynamics, and control.
Course
This course provides an overview of robot mechanisms, dynamics, and intelligent
Description
controls. Topics include planar and spatial kinematics, and motion planning; mechanism
design for manipulators and mobile robots, multi-rigid- body dynamics, control design,
actuators, and sensors.

154
 1. To introduce the functional elements of Robotics
2. To impart knowledge on the direct and inverse kinematics
Course 3. To introduce the manipulator differential motion and control
Objective 4. To educate on various path planning techniques
5. To introduce the sensors and actuators used in robotics applications.
6. To impart knowledge on various applications of robotics
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Recall the history, concept development and explain the key components of
robotics technologies with necessary sketches.
Course 2. Formulate basic mathematic manipulations of spatial coordinate representation
Outcome and transformation.
3. Inspect the basic robot forward and inverse kinematics problems
4. Examine and solve basic robotic dynamics, path planning and control problems.
5. Interpret and examine the robotics applications based on the above skills
Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics & Applied Mathematics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO-2 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-4 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-5 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9L)
Automation and Robotics, CAD/CAM and Robotics – An over view of Robotics – present and
future applications – classification by coordinate system and control system. Components
of the Industrial Robotics: Function line diagram representation of robot arms, common CO-1
types of arms. Components, Architecture, number of degrees of freedom – Requirements BTL-2
and challenges of end effectors, determination of the end effectors, comparison of Electric,
Hydraulic and Pneumatic types of locomotion devices.
MODULE 2 – MOTION ANALYSIS I (9L)

Homogeneous transformations as applicable to rotation and translation – problems

CO-2
Manipulator Kinematics Specifications of matrices, D-H notation joint coordinates and world
BTL-4
coordinates Forward and inverse kinematics – problems.

MODULE 3 – MOTION ANALYSIS II (9L)

155
Differential transformation and manipulators, Jacobians problems. Dynamics: Lagrange –
Euler and Newton – Euler formations – Problems. Trajectory planning and avoidance of CO-3
obstacles, path planning, Skew motion, joint integrated motion – straight line motion – BTL-4
Robot programming, languages and software packages
MODULE 4 – ROBOT ACTUATORS AND FEEDBACK COMPONENTS (9L)
Actuators: Pneumatic, Hydraulic actuators, electric & stepper motors. Feedback CO-4
components: position sensors – potentiometers, resolvers, encoders – Velocity Sensors. BTL-3

MODULE 5 – ROBOT APPLICATION IN MANUFACTURING (9L)

Material Transfer - Material handling, loading and unloading- Processing - spot and CO-5
continuous arc welding & spray painting - Assembly and Inspection. BTL-3
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1 Groover M P “Industrial Robotics.” Pearson Edu., 2008
2 Mittal R K & Nagrath I J “Robotics and Control” TMH. 2003.
3 Fu K S “Robotics” McGraw Hill., 1987.
4 P. Coiffet and M. Chaeronea “An Introduction to Robot Technology”, Kogam Page Ltd. 1983 London.
5 Richard D. Klafter, “Robotic Engineering.” Prentice Hall, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 John J Craig “Introduction to Robotics” Pearson Edu., 2004.
Mark W. Spong and M. Vidyasagar “Robot Dynamics & Control.” John Wiley & Sons (ASIA) Pte Ltd.,
2
2002.
E BOOKS
1 https://crimsonbay.weebly.com/blog/robotics-and-control-by-rk-mittal-pdf
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107289/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc18/SEM2/noc18-me61/

COURSE TITLE PROGRAMMING WITH LABVIEW CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4270 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

156
 This module enables the students to develop models for data acquisition systems.
Course
Moreover, it helps to understand how to use LABVIEW for signal processing and real time
Description
applications
1. To familiarize the basics of VI concepts
2. To develop GUI for measurements
Course
3. To explore the parameters of data acquisition system
Objective
4. To develop model for signal processing concepts
5. To develop model for real time applications
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Appreciate Virtual Instrumentation Concepts
Course 2. Build graphical programming for measurements
Outcome 3. Select data acquisition systems and parameters
4. Apply LabVIEW programming in signal processing
5. Interpret the concepts of programming to real time applications
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 1 2
CO-3 3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 1 3
CO-4 3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-5 3 3 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 : INTRODUCTION (9L)
History of instrumentation, Comparison of traditional instrumentation with virtual
instrumentation, Architecture of virtual instrumentation, Hardware and software in virtual
CO-1
instrumentation.
BTL-3
Lab:
Virtual instrumentation demonstration.
MODULE 2 : BASIC FUNCTIONS (9L)
LabVIEW – Controls and Indicators, ‘G’ programming, Data types, Graphical Programming
palettes and tools, Function and Libraries, FOR Loops, WHILE loops, Shift Registers, CASE
CO-2
structure, Formula nodes, Arrays and Clusters, Graphs and charts, File I/O.
BTL-3
Lab:
Graphical programming using LabVIEW
MODULE 3 : DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS (9L)

157
 Basics of DAQ Hardware and Software, Concepts of Data Acquisition, Installing Hardware,
Installing drivers, Hardware - Configuring &addressing, Digital and Analog I/O function,
CO-3
Buffered I/O, Real time Data Acquisition.
BTL-3
Lab:
Data Acquisition demonstration.
MODULE 4: SIGNAL PROCESSING (9L)
Signal generation – Normalised frequency, Wave & pattern VI’s. Signal Processing – DFT, FFT,
Frequency Spacing, Power Spectrum. Measurement - The Measurement VI’s, Calculating the
CO-4
frequency spectrum of the signal.
BTL-3
Lab:
Signal analysis of an analog sensor input using DAQ.
MODULE 5: ADVANCED CONCEPTS & APPLICATIONS (9L)
LabVIEW communication terminologies, Automotive applications, Industrial applications.
CO-5
Lab:
BTL-3
Case studies using real time implementation in industries.
TEXT BOOKS
Jovitha Jerome, (2010), “Virtual Instruments using LabVIEW”, PHI Learning Private Ltd,
1.
pp.1-416.
Garry M. Johnson,(2006), “LabVIEW Graphical Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill, First
2.
Edition, pp. 1-752
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Lisa.K.Wills, (1996), “LabVIEW for Everyone, Prentice Hall of India.
2. Barry Paton, (2000), “Sensor, Transducers and Lab VIEW”, Prentice Hall of India.
3. LabVIEW Basics I and II Manual, National Instruments, 2003.
MOOC
1. https://www.udemy.com/share/101tBq/
2. https://www.udemy.com/share/101CtU/
COURSE
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING C++ CREDITS 3
TITLE
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4271 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

158
 Object-oriented programming languages are playing an increasingly important role in
computing science and its applications. With the declining hardware costs, the cost of
computing systems is now being largely dominated by software. Among the tools that allow
Course a programmer to express ideas are, of course, the programming languages. One such
Description programming language used popularly these days is the C++ language. The basic concepts
are programming paradigms, the need for OOP technology, extending C, C++ at a glance,
fundamental constructs of the C++ language, classes and objects, inheritance,
polymorphism, generic programming. This course introduces these concepts in detail.
The objectives of this course are
1. Understand C++ programming and its applications.
Course 2. Learn Object-Oriented programming concepts using classes and objects.
Objective 3. Study friend functions, constructors, and overloading mechanisms.
4. Understand about re-usable code using Inheritance and Runtime Polymorphism.
5. Learn about exception handling, streaming and file handling mechanisms.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Write basic C++ programs to solve the given problem.
2. Identify and implement the simple Object-Oriented programming concepts using
Course classes and Objects.
Outcome 3. Develop applications using friend functions, constructors, and overloading
mechanisms.
4. Build re-usable code using Inheritance and Runtime Polymorphism.
5. Implement exception handling, streaming and file handling mechanisms
Prerequisites: C Programming Language.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO-2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO-3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO-4 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO-5 2 - - 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: BEGINNING WITH C++ AND ITS FEATURES (7L+2T)
Introduction to C++ and its features. What is C++? Applications and structure of C++
programming language, Variables, Different Data types, expressions, Operators, operator
CO-1
overloading and control structures in C++.
BTL-2
Suggested reading
Control flow, break and switch statements.

159
 MODULE 2: FUNCTIONS, CLASSES AND OBJECTS (7L+2T)
Abstraction mechanism: Classes, private, public, constructors, destructors, member data,
member functions, inline function, friend functions, static members, and references. CO-2
Suggested reading BTL-3
Object initialization and clean up
MODULE 3: INHERITANCE (7L+2T)
Inheritance: Class hierarchy, derived classes, single inheritance, multiple, multilevel,
hybrid inheritance, role of virtual base class, constructor and destructor execution, base
CO-3
initialization using derived class constructors.
BTL-3
Suggested reading
Virtual functions.
MODULE 4: POLYMORPHISM (7L+2T)
Polymorphism: Binding, Static binding, Dynamic binding, Static polymorphism: Function
Overloading, Ambiguity in function overloading, Dynamic polymorphism: Base class pointer,
object slicing, late binding, method overriding with virtual functions, pure virtual functions, CO-4
abstract classes. BTL-3
Suggested reading
Runtime polymorphism and virtual functions
MODULE 5: FILES AND EXCEPTION HANDLING (7L+2T)
Introduction, basic concepts, and principles of Streams and Working with files. C++ streams
and classes formatted and un-formatted Input Output operations, Output with
manipulators, Classes for file stream operations, file operations such as opening and closing CO-5
a file, End of File. BTL-3
Suggested reading
Ten Rules for Handling Exceptions Successfully
TEXT BOOKS
1. K.R.Venugopal, RajkumarBuyya , (2017) “Mastering C++”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill
Education, pp.1-720
2. Herbert Schildt, (2017) “C++: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
pp. 1-832
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bjarne Stroustrup, (2013) , “The C++ Programming Language”, 4th Edition, Addison-Wesley
Professional, pp.1-969
2. Nell Dale, Chips Weems, (2009), “Programming and Problem Solving with C++”, Jones and
Bartlett Learning, 5th Edition, pp. 1- 432
3. Nicolai M. Josuttis, (2012) “The C++ Standard Library: A Tutorial and Reference”, 2nd Edition,
Addison Wesley, pp.1-910
E BOOKS
1. http://fac.ksu.edu.sa/sites/default/files/ObjectOrientedProgramminginC4thEdition.pdf
MOOC

160
 1. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-c-microsoft-dev210x-5

2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/c-plus-plus-a#syllabus

DIGITAL DESIGN USING BASYS3 AND NEXSYS4 DDR

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
FPGA BOARD

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4272 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course enables the student to get familiarize with architecture, key features and
benefits of Basys-3, Nexsys-4 DDR, Genesys-2 and Kintex-7 FPGA boards. The students
Course
can design and implement the circuits ranging from basic combinational, sequential and
Description
complex digital circuits. The concept of FSM techniques to design sequential circuit is
also introduced in this course.
1. To provide overview and programming of Basys-3 FPGA board
2. To familiarize the architecture and programming of Nexsys-4 DDR FPGA board
Course 3. To provide overview and programming of Genesys-2 Kintex-7 FPGA board
Objective 4. To develop skills to design and implement sequential circuit using Basys-3 and
Nexsys-4 DDR board
5. To analyze the FSM techniques for designing sequential circuits
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Design and implement combinational circuit using Basys-3 board.
Course 2. Develop and implement combinational circuit using Nexsys-2 DDR board.
Outcome 3. Design and implement combinational circuit using Genesys-2 Kintex-7 board.
4. Design and implement sequential circuit using Genesys-2 Kintex-7 board.
5. Examine sequential circuit using ASM technique
Prerequisites: ECB4116 – Digital System Design
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 2 1 3 2 - - - 1 - - 2 1 2
CO-2 1 2 1 3 2 - - - 1 - - 2 1 2

161
CO-3 1 2 1 3 2 - - - 1 - - 2 1 2
CO-4 1 2 1 3 2 - - - 1 - - 2 1 2
CO-5 1 2 1 3 2 - - - 1 - - 2 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: Basys-3 FPGA Board (9L)
Architecture and features of Basys board, Basys board components and pin routing,
Configuration files, Vivado 2015.2 design flow, Synthesis and Basys3 Programming, Synthesis
and implementation of combinational.
CO-1
Practical component:
BTL-4
Testing of Basys-3 board, Implementation of basic Combinational circuits
Suggested Readings:
Basys 3 reference manual
MODULE 2: Nexsys-4 DDR board (9L)
Architecture and features of Nexsys-4 DDR board, Nexsys board components and pin routing,
Configuration files, Nexsys-4 Programming, Synthesis and implementation of combinational
logic. CO
Practical component: -2
Testing of Nexsys-4 DDR board, Implementation of basic Combinational circuits BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Nexsys-4 DDR board reference manual
MODULE 3: Genesys-2 Kintex-7 FPGA Development Board (9L)
Architecture and features of Genesys-2 Kintex board, Kintex board components and pin
routing, Configuration files, Nexsys-4 Programming, Synthesis and implementation of
combinational logic.
CO-3
Practical component:
BTL-4
Testing of Genesys-2 board, Implementation of basic Combinational circuits
Suggested Readings:
Genesys-2 board reference manual
MODULE 4: Sequential Logic design using Basys-3 and Nexsys-4 Board (9L)
Modeling latches and flip flops, Modeling registers and counters, Behavioral modeling and
timing constraints, Architectural wizard and IP catalog, Counters, timers and Real time clock.
Practical component: CO-4
Implementation of basic sequential circuits using Basys-3 and Nexsys-4 DDR board BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Digital System Design With FPGA: Implementation Using Verilog And VHDL
MODULE 5: Sequential System design using ASM charts (9L)
Finite state machines, sequential system design using ASM charts, case study using ASM.
CO-5
Practical component:
BTL-4
Design and Simulation of 4-bit up/down counter using Vivado 2015.3

162
 Suggested Readings:
Mealy and Moore Machine
TEXT BOOKS
1. Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL, Michael D. Ciletti, Prentice Hall India, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Verilog Digital System Design, Z. Navabi,McGraw Hill Education 2nd Ed. 2008
Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis,S. Palnitkar,"Prentice Hall NJ,
2
USA),1996
E BOOKS
https://www.xilinx.com/support/university/vivado/vivado-teaching-material/hdl-
1.
design.html
2. https://reference.digilentinc.com/_media/basys3:basys3_rm.pdf
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105165/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106092/

SEMESTER V

COURSE TITLE VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY CREDITS 3

COURSE
ECC4351 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE
24th
ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05. LEVEL
2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Surpri
First
Second Periodical Seminar/ Assignments/ se
Periodical Attendance ESE
Assessment Project Test /
Assessment
Quiz
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course makes the students know the concepts and framework of virtual reality. The
Course course will cover VR and AR hardware and different modeling techniques. This course
Description provides students with an opportunity to explore the applications and issues in Virtual
Reality and Augmented Reality (VR &AR).

163
 1. To learn the basics of VR and its components
2. To explore the various input output devices available with its advantages and limitations
Course 3. To study about the different modelling techniques available for VR design
Objective 4. To learn about human factors research in VR
5. To explore other similar technologies like Augmented reality and Mixed reality with its
applications.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe the basics of VR and the components that are the building blocks of VR system
2. Demonstrate the operating principles of various input output devices and summarize its
advantages and limitations
Course 3. Explore different modelling techniques available for VR design with their limitations and
Outcome advantage
4. Examine the different areas of human factors research in VR and to evaluate the
benefits and drawbacks of specific VR techniques on the human body
5. Classify the characteristics and components of other similar technologies like
Augmented reality and Mixed reality in the area of market potential and applications
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO-2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO-3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO-4 3 3 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - -
CO-5 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (9L)
The three I’s of virtual reality, commercial VR technology and the five classic components
of a VR system CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Evolution of Virtual Reality
MODULE 2: Input Devices and Output Devices (9L)
Trackers, Navigation, and Gesture Interfaces: Three-dimensional position trackers,
navigation and manipulation, interfaces and gesture interfaces, Output Devices: Graphics
CO-2
displays, sound displays & haptic
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Advances in Tracking devices and Display devices
MODULE 3: Modeling (9L)

164
Geometric modeling, kinematics modeling, physical modeling, behavior modeling, model
management CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Best practices in Modeling
MODULE 4: Human Factors (9L)
Methodology and terminology, user performance studies, VR health and safety issues,
Applications: Medical applications, military applications, robotics applications. CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
VR effect in human – Case study
MODULE 5: Introduction to Mixed and Augmented Reality (9L)
Key concepts and techniques at work in Mixed and Augmented Reality. business aspects
of augmented reality: AR market, the potential applications and the value
CO-5
chain. characteristics of AR systems, components of an AR architecture.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Latest applications in AR and MR
TEXT BOOKS
Virtual Reality Technology, Second Edition, Gregory C. Burdea & Philippe Coiffet, John Wiley &
1.
Sons, Inc., 2003.
2. Virtual Reality Systems, John Vince, Pearson Education, 1995
Understanding Virtual Reality, interface, Application and Design, William R.Sherman, Alan
3.
Craig, Elsevier (Morgan Kaufmann), 2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. 3D Modeling and surfacing, Bill Fleming, Elsevier (Morgan Kauffman), 1999
2. 3D Game Engine Design, David H.Eberly, Elsevier, 2006.
3. Killer Game Programming in Java, Andrew Davison, Oreilly-SPD, 2005
E BOOKS
1. https://www.queppelin.com/ebooks
2. https://www.springer.com/gp/book/9789400769090
3. http://vr.cs.uiuc.edu/vrbook.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/introduction-virtual-reality

2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/360-vr-video-production

3. https://www.coursera.org/learn/ar

COURSE TITLE EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4352 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY

165
 24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The main objective of this course is to provide an understanding of the technology
essential to the design and implementation of an embedded system using suitable
hardware and software tools for automotive application. The auto industry needs
Course electrical, Electronics and computer engineers in ever-increasing numbers to deal with
Description the number of electronics in the modern car. These engineers deal with electronics,
controls, safety systems, infotainment systems, and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
This course endeavors a variety of topics of instant connection to industry and makes
the members precisely proper for Automotive Industry.
1. To introduce the potential of automotive systems in industries
2. To understand Automotive Sensory Systems
Course 3. To explain the importance of Automotive control in system design
Objective 4. To make student aware of different Automotive protocols for internal
communication
5. To introduce the state-of-art technologies and systems available with the Industry
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain about the trends in automobiles, electromagnetic principle, security and
warning systems.
2. Discuss the fundamentals of various mechanical systems along with Sensors,
Course
Controller and Actuators.
Outcome
3. Appreciate Electronic ignition systems principles, types and operation.
4. Elaborate recent advances in embedded automotive systems and multiprocessor
communication.
5. Explain the real time development of embedded automotive systems
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 2 -
CO-2 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO-3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 1
CO-4 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 -

166
CO-5 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMOBILES (9L)
Current trends in Automobiles, open loop and closed loop systems - components for
electronic engine management system. Electromagnetic interference suppression. CO-1
Electromagnetic Compatibility, Electronic dashboard instruments- predictive maintenance, BTL-2
onboard diagnostic system, security and warming system.
MODULE 2: ELECTRO CHASSIS SYSTEMS (9L)
Electronic management of chassis systems; Vehicle motion control, Sensors and actuators
and their interfacing. Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors such as- oxygen sensors,
CO-2
crank angle position sensors- Fuel metering/ vehicle speed sensors and destination sensors,
BTL-3
Flow sensor, exhaust temperature, air mass flow sensors, throttle position sensor, MEMS –
Gyroscope Sensor, solenoids, stepper motors and relays.
MODULE 3: ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEMS (9L)
Electronic ignition systems; Types of solid state ignition systems and their principle of
operation; Digital engine control system, Open loop and closed loop control system, Engine
CO-3
Cranking and warm up control, Acceleration enrichment, Deceleration learning and ideal
BTL-3
speed Control, Distributor less ignition – Integrated engine control system, Exhaust
emission control Engineering
MODULE 4: EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS (9L)
Atmel Family (Raspberry –pi ) Microcontroller, Recent advances- GLS, GPS, IoT and GSM; CO-4
Multiprocessor communication using CAN bus,I2C. BTL-3
MODULE 5: REAL TIME STUDY OF AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS (9L)
Case study- Adaptive cruise control of car, Embedded Airbag System, Embedded Based
CO-5
Automatic Parking System, Embedded Rain-Sensing System, Artificial Intelligence and
BTL-2
engine management.
TEXT BOOKS
William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th Edition, Butterworth Hennimann
1
Woburn, 1998.
2 Young A.P. & Griffiths, “Automotive Electrical Equipment”, ELBS & New Press-1999.
Tom Weather Jr. & Cland c. Ilunter, “Automotive computers and control system” Prentice Hall Inc.,
3
New Jersey.
4 Neil kolban” Kolban’s book on Raspberry –pi “1st edition Aug 2016
5 Crouse W.H., “Automobile Electrical Equipment”, Mc Graw Hill Co. Inc., New York, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Bechhold, “Understanding Automotive Electronic”, SAE, 1998.
2 Robert Bosch,” Automotive Hand Book”, SAE (5th Edition), 2000.
Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TATA McGraw-Hill, Second
3
Edition-2009.

167
E BOOKS
1 https://www.edgefx.in/importance-of-embedded-systems-in-automobiles-with-applications/
2 energietest.deatleetfabriek.nl/micro_electromechanical_system_mems_sensor.pdf
3 engineersevanigam.blogspot.com/.../embedded-systems-by-raj-kamal-ebook-pdf.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112108092/module5/lec39.pdf
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6CLANV6M2CM
3 nptel.ac.in/courses/117105082/
4 nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/3

COURSE TITLE ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS CREDITS 3

COURSE COURSE
ECC4353 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Course To have the familiarization and to write applications in higher level Embedded
Description Processor ARM Cortex M3
1. To be Familiar with CISC, RISC and ARM Design Philosophy
2. To Understand architecture of ARM cortex M3 processor
3. To Understand instruction set of ARM processor
Course
4. To Write C programs for ARM microprocessor and Interface input/output devices like
Objective
UART,I2C and LCD
5. To Understand Advanced Microprocessor Bus Architecture, Exception handling and
optimization techniques
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain CISC, RISC and ARM Design Philosophy
2. Describe the architecture of ARM cortex M3 processor
Course 3. Apply the instruction set of ARM processor
Outcome 4. Write C programs for ARM microprocessor and Interface input/output devices like
UART,I2C and LCD
5. Explain Advanced Microprocessor Bus Architecture, Exception handling and
optimization techniques
Prerequisites: NIL

168
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 - 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 - 3 1
CO-3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 - 3 1
CO-4 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 - 3 1
CO-5 - - 3 - - - - - 2 - 2 - 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: RISC PHILOSOPHY (9L)
Advanced microprocessors‐CISC‐ RISC‐ Design philosophy‐ ARM processor‐ History‐ Design
CO-1
Philosophy
BTL-2
Suggested Reading:-CISC, RISC and ARM Design Philosophy
MODULE 2: ARM ARCHITECTURE (9L)
Acorn RISC Machine‐ Core data flow model‐ARM cortex M3 Architecture‐ programmer’s
model: General Purpose Registers –Link Registers-Special Registers-Operation Mode –
CO-2
Memory Map-Development tools
BTL-2
Suggested Reading:- ARM cortex M3 Architecture, programmer’s model and development
tools
MODULE 3: ARM INSTRUCTION SET (9L)
Data Processing Instructions-Arithmetic and Logical Instructions-Shift Instructions –Flow
Control Instructions –Branch Instructions-Data Transfer Instructions – Load and Store
CO-3
Instructions – Software Interrupt Instructions – Program Status Register Instructions –
BTL-3
Conditional execution- Stack Instructions- Thumb Instruction set – Advantages
Suggested Reading:- ARM Instruction Set, Thumb instruction set
MODULE 4: C PROGRAMMING (9L)
C compiler‐data types‐functions‐pointers‐looping structures‐register allocations‐portability
CO-4
issues - programming‐ARM interfacing‐UART‐ I2C‐LCD
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: - C compiler, Programming and interfacing
MODULE 5: BUS ARCHITECTURE (9L)
Advanced microprocessor bus architecture (AMBA)‐bus system‐user peripherals‐exception
handling‐ optimization techniques CO-5
BTL-3
Suggested Reading: - Bus Architecture, exception handling and optimization techniques
TEXT BOOKS

169
 Arm System Developer’s Guide, Designing and Optimizing Software, Andrew N. Sloss,
1.
Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, Elsevier, First edition, March, 2004.
Arm System‐on‐chip Architecture, 2nd Edition, Steve Furber, Pearson publication, March,
2
2000
Arm Assembly Language, Fundamentals and Techniques, 2nd edition, William Hohl,
3
Christopher Hinds, CRC Press, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
ARM Assembly Language Programming & Architecture by Muhammad
1.
Ali Mazidi,2nd Edition, August, 2013.
2. Embedded Systems: An integrated approach by. Lyla Das, Pearson publication, 2013.
3. The Definitive Guide to the ARM® Cortex‐M3 by Joseph Yiu,Elsevier, Second Edition, 2010.
E BOOKS
1. https://developer.arm.com/support/arm‐books
2. https://developer.mbed.org
http://www.freescale.com/tools/software‐and‐tools/hardware‐development‐
3.
tools/freedom‐development‐boards:FREDEVPLA
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117106111/
https://www.udemy.com/course/embedded-system-programming-on-arm-cortex-
2.
m3m4

COURSE TITLE PATTERN RECOGNITION CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4354 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Pattern Recognition is an established but exciting and fast emerging field, which
supports advances in similar fields such as computer vision, image processing, text and
Course
document analysis and neural networks. It is a very active research area and finds
Description
applications in fast developing areas such as biometrics, bioinformatics, multimedia
data analysis and most recently data science. This module is important because it is a

170
 need that appears in many practical problems. It forms the basis of learning and action
for all living things in nature. It is used to extract meaningful information, associate it
with the objects or concepts and use the concepts for responses leading to positive
results.
1. To understand the concepts of pattern recognition
2. To know the fundamentals of statistical pattern recognition
Course
3. To comprehend the graphical approaches in pattern recognition
Objective
4. To explain the neural network based pattern recognition
5. To elaborate various applications based on pattern recognition algorithms
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline the concepts and approaches of pattern recognition System.
Course 2. Illustrate the techniques and learning methods in Statistical Pattern recognition
Outcome 3. Summarize the parsing and graphical approaches in Syntactic pattern recognition
4. Identify the various methods in neural network based pattern recognition
5. Apply pattern recognition algorithms in various applications and case studies
Prerequisites: Basic Mathematics - Probability
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO-2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO-3 3 2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 - 2
CO-4 3 2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 2
CO-5 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 - - - 2 2 - 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – PATTERN RECOGNITION OVERVIEW AND BAYESIAN DECISION THEORY (9L)
Pattern recognition, Classification and Description- Patterns and feature Extraction-Training
and Learning in PR systems – Bayesian decision theory – continuous and discrete features –
minimum error rate – classifiers, discriminant functions for normal densities – Error
CO-1
probability – Error bounds – Bayesian belief networks - Pattern recognition approaches -
BTL-2
Statistical, Syntactic, Neural pattern recognition – other approaches to PR
Suggested Readings:
Normal distribution, calculation of mean and variance
MODULE 2: STATISTICAL PATTERN RECOGNITION (9L)

171
Introduction to statistical Pattern Recognition - supervised Learning using Parametric and
Non Parametric Approaches. Linear Discriminant Functions Introduction—Discrete and
CO-2
binary Classification problems—Techniques to directly Obtain Linear Classifiers
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Parametric and Nonparametric approaches
MODULE 3: SYNTACTIC PATTERN RECOGNITION (9L)
Overview of Syntactic Pattern Recognition— Syntactic recognition via parsing and other
Grammars–Graphical Approaches to syntactic pattern recognition—learning via
CO-3
grammatical Inference.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Syntactic structures
MODULE 4: NEURAL PATTERN RECOGNITION (9L)
Introduction to Neural networks—Feedforward Networks and training by Back
Propagation—Content Addressable Memory Approaches and Unsupervised Learning in
CO-4
Neural PR.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Basics on Neural networks
MODULE 5: APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES (9L)
Web Applications – Audio and Video Analysis – Medical Applications – Image processing –
Financial Applications - Related case studies CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Machine Learning
TEXT BOOKS
Robert Schalkoff, “Pattern Recognition: statistical, structural and neural approaches”,
1.
JohnWiley &sons , Inc, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Chen C H, “Handbook of pattern recognition and computer vision”, 4 th edition world
1
scientific co, Pvt. Ltd., 2010
Christoper M Bishop, “Neural Network for pattern recognition”, Oxford university press,
2
2008
3 R.O. Duda, P.E. Hart & D.G Stork, “Pattern Classification 2 nd Edition”, J.Wiley Inc, 2001.
Geoff Dougherty, “Pattern Recognition and classification: An introduction”, Springer
4
2013
E BOOKS
1. https://1lib.in/book/604623/6edecd
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105101/

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105084/

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/108/117108048/

172
COURSE TITLE SYSTEM DESIGN USING RASPBERRY PI PROCESSOR CREDITS 3
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4355 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment Test / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course focus on project development skills including basic principles, the analysis
Course and development of codes for desired application. Learners will set up the Raspberry
Description Pi environment with Linux operating system running. Learners will develop and
execute some basic Python code on the Raspberry Pi hardware device
1. To install the appropriate OS for the hardware device
2. To connect the device with the display terminal and other external interfaces
Course
3. To be familiar in Linux based IDE environment
Objective
4. To develop the code for different applications using Python and C
5. To connect the electronic control circuits using GPIO pins
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Demonstrate different booting of Raspberry Pi processor with the required OS
2. Perform the configuration settings as specified along-with overclocking
Course
3. demonstrating skill
Outcome
4. Navigate and control of file resources inside the processor
5. Create a project using GPIO interfacing technique
6. Create a project to access the external internet for the said application
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 1 3 3 - - -- 2 2 - - 2 1
CO-2 3 3 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - 3 1
CO-3 3 3 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - 3 1
CO-4 3 3 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - 2 1
CO-5 3 2 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - - 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related

173
 MODULE 1 – RASPBERRY PI BOARD BOOT UP (9L)
Power supply unit- preparation of boot with SD-card- configuration of Raspberry Pi-
networking with host computer- Raspberry pi interface monitor in Linux terminal mode CO-1
Suggested reading: BTL-3
Different type of OS used in Raspberry Pi
MODULE 2 – CONFIGURATION (9L)
Raspberry Pi Processor - Raspberry Pi vs. Arduino - Operating System Benefits- Raspberry
Pi IoT- Raspberry Pi Setup - Raspberry Pi Configuration -Overclocking CO-2
Suggested reading: BTL-3
Development of over-clocking experiment
MODULE 3 – LINUX TERMINAL CODING (9L)
Linux Basics - Login - Linux Filesystem - Navigating the Filesystem - Text Editors-
Accessing Files - Permissions - Processes - Linux Graphic User Interface CO-3
Suggested reading: BTL-3
Text editors and their use in programming
MODULE 4 – I/O INTERFACES (9L)
General Purpose IO Pins - Protocol Pins -- GPIO Access - General Purpose IO Pins - Pulse
Width Modulation - Demo of a Blink - Graphic User Interface - Tkinter Library CO-4
Suggested reading: BTL-4
Other types of Library function required for Project development
MODULE 5 – CONEECTING PI THROUGH INTERNET (9L)
Installing server on Pi -Sending email through programming - Simple Camera Accessing
over internet CO-5
Suggested reading: BTL-4
Development of projects using Raspberry Pi
TEXT BOOKS
Derek Molloy (2016), “Exploring Raspberry Pi: Interfacing to the Real World with
1.
Embedded Linux,” Wiley publication,1st Edition, pp. 1-720
Eben Upton, Gareth Halfacree (2016) “Raspberry Pi User Guide”, 4th Edition, WILEY
2.
Publications, pp. 1-152
REFERENCE BOOKS
Steve ora,“Raspberry Pi 3: From Noob to Master; Simple Step By Step Guide to Setting
1. up Your Raspberry Pi 3 and Using It for a Wide Variety of Cool Projects, , WILEY
Publication, 2nd edition, pp. 1-271
Shawn Wallace, Matt Richardson, (2016) “Getting started with Raspberry Pi:
2
Introduction to Fastest-Selling Computer in the World , 3rd edition.
E BOOKS

174
 1. https://nostarch.com/RaspberryPiProject
https://projects-raspberry.com/learn-raspberry-pi-programming-with-python-pdf-e-
2.
book/
MOOC
The Raspberry Pi Platform and Python Programming for the Raspberry Pi from
1.
Coursera platform
2. Interfacing with the Raspberry Pi from Coursera platform

3. Getting Started with Your Raspberry Pi from Future Learn Platform

COURSE TITLE IMAGE SIGNAL PROCESSING USING MATLAB CREDITS 3

COURSE
ECC4356 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE
32nd ACM,
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
07.08.2021
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second
Seminar/ Surprise
Periodical Periodical Attendance ESE
Assignments/ Project Test / Quiz
Assessment Assessment
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of frequency domain analysis and synthesis.
Course
Be able to use basic techniques to process 1-dimensional signals. Be able to implement
Description
standard approaches to process 2-dimensional images.
This module describes the theory of signal processing and its applications;
Course
Multidimensional signal processing and digital image analysis and processing; Image
Objective
restoration and reconstruction.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Familiarize the fundamental concepts of digital Image and signal processing
Course 2. Evaluate the analysis of 2D and 3D signals and images
Outcome 3. Select the preprocessing techniques for digital Image and Signal Processing
4. Analyze the enhancement techniques for digital Image and Signal Processing
5. Develop small projects in Image and Signal Processing.
Prerequisites : NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 - 1 2 - - - - - - - - - 1

CO-2 - - - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - -

175
CO-3 1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 3

CO-4 - 1 - 2 - 3 3 - - - - - - 2
CO-5 - - 1 2 - - - - 2 3 - - - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – Transformation (9L)
Applications of image and signal processing. Notion of pixel, resolution, quantization, photon
noise. Geometric transformations, source-to-target and target-to-source mapping, planar CO-1
homography, rotational homography, change detection and mosaicing. BTL-2

MODULE 2 – 2D and 3D Formation (9L)

Pin-hole versus real aperture lens model, lens as a 2D LSI system, blur circle, Doubly block
circulant system matrix, pill box and Gaussian blur models, 3D Shape from Focus: Depth of CO-2
field, focal stack, focus operators, focus measure curve, Gaussian interpolation, 3D BTL-3
recovery, focused image recovery.
MODULE 3 – Image Signal Pre-processing (9L)
Theory of histogram equalization and modification, Image sequence and single image
filtering in Gaussian Noise, Non local means filtering, Impulse noise filtering, Transform CO-3
domain filtering, 1D Orthogonal transforms, 2D orthogonal transforms from 1D, 2D DFT, 2D BTL-4
DFT for image matching
MODULE 4 – Enhancement Techniques (9L)
Image denoising using transform domain techniques. Segmentation using thresholding CO-4
methods (peak-valley, Otsu), Segmentation by k-means clustering. BTL-4
MODULE 5 – Application and Case Studies (9L)
Bayesian methods for data analysis in signal and image processing, Audio analytics, Medical CO-5
Application, Related case studies BTL-5
TEXT BOOKS
1 Balmer, R. T., Keat, W. D., Wise, G., and Kosky, P., Exploring Engineering, Third Edition: An
Introduction to Engineering and Design - [Part 3 - Chapters 17 to 27], ISBN13: 978-0124158917
ISBN-10: 0124158919
2 Dym, C. L., Little, P. and Orwin, E. J., Engineering Design - A Project based introduction - Wiley,
ISBN-978-1-118-32458-5
REFERENCE BOOKS
Eastman, C. M. (Ed.), Design for X Concurrent engineering imperatives, 1996, XI, 489 p. ISBN 978-
1
94-011-3985-4 Springer
Haik, Y. And Shahin, M. T., Engineering Design Process, Cengage Learning, ISBN-13: 978-0-495-
2
66816-9
Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J. and Grote, K. H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
3
Approach, 3rd ed. 2007, XXI, 617p., ISBN 978-1-84628-319-2
4 Voland, G., Engineering by Design, ISBN 978-93-325-3505-3, Pearson India

176
 E BOOKS
1 https://www.kobo.com/us/en/ebook/engineering-design-3
2 https://www.electronicsforu.com/special/cool-stuff-misc/8-free-digital-signal-processing-
ebooks
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106168/

SEMESTER VI
COURSE TITLE MOBILE COMMUNICATION CREDITS 3
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4366 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This Course is to expose the students to the most recent technological developments in
Mobile communication systems. The Course considers the concepts of cellular system.
Course Following this, various propagation effects and propagation models used in mobile
Description communication are included in the course. This course deals with various methodologies
to improve the received signal quality in mobile communication. The Course provides
various multiple access techniques and Standards in Cellular mobile Communication.
1. To familiar with fundamentals of mobile communication systems
2. To choose system (TDMA/FDMA/CDMA) according to the complexity, installation cost,
Course speed of transmission, channel properties etc
Objective 3. To identify the requirements of mobile communication as compared to static
communication
4. To choose various receiver system and coders for mobile communication
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Examine the basics of mobile communication, cellular concept, Co-channel Interference
and frequency Reuse concept
Course
2. Analyze the Mobile radio propagation models and different types of fading
Outcome
3. Demonstrate various modulation Techniques and Multiple Access Schemes
4. Analyse Equalization Techniques and Receiver types
5. Design coder for mobile communication systems with key technologies

Prerequisites: Basic concepts of Analog and Digital Communication

177
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 - - 2 - 1 1 - - - - 2 3 1
CO-2 3 3 2 2 - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 1
CO-3 3 3 2 2 - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 1
CO-4 3 3 2 2 - 2 1 - - - - 2 2 2
CO-5 3 3 3 2 - 2 1 - - - - 2 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 –Introduction to mobile communication and cellular concept (9L)
Overview to wireless communication: Evolution & Generation of mobile communication.
Existing mobile communication technology and current Status. Cellular Concept: Frequency
reuse, channel assignment, hand off, Interference and system Capacity, tracking and grade CO-1
of service, Improving Coverage and capacity in Cellular systems BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Computational efficiency and cost requirement of circuits using various codes.
MODULE 2 – Mobile Radio Propagation (9L)
Free space propagation model, reflection, diffraction, scattering, link budget design,
Outdoor Propagation models, Indoor propagation models, Small scale Multipath
propagation, Impulse Model, Small scale Multipath measurements, parameters of Mobile
CO-2
multipath channels, types of Small-scale fading, statistical models for multipath fading
BTL-3
channels.
Suggested Readings:
Advanced arithmetic (data manipulation) circuit to reduce delay and cost
MODULE 3 – Modulation Techniques and Multiple Access schemes (9L)
Modulation schemes: MSK, GMSK, M-ary QAM, M-ary FSK, multi carrier modulation, OFDM,
Performance of Digital Modulation in Slow-Flat Fading Channels and Frequency Selective
CO-3
Mobile Channels. Multiple Access Schemes: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA and SDMA
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Asynchronous digital circuit design methods and its challenges
MODULE 4 –Equalization and Receiver structure (9L)
Survey of equalization Techniques, Linear Equalization, Non-linear Equalization, Algorithms
for Adaptive quantization, Diversity Receiver, RAKE receiver CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-5
Advanced materials and their characteristics used for memory construction
MODULE 5 –Coding Techniques and System Examples (9L)

178
coding: Vocoders, Linear Predictive Coders, Selection of Speech Coders for Mobile
Communication, GSM Codec, RS codes for CDPD, System examples- GSM, EDGE, GPRS, IS95,
CO-5
CDMA 2000 and WCDMA.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
VHDL tools like Xilinx
TEXT BOOKS
1. T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Second Edition, Pearson
Education/ Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition 2013
2. Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Person Education – 2003, 2nd Edn
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. R. Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology”, Thomson Delmar, 2003.
2. W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, Second Edition,
McGraw-Hill International, 1998.
3. Stephen G. Wilson, “Digital Modulation and Coding”, Pearson Education, 1995
E BOOKS
1 www.freebookcentre.net/mobile.../Lecture-Notes-on-Mobile-Communication. html
2 http://ggn.dronacharya.info/ECEDept/Downloads/QuestionBank/VIIsem/NPTEL_LINKS_
MOBILE_COMM.pdf
MOOC
1 nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/38

2 https://www.udemy.com/course/5g-4g-lte-3g-2g-cellular-mobile-communications-
wireless

COURSE TITLE INFORMATION CODING TECHNIQUES CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4367 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Information produced in many ways every day such as text, image, video etc. If
Course directly stored as it received makes the security in question mark also it occupies more
Description storage area. This course discusses about the various forms of information and its
storage methods.

179
 1. To learn basics of information and entropy concepts
Course 2. To understand the source coding theorems.
Objective 3. To understand the channel coding theorems
4. To learn the error analysis in the coding concepts and decoding concepts

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. Differentiate the information transfer channel characteristic for as per the
standards.
Course
2. Analyze various channel capacity measurement system
Outcome
3. Identify the appropriate channel coding scheme as per the application
4. Discriminate the error from the Data at the receiver end using the liner block codes
5. Apply the convolutional decoding algorithms in communication domain.
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO-2 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO-3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO-4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO-5 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INFORMATION THEORY (9L)
Introduction, Measure of information, Average information content of symbols in long
independent sequences, Average information content of symbols in long dependent
sequences. Mark-off statistical model for information source, Entropy and information rate
of mark-off source.
CO-1
Source Coding: Encoding of the source output, Shannon’s encoding algorithm. Shannon’s
BTL-2
Fano Coding, Communication Channels, Discrete communication channels, Continuous
channels.
Suggested Readings:
Communication systems, information, channels
MODULE 2 – FUNDAMENTAL LIMITS ON PERFORMANCE (9L)
Source coding theorem, Huffman coding, discrete memory less Channels, Mutual
information, Channel Capacity, Shannon’s Hartley law and its implications. CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Probability and random process, channel concepts
MODULE 3 – CHANNEL CODING (9L)

180
 Channel coding theorem, Differential entropy and mutual information for continuous
ensembles, Channel capacity Theorem,
Introduction to Error Control Coding: Introduction, Types of errors, examples, Types of codes
CO-3
Linear Block Codes: Matrix description, Error detection and correction, Standard arrays and
BTL-3
table look up for decoding.
Suggested Readings:
Ensembles, differential entropy, error
MODULE 4 – CYCLIC CODES (9L)
Algebraic structures of cyclic codes, Encoding using an (n-k) bit shift register, Syndrome
calculation. BCH codes. RS codes, Golay codes, shortened cyclic codes, Burst error correcting
CO-4
codes, Burst and Random Error correcting codes.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Binary codes, encoder, error correction and detection
MODULE 5 – CONVOLUTIONAL CODES (9L)
Concept and definitions, properties of convolutional codes, encoding of convolution codes,
Time domain approach. Transform domain approach, Viterbi algorithm, Trellis Diagram. CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Time domain and Transform domain, convolution
TEXT BOOKS
1. K. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and analog communication systems”, John Wiley, 1996
2 Simon Haykin, “Digital communication”, John Wiley, 2003.
3 Ranjan Bose, “ITC and Cryptography”, TMH, II Edition, 2007
4 Glover and Grant; “Digital Communications” Pearson Edition, 2nd Edition, 2008
Dr. P.S. Satyanarayana, “Concepts of Information theory and Coding”, Dynaram
5
Publication, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 S. Haykin, “Communication Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
Thomas M. Cover & Joy A. Thomas “Elements Of Information Theory”, 2nd Edition,Wiley
2
India Pvt Ltd ., 2006.
Richard. B. Wells, “Applied Coding and Information Theory for engineers’’ Pearson
3
education, 2nd edition, 2009.
4 G. A. Jones and J.M. Jones, “Information and coding theory” Springer, 2nd edition, 2002

COURSE TITLE WIRELESS ADHOC SENSOR NETWORKS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4368 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

181
 First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course provides an understanding of wireless adhoc and sensor networks and
Course enables the students to explore the wide range of applications of these networks. The
Description course also provides an insight to the major design considerations such as protocols and
resource constrains.
1. To study the network architectures and applications of ad hoc and wireless sensor
networks
2. To study the design issues of ad hoc and sensor networks
Course
3. To study the routing protocols for ad hoc and wireless sensor networks
Objective
4. To understand the architecture and Data aggregation strategies of MAC Layer
Protocols
5. To study the QoS related performance measurements of ad hoc and sensor networks
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Interpret the concepts, network architectures and applications of ad hoc and
wireless sensor networks
2. Analyze the protocol design issues of ad hoc and sensor networks
Course
3. Design routing protocols for ad hoc and wireless sensor networks with respect to
Outcome
some protocol design issues
4. Summarize the architecture and Data aggregation strategies of MAC Layer Protocols
5. Evaluate the QoS related performance measurements of ad hoc and sensor
networks
Prerequisites: Computer Networks
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 2 2 1
CO-2 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-4 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO-5 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9 L)

182
Fundamentals of Wireless Communication Technology – The Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radio propagation Mechanisms – Characteristics of the Wireless Channel -mobile ad
hoc networks (MANETs) and wireless sensor networks (WSNs): concepts and architectures. CO-1
Applications of Ad Hoc and Sensor networks. Design Challenges in Ad hoc and Sensor BTL-3
Networks.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Wireless communication
MODULE 2 – MAC PROTOCOLS FOR AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS (9L)
Issues in designing a MAC Protocol- Classification of MAC Protocols- Contention based
protocols- Contention based protocols with Reservation Mechanisms- Contention based CO-2
protocols with Scheduling Mechanisms – Multi channel MAC-IEEE 802.11 BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Wireless communication protocols
MODULE 3 –ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND TRANSPORT LAYER IN AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS
(9L)
Issues in designing a routing and Transport Layer protocol for Ad hoc networks- proactive
routing, reactive routing (on-demand), hybrid routing- Classification of Transport Layer CO-3
solutions-TCP over Ad hoc wireless Networks. BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Routing protocols
MODULE 4 –WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS AND MAC PROTOCOLS (9L)
Single node architecture: hardware and software components of a sensor node - WSN
Network architecture: typical network architectures-data relaying
CO-4
and aggregation strategies -MAC layer protocols: self-organizing, Hybrid TDMA/FDMA and
BTL-3
CSMA based MAC- IEEE 802.15.4.
Suggested Reading: Wireless sensor networks
MODULE 5 – WSN ROUTING, LOCALIZATION & QOS (9L)
Issues in WSN routing – OLSR- Localization – Indoor and Sensor Network Localization-
absolute and relative localization, triangulation-QOS in WSN-Energy Efficient Design- CO-5
Synchronization-Transport Layer issues. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: WSN routing
TEXT BOOKS
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy, and B. S. Manoj, "Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and
Protocols ", Prentice Hall Professional Technical Reference, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal “Ad Hoc & Sensor Networks: Theory
and Applications”, World Scientific Publishing Company, 2006.
2 Feng Zhao and LeonidesGuibas, "Wireless Sensor Networks", Elsevier Publication - 2002.
3 Holger Karl and Andreas Willig “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks”, Wiley, 2006.
4 Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, &TaiebZnati, “Wireless Sensor Networks-
Technology, Protocols, and Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.
5 Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.

183
COURSE TITLE DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEMS CREDITS 3
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4369 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This subject aims at introducing to the students the knowledge about the
Course telecommunication industry: its services and market, the theoretical basis about
Description performance (queuing theory) and operation (multiplexing, switching, routing, and
signaling) in telecom networks.
1. To introduce the concepts of SONET/SDH multiplexing.
2. To introduce the concepts of space switching, time switching and combination
switching.
Course
3. To introduce the need for network synchronization and study synchronization
Objective
issues.
4. To study the outline network control and management issues.
5. To introduce the concept of Traffic Engineering
Upon completion, students will be able to
1. Explain the working principle of switching systems involved in telecommunication
switching
Course
2. Analyze multi stage switching structures involving time and space switching stages
Outcome
3. Discuss the network synchronization and management
4. Analyze basic telecommunication traffic characteristics
5. Explain the concepts of wireless communications
Prerequisites: -
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

184
CO-1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO-2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO-3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO-4 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO-5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: DEVELOPMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEMS (9L)
Message switching, Circuit switching, Manual switching, and Electronic Switching. Digital
switching: Switching functions, space division switching, time division switching, two
CO-1
dimensional switching, digital cross connect systems, digital switching in an analog
BTL-2
environment, Next Generation Network-Standards, Concepts, Architecture and Protocol,
Residential or small business access technologies – Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
MODULE 2: SWITCHING NETWORKS (9L)
Single Stage Networks, Passive Optical Networks (PON), Cable MODEMS, Grading: Principle,
Design of progressive grading, other grading, Traffic capacity of grading, Applications of
CO-2
grading. Link Systems: General, Two stage networks, three stage networks, four stage
BTL-2
networks. Grades of service of link systems: General, Two stage networks, three stage
networks, four stage networks Call packing, SS.7,CDOT[Indigenous] /EWSD/5ESS switch
MODULE 3: NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT (9L)
Timing: Timing Recovery: Phase-Locked Loop, Clock Instability, Jitter Measurements,
CO-3
Systematic Jitter. Timing Inaccuracies: Slips, Asynchronous Multiplexing, Network
BTL-3
Synchronization, U.S. Network Synchronization, Network Control, Network Management.
MODULE 4: TRAFFIC ANALYSIS (9L)
Traffic Characterization: Arrival Distributions, Holding Time Distributions, Loss Systems,
CO-4
Network Blocking Probabilities: End-to-End Blocking Probabilities, Overflow Traffic, Delay
BTL-3
Systems: Exponential service Times, Constant Service Times, Finite Queues.
MODULE 5: CELLULAR TELEPHONE CONCEPTS (9L)
Mobile telephone services, cellular telephone, Frequency reuse, Interference, Cellular
system topology, Roaming and handoffs, Cellular telephone network components, Cellular CO-5
telephone call processing. Cellular Telephone systems: Digital cellular telephone, IS–95. GSM BTL-3
GPRS for Mobile communications, Personal Satellite communication system.
TEXT BOOKS

185
 Thiagarajan Vishwanathan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”; PHI
1.
Publications, 2006.
J. E. Flood , “Telecommunications Switching, Traffic and Networks”, Pearson Education,
2.
2001.
John C. Bellamy, “Digital Telephony”, Third Edition; Wiley Publications, 2000.
3.

Wayne Tomasi, “Electronic Communications Systems”; 5th Edition; Pearson Education,

4.
2014.
E BOOKS
https://www.scribd.com/doc/244713446/Telecommunication-Switching-Systems-And-
1
Networks-pdf
EC_8th_Sem_Electronic Switching_P_Gnanasivam - Telecommunication Switching and
2
Networks_2nd-Edition-2008.pdf (ccsuniversity.ac.in)
MOOC
1 nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M4L1.pdf
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-
2
contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Communication%20network/New_index1.html

COURSE TITLE SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4370 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Second Seminar/
First Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module gives a knowledge to the characteristics of speech signal in regarding its
production, perception its characteristics and the digital models. The course also
Course enriches the application of signal processing concepts to the speech signal. It also helps
Description the students to analyze the concepts of homomorphic speech processing and linear
prediction for speech signals. The last module focuses on the development of speech
recognition systems, speech synthesis systems and speech coding techniques.
1. To brief the fundamentals of speech signal production and perception.
2. To apply the signal processing concepts on speech signals.
Course
3. To explain the concepts of speech production and perception using computational
Objective
models.
4. To predict the filter coefficients using linear prediction.

186
 5. To develop automatic speech recognition and speech synthesis systems.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the characteristics and fundamentals of speech signal production and
hearing perception.
2. Enumerate the fundamental concepts of digital signal processing for speech signals
Course
3. Illustrate the computational models of Human speech production and perception
Outcome
4. Analyze the basic concepts of homomorphic speech processing and linear
prediction for speech signals
5. Design systems for basic applications like speech recognition, synthesis, speech
coding.
Prerequisites: Basics on signal processing techniques
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO-2 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO-3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO-4 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 2 1 2
CO-5 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING (9L)
Fundamentals of Human Speech Production, Acoustic Properties of American English
Speech, Fundamentals of Speech Perception, Computational Models of Speech
CO-1
Perception, Time-Domain Methods for Speech Processing
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Basics on human speech processing
MODULE 2: FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (9L)
Review of Discrete-Time Signals and Systems, Review of Transform Representation of
Signals and Systems (DFT, STFT), Fundamentals of Digital Filters, Review of Sampling
CO-2
Theory.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Signal processing techniques
MODULE 3: HUMAN SPEECH PRODUCTION & PERCEPTION (9L)
The Process of Speech Production, Short-Time Fourier Representation of Speech, The
Acoustic Theory of Speech Production, Digital model of speech production, Anatomy and
CO-3
Function of the Ear, The Perception of Sound; Masking; Pitch, Measurement of Speech
BTL-2
Quality and Intelligibility. - psychoacoustics
Suggested Readings:

187
Digital modelling of speech signals
MODULE 4: HOMOMORPHIC SPEECH PROCESSING & LINEAR PREDICTION (9L)
Homomorphic Systems for Convolution, Homomorphic Analysis of the Speech Model,
Computing the Short-Time Cepstrum and Complex Cepstrum of Speech, Homomorphic
Filtering of Natural Speech, Cepstrum Analysis of All-Pole Models, Linear Predictive CO-4
Analysis of Speech Signals, Computation of the Gain for the Model. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Cepstrum, Linear prediction of speech signals
MODULE 5: SPEECH RECOGNITION & SPEECH SYNTHESIS (9L)
Feature extraction – MFCC, LPCC - Automatic Speech Recognition and Natural Language
Understanding, Building a Speech Recognition System. Speech synthesis – Articulatory
synthesizer, Concatenative synthesis –USS – Statistical parametric speech synthesis - CO-5
DNN-based speech synthesis BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
ASR & synthesis techniques
TEXT BOOKS
Rabiner, L., Juang, Biing-Hwang and Yegnanarayana, B, (2011) ‘Fundamentals of Speech
1.
Recognition’, Pearson, India, pp.1-507.
Rabiner, L. R. and Schafer, R. W., (2011) “Theory and Applications of Digital Speech
2.
Processing”, Pearson, pp.1-230.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Ben Gold, Nelson Morgan, Dan Ellis, (2011), ”Speech and Audio Signal Processing:
1
Processing and Perception of Speech and Music”, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 1-652.
Thomas F. Quatieri,(2002) “Discrete-time speech signal processing: Principles and
2
practice”, Prentice Hall, pp. 1-781.
Douglas O'Shaughnessy, (2009), "Speech Communications: Human and Machine",
3
second edition, Universities Press, pp.1-548.
E BOOKS
1. http://research.iaun.ac.ir/pd/mahmoodian/pdfs/UploadFile_2643.pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055/cdeep%20demo%20ppt/processing.html

COURSE TITLE RADAR SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4371 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

188
 First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course is an introduction to radar. Its objective is to provide an understanding of
the basic concepts, operation, and applications of modern radar systems. It is designed
Course
to develop the knowledge and techniques necessary to analyze the performance of
Description
radar systems so that ultimately, the student can specify the subsystem performance
requirements in a radar system design.
1. To understand about the basics of Radar based system and also the characteristics
of radar.
2. To analyze the basics of MTI Radar and Pulse Doppler Radar based system and the
characteristics of the above radars.
Course
3. To Illustrate the various aspects of noise and its related effects in Radar.
Objective
4. To refresh principles of antennas and propagation as related to radars, also study of
transmitters and receivers
5. To Describe detection of signals and propagation as related to radars, also study of
receiver
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline radar fundamentals and analysis of the radar signals.
2. Examine the different types of Radar and Categorize various tracking radars.
Course
3. Distinguish different types of RADARS and applications based on the type of
Outcome
Transmitters and their functions.
4. Recognize and differentiate various detection of noise, display types and receivers.
5. Distinguish various aspects of propagation of Radar waves
Prerequisites: Antennas and wave propagation
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO-2 3 - - - 3 - - - - - - - 3 1
CO-3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO-4 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO-5 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: AN INTRODUCTION TO RADAR & THE RADAR EQUATION (9L)

189
 Basic Radar-The simple form of Radar Equation-Radar Block Diagram-Radar Frequencies
Application of Radar-The origins of Radar. Introduction of the Radar Equation – Detection of
Signals in Noise – Receiver Noise and the Signal to Noise Ratio- Probability Density Functions-
CO-1
Probabilities of Detection and False Alarm – Integration of Radar Pulses – Radar Cross Section
BTL-2
of Targets – Radar Cross Section Fluctuations- Transmitter Power – Pulse Repletion
Frequency-Antenna Parameters – System Losses
Suggested Reading: Other Radar Equation Considerations
MODULE 2: MTI and PULSE DOPPLER RADAR & TRACKING RADAR (9L)
Introduction to Doppler & MTI Radar- Delay Line Cancelers- Staggered Pulse Repetition
Frequencies Doppler Filter Banks – Digital MTI Processing –Moving Target Detector-
Limitations to MTI Performance- MTI from a Moving Platform (AMTI) – Pulse Doppler Radar-
CO-2
Other Doppler Radar Topics. Tracking with Radar-Monopulse Tracking – Conical Scan and
BTL-2
Sequential Lobbing- Limitations to Tracking Accuracy- Low-Angle Tracking- Tracking in
Range- Other Tracking Radar Topics Comparison of Trackers
Suggested Reading: Automatic Tracking with Surveillance Radars (ADT)
MODULE 3: THE RADAR ANTENNA & RADAR TRANSMITTERS (9L)
Functions of the Radar Antenna – Antenna Parameters – Antenna Radiation Pattern and
Aperture Illumination – Reflector Antennas – Electronically Steered Phased Array Antennas
– Phase Shifters –Frequency Scan Arrays – Radiators for Phased Arrays – Architectures for
CO-3
Phased Arrays –Mechanically Steered Planar Array Antennas. Introduction to Radar
BTL-3
Transmitters – Linear – Beam Power Tubes – Solid State RF Power Sources – Magnetron –
Crossed Field Amplifiers
Suggested Reading: Other RF Power Sources.
MODULE 4: RADAR RECEIVERS (9L)

Noise Figure and Noise Temperature. Displays – types. Duplexer – Branch type and Balanced
type, Circulators as Duplexers. Introduction to Phased Array Antennas- Basic Concepts, CO-4
Radiation Pattern. Beam Steering and Beam Width changes, Series versus Parallel Feeds. BTL-2
Suggested Reading: Applications, Advantages and Limitations.

MODULE 5: PROPAGATION AND DETECTION OF RADAR SIGNALS (9L)

Introduction to Propagation of Radar Waves – Forward Scattering from a Flat Earth–
Scattering from the Round Earth’s Surface – Atmospheric Refraction – Standard
Propagation– Nonstandard Propagation – Diffraction. Introduction, Matched Filter Receiver CO-5
– Response Characteristics and Derivation, Correlation Function and Cross-correlation BTL-2
Receiver,
Suggested Reading: Efficiency of Non-matched Filters, Matched Filter with Non-white Noise.
TEXT BOOKS

190
 Introduction to Radar Systems, MERILL I SKOLNIK – Tata McGraw Hill – 3rd edition
1.
2001
Introduction to Radar System, K.K. Sharma - S K Kataria & Sons – 2015 Edition - 2012
2.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Radar Hand Book- MERILL I SKOLNIK- Tata McGraw Hill,2001
2 Radar Principals, Technology, Applications – Byron Edde, Pearson Education, 2004.
3 Radar Principles – Peebles, Jr., P.Z.Wiley, NweYork, 1998.
MOOC
1 Introduction to Radar Systems | MIT OpenCourseWare
2 NPTEL :: Aerospace Engineering - Navigation, Guidance, And Control

COURSE TITLE SATELLITE COMMUNICATION CREDITS 3

EC
C4 COURSE
COURSE CODE DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
37 CATEGORY
2
1. 24th ACM,
Version Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
0 30.05.2018
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Se
co
nd
Pe
rio
Seminar/
First Periodical dic Surprise
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment al Test / Quiz
Project
As
ses
sm
en
t
15
15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
%
This course introduces to the basic concept in the field of satellite
communication. This will enable the students to know the historical
Course Description
perspective, orbital mechanics and constellations, choice of orbital
parameters, propagation considerations, link budgets, interference issues and

191
 existing and proposed mobile satellite systems. It also describe the various
applications of satellite system.

1. To familiarize with the basic concepts related to satellite Communication

and different satellite communication orbits.
2. To provide an in-depth understanding of satellite Sub-Systems operation
and launching techniques, satellite link design and earth station
technology
Course Objective
3. To design the Earth Station antennas Link budgets & planning.
4. To analyze the various methods of satellite access.
5. To review the state of the art in Satellite System Performance and learn
the Digital audio/video broadcasting using satellites understand the
applications of satellites.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the orbital and functional principles of satellite communication
systems in relation to other terrestrial systems with the definitions of
parameters associated with it.
2. Describe the concepts of Architect and the working of a Satellite
communication system and its other subsystems in the Geostationary
Orbit and Space Segment.
Course Outcome
3. Analyze and evaluate the satellite link and suggest enhancements to
improve the link performance of earth segment and space links.
4. Select an appropriate multiple access schemes for the given satellite
communication link.
5. Apply knowledge of existing satellite systems and state of the art
technology to the design of future systems and describe the various
applications of satellite system.
Prerequisites: Basic concepts of Analog and Digital Communication
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 - - - - -
CO-2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO-3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO-4 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 - - - 1 2 -
CO-5 2 1 2 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – BASICS OF SATELLITE SYSTEMS AND ORBITS (9L)
Introduction – Frequency Allocations for Satellite Services – Intelsat – U.S. Domsats – Polar
CO-1
Orbiting Satellites – Kepler’s Laws –Definitions of Terms for Earth-orbiting Satellites – Orbital
BTL-2
Elements – Apogee and Perigee Heights – Orbital Perturbations – Effects of a Nonspherical

192
Earth – Atmospheric Drag – Inclined Orbits –Calendars – Universal Time – Julian Dates – Sidereal
Time – The Orbital Plane – The Geocentric- Equatorial Coordinate System – Earth Station
Referred to the IJK Frame – The Topcentric-Horizon Co-ordinate System – The Sub-satellite
Point – Predicting Satellite Position.
MODULE 2 - GEOSTATIONARY ORBIT AND SPACE SEGMENT (9L)
Antenna Look Angels – The Polar Mount Antenna – Limits of Visibility – Near Geostationary
Orbits – Earth Eclipse of Satellite – Sun Transit Outage – Launching Orbits – Problems – Power CO-2
Supply – Attitude Control – Station Keeping – Thermal Control – TT&C Subsystem – BTL-2
Transponders – Antenna Subsystem – Morelos – Anik-E – Advanced Tiros-N Spacecraft
MODULE 3 – EARTH SEGMENT & SPACE LINK (9L)
Introduction – Receive-Only Home TV Systems –– Master Antenna TV System – Community
Antenna TV System – Transmit-Receive Earth Stations – Problems – Equivalent Isotropic
CO-3
Radiated Power – Transmission Losses –Link Power Budget Equation – System Noise –Carrier-
BTL-3
to-Noise Ratio – Uplink – Downlink – Effects of Rain –– Combined Uplink and Downlink C/N
Ratio – Intermodulation Noise.
MODULE 4 – SATELLITE ACCESS (9L)
Single Access – Preassigned FDMA, Demand-Assigned FDMA, SPADE System, TDMA , On-
CO-4
board signal Processing for TDMA / FDMA operation, Satellite switched TDMA, Code-Division
BTL-3
Multiple Access –Problems .
MODULE 5 – DIRECT BROADCAST SATELLITE SERVICES (9L)
Introduction – Orbital Spacing – Power Rating and Number of Transponders – Frequencies
and Polarization – Transponder Capacity – Bit Rates for Digital Television – MPEG
CO-5
Compression Standards – Forward Error Correction – Home Receiver Outdoor Unit (ODU) –
BTL-4
Home Receiver Indoor Unit (IDU) – Downlink Analysis – Uplink - Satellite Mobile Services –
VSATs – Radarsat – Global Positioning Satellite System – Orbcomm.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, McGraw-Hill Publication Fourth edition 2006
2. Timothy Pratt – Charles Bostian & Jeremy Allmuti, Satellite Communications, John Willy & Sons
(Asia) Pvt. Ltd. 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Wilbur L. Pritchars Henri G.Suyder Hond Robert A.Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems
Engineering, Pearson Education Ltd., Second edition 2003.
2 Text book companionhttp://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
E BOOKS
1. http://www.freebookcentre.net/electronics_communication_books/satellite_communication_s
ystems_ebooks.html
2. https://www.accessengineeringlibrary.com/browse/rf-and-microwave-power-amplifier-design-
second-edition#fullDetails
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/syllabus_pdf/117105131.pdf/38

193
 2 http://ggn.dronacharya.info/ECEDept/Downloads/QuestionBank/VIIsem/NPTEL_LINKS_SATELLI
TE_COMM.pdf

COURSE TITLE NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4373 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives a basic introduction to neural networks and fuzzy logic systems. It is a
very active research area and finds applications in fast developing areas such as
Course
biometrics, bioinformatics, multimedia data analysis, medicine and most recently data
Description
science. The course gives an insight about the backpropagation algorithms, associative
memories, concepts of fuzzy logic and components of fuzzy logic systems.
1. To understand the concepts of neural networks
2. To know the functioning of the backpropagation networks
Course
3. To comprehend the networks based on associative memories
Objective
4. To describe the fundamentals of fuzzy systems
5. To explain the various components of fuzzy systems
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Identify and describe Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Network techniques in
building intelligent machines
Course
2. Apply Artificial Neural Network & Fuzzy Logic models to handle uncertainty and
Outcome
solve engineering problems.
3. Recognize the feasibility of applying a Neuro-Fuzzy model for a particular
problem
Prerequisites:NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - 2 - 1 - - - - - 2 - 2
CO-2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 - 2
CO-3 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 - 2

194
 1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – FUNDAMENTALS OF NEURAL NETWORKS (9L)
Basic concepts of neural networks, Human Brain, Model of an artificial neuron, Neural
network architectures, Hodgkin-Huxley Neuron Model, Integrate-and-Fire Neuron Model,
characteristics of neural networks, learning methods, taxonomy of neural network CO-1
architectures. Broad application areas in Electronics Engineering BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Regression
MODULE 2: BACKPROPAGATION NETWORKS (9L)
Architecture of a Backpropagation network, backpropagation Learning, Illustration,
Applications, Effect of tuning parameters of the backpropagation neural network, selection
CO-2
of various parameters in BPN
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Perceptron Networks
MODULE 3: ASSOCIATIVE MEMORIES (9L)
Paradigms of Associative Memory, Pattern Mathematics, Hebbian Learning, General
Concepts of Associative Memory, Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM) Architecture,
BAM Training Algorithms: Storage and Recall Algorithm, BAM Energy Function, Proof of BAM
CO-2
Stability Theorem Architecture of Hopfield Network: Discrete and Continuous versions,
BTL-3
Storage and Recall Algorithm, Stability Analysis, Capacity of the Hopfield Network
Suggested Readings:
Self Organizing Maps
MODULE 4: CLASSICAL AND FUZZY SETS (9L)
Introduction to classical sets - properties, Operations and relations; Fuzzy sets,
Membership, Uncertainty, Operations, properties, fuzzy relations, cardinalities,
CO-1
membership functions.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Fuzzy Inference Systems
MODULE 5: FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEMS COMPONENTS (9L)
Fuzzification, Membership value assignment, development of rule base and decision
making system, Defuzzification to crisp sets, Defuzzification methods CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Applications of fuzzy logic
TEXT BOOKS

195
 Ross, Timothy J, (2009) “Fuzzy logic with engineering applications”. John Wiley & Sons, 3
1.
rd edition, pp. 1-585.
Yegnanarayana, B (2004), “Artificial neural networks”. PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., pp.1-476
2

Haykin, Simon (1994) “Neural networks: a comprehensive foundation”. Prentice Hall PTR,
3.
pp.1-823
REFERENCE BOOKS
Zurada, Jacek M. (1992) “Introduction to artificial neural systems”, Jaico Publishing
1
House,pp1-790.
Hagan, Martin T., Howard B. Demuth, and Mark H. Beale. (1996) ,”Neural network
2
design”. Boston: Pws Pub..
Passino, Kevin M., and Stephen Yurkovich. (1998) “Fuzzy control”. Vol. 42. Menlo Park,
3
CA: Addison-Wesley.
E BOOKS
1. https://drive.google.com/file/d/0B2iRDvP8jUuAUnpfaDBnQTBWLUU/edit
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc19/SEM1/noc19-ge07/

COURSE TITLE PYTHON PROGRAMMING FOR REAL-WORLD TASK CREDITS 3

COURSE COURSE
ECC4374 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course focuses on developing the python programming to do a variety of programming
Course tasks where the students are encouraged to develop application. At the end of the course
Description the student will be developing adequate skills in programming and will be known to
understand the implementation of various applications using python.
1. To acquire programming skills in core Python.
Course 2. To acquire Object Oriented Skills in Python.
Objective 3. To develop the ability to write database applications in Python
4. To develop the skill of to solve real world task using python

196
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Identify core aspects of programming and features of the Python language
2. apply core programming concepts like data structures, conditionals, loops, variables,
Course and functions design and analyze the function of specified sequential logic circuits
Outcome 3. Write fully-functional Python programs using commonly used data structures, custom
functions, and reading and writing to files
4. use Python external libraries to create and modify documents, images, and messages
5. use Application Programming Interfaces (APIs) to interact with web services
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 3 2 - 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 1
CO-2 2 2 2 - 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 1
CO-3 2 2 2 - 3 1 - - - - - 1 - 1
CO-4 2 2 2 - 3 1 1 - - - - 1 - 1
CO-5 3 2 2 - 3 1 1 - - - - 1 1 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTROUCTION TO PROGRAMMING AND PYTHON (9L)
programming basics - Client-side vs. server-side programming - Introduction to core
programming concepts: Data structures, Conditionals, Variables, Functions, and Loops
Python basics - Downloading & installing Python - Basic Data Types - Arithmetic operators –
CO-1
Strings – Casting - IDLE shell - Running a Python script – simple program
BTL-3
Exercise : • Simple arithmetic program • Program using if . . .else and multiple if
Suggested Readings:
Simple programming application using python
MODULE 2 – LISTS, LOOPS AND FUNCTIONS (9L)
creating a list - Updating a list - Types of Loops - Iterating over a list - Iterating over strings -
'for' loops - loop using break and continue - Nested loops Function - Built-in functions - User-
defined functions – Docstrings – function Execution order
CO-2
Exercise : • Find minimum value • Program using strings • Program for average,
BTL-3
multiplication tables, Word reversal, comparison operation, Vowel/word counter
Suggested Readings:
Python programming for arithmetic’s using loops and fuction
MODULE 3 – Lists, Strings, Tuples, Sets, and PyCharm (9L)
About PyCharm - Downloading & installing PyCharm - Running code - More list operations -
CO-3
List functions - Slicing lists - Strings vs. lists - Slicing strings - Split and join - Creating a tuple
BTL-3
- Creating a set - Iterating over and updating a set

197
Exercise : • Name Substring • Max and min function • Tuples & Sets
Suggested Readings:
Python programming with strings and PyCharm
MODULE 4 – Dictionaries and Files (9L)
Creating a dictionary - Updating a dictionary - Opening a file - Basics of file open method
modes - Reading a file - Newline characters - Writing to a file - Closing a file
Exercise : • Grade/attendance book • Open, read, and write to new file • Open, read, and CO-4
append to file BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Advanced python programming
MODULE 5– Real-World Tasks with Python (9L)
Introduction - Built-In Libraries vs. External Libraries- API - How to Make Sense of an API -
How to Use PIL for Working With Images Python Email Library - Adding Attachments -
Sending the Email Through an SMTP Server - Generating PDFs - Adding Tables to our PDFs -
CO-5
Adding Graphics to our PDFs
BTL-3
Exercise : • Real-World Tasks Program
Suggested Readings:
Application programming using python
TEXT BOOKS
1. Al Sweigart , ”Automate the Boring Stuff with Python”, 2nd Edition: Practical Programming
for Total Beginners, pp.1-504 ,2019
2. Mark Lutz , ”Learning Python: Powerful Object-Oriented Programming”, O′Reilly, fifth
edition, pp.1-1648 ,2013
3. PovelSolin, Martin Novak, “Introduction to Python Programming”, pp.1-197 ,2012
4. John C. Lusth, “An Introduction to Python”, pp.1-135,2011
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Y. Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Programming using Python”, Pearson, 2012
2. Jacob Fredslund, Introduction to Python Programming, 2007
E BOOKS
1 https://users‐cs.au.dk/chili/PBI/python_tutorial_jakobfredslund.pdf
MOOC
1 Introduction to Python Programming -from Coursera platform

2 Crash Course on Python - from Coursera platform

198
 SEMESTER VII

COURSE TITLE WIRELESS NETWORKS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4451 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test /
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course will provide the principles of Wireless networking with emphasis on the essential
concept delivery of radio frequency (RF) communication, the MAC layer, Mesh Networking
Course as well as distributed algorithms for medium access. Furthermore, exposure to current and
Description emerging Mobile IP for efficient packet delivery and handover were addressed in detail.
Added to it, the MANETs which are attributed to their characteristics such as ability for
infrastructure-less setup, and self-configured were covered.
1. To enumerate the protocol architecture of Infrastructure GSM network and WLAN in terms
of channel access and localization.
2. To compare the various Channel access protocols of GSM and WLAN and select appropriate
Course methods for specified applications.
Objective 3. To analyze the Mobile IP network layer and Transport layer for packet delivery and
Handover
4. To elucidate data management techniques in mobile computing
5. To enumerate the application of MANET and its routing algorithms
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1.Develop the concept of protocol architecture in the context of mobile and wireless systems
Course 2. Differentiate the application of medium access control in mobile and wireless systems.
Outcome 3. Interpret the functionality of the mobile IP in the mobile network and transport layer.
4. Conceptualize the data management of the mobile databases in mobile computing.
5. Interpret the operation of various routing algorithms in MANETs.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO-2 3 3 3 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 -

199
CO-3 3 3 3 2 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 -
CO-4 2 1 1 2 - - - - - - 2 - 1 -
CO-5 1 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: Introduction to Network Technologies and Cellular Communications HIPERLAN
9L
Protocol Architecture, Physical Layer, Channel Access Control Sub-layer, MAC Sub-layer,
Information Bases and Networking.
WLAN: Infrared vs Radio Transmission, Infrastructure and Ad Hoc Networks, IEEE 802.11.
CO-1
GSM: Mobile Services, System Architecture, Radio Interface, Protocols, Localization and calling,
BTL-2
Handover, Security, and New Data Services.
Suggested Readings:
IEEE 802 standards and Protocols
MODULE 2: (Wireless) Medium Access Control (MAC) 9L
Motivation for a Specialized MAC (Hidden and Exposed Terminals, Near and Far Terminals),
SDMA, FDMA, TDMA, CDMA. MAC Protocols for GSM, Wireless LAN (IEEE8O2.11), Collision
CO-2
Avoidance (MACA, MACAW) Protocols.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Advances in Wireless MAC: Principles, Techniques, and Applications
MODULE 3: Mobile IP Network Layer 9L
lP and Mobile IP Network Layers, Packet Delivery and Handover Management, Location
Management, Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation, Route Optimization, DHCP. Mobile
Transport Layer: Conventional TCP/IP Protocols, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Other CO-3
Transport Layer Protocols for Mobile Networks BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Best practices of latest version of Mobile IPs
MODULE 4: Database Issues 9L

Database Hoarding & Caching Techniques, Client—Server Computing & Adaptation,

Transactional Models, Query processing, Data Recovery Process & QoS Dissemination and
Synchronization. Communications Asymmetry, Classification of Data Delivery Mechanisms, Data
CO-4
Dissemination Broadcast Models, Selective Tuning and Indexing Methods, Digital Audio and Video
BTL-2
Broadcasting (DAB & DVB).
Suggested Readings:
Database management in Mobile Computing

MODULE 5: Mobile Ad hoc Networks (MANETs) 9L

Introduction, Applications & Challenges of a MANET, Routing, Classification of Routing
Algorithms, Algorithms such as DSR, AODV, DSDV, etc. , Mobile Agents, Service Discovery. CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Vehicular Adhoc Networks and Intelligent Systems

200
TEXT BOOKS
1. Raj Kamal, “Mobile Computing”, Oxford University Press, 2007, ISBN: 0195686772.
2 Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Addison-Wesley, Second Edition, 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS
Stojmenovic and Cacute, “Handbook of Wireless Networks and Mobile Computing”, Wiley,
1
2002, ISBN 0471419028.
Reza Behravanfar, “Mobile Computing Principles: Designing and Developing Mobile
2
Applications with UML and XML”, ISBN: 0521817331, Cambridge University Press, Oct 2004.
E BOOKS
1. https://uomustansiriyah.edu.iq/media/lectures/6/6_2019_03_05!08_15_51_PM.pdf
2. https://india.oup.com/product/mobile-computing-9780199455416
3. http://pws.npru.ac.th/sartthong/data/files/Wireless_Networks_and_Mobile_Computing.pdf
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/wireless-communications
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_ee48/preview
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105160/

COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO CREDITS 3

COURSE COURSE
ECC4452 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-5
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course provides knowledge to evolution of software defined radio and its different
Course types of architectures. It also covers the transmitter & receiver architectures and base
Description band processing along with reconfigurable antenna requirement. It gives concepts of
GNU radio using Python.
1. To understand about of evolution of SDR concepts & its benefits.
2. To classify the different types of Architectures and partitioning concepts.
Course
3. To identify the front End technology for Software Defined Radio.
Objective
4. To know about base band processing and reconfiguring the antenna.
5. To write the Python code for GNU radio.

201
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able
1. Summarize the basic and design principles of SDR
Course 2. Analyze the SDR architecture and its functions
Outcome 3. Recognize the challenges in the implementation of SDR
4. Analyze the performance of transmitter and receiver architectures in SDR
5. Develop the GNU radio using python
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO-2 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 1 2
CO-3 3 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO-4 3 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO-5 3 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION OF SDR (9L)
Software Radio aspects, The Need for Software Radios, Characteristics and Benefits of a
Software Radio, Design Principles of a Software Radio. SDR concepts & history, Benefits of
SDR, SDR Forum, Ideal SDR architecture, SDR Based End to- End Communication, Worldwide CO-1
frequency band plans- Future of Software Defined Radio- Introduction to Cognitive Radio. BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Evolution of SDR and its applications
MODULE 2: ARCHITECTURE (9L)
Introduction – 2G Radio Architectures Hybrid Radio Architecture- Basic Software Defined
Radio Block Diagram- System Level Functioning Partitioning-Digital Frequency Conversion
Partitioning., Functional View, Networking Overview-Core Framework- Operating
CO-2
Environment (OE)- SCA architecture, specification structure- General requirements and
BTL-5
services, devices and Certification
Suggested Readings:
Block diagram of SDR and its architecture.
MODULE 3: FRONT END TECHNOLOGY (9L)
Radio Frequency translation, Transmitter specifications, Architecture, Design
considerations- Receiver specifications, Architecture, considerations- Front end
CO-3
Implementation-Data conversions-Zero IF receivers, Preselect Filters.
BTL-5
Suggested Readings:
Transmitter and Receiver sections of communication.
MODULE 4: BASEBAND PROCESSING AND RECONFIGURATION (9L)

202
Base band component technologies, Design tools, Methodologies- Antenna Requirements-
Reconfiguration of network elements- user requirement of SDR terminals- Reconfiguration
CO-4
strategies, requirements and management techniques.
BTL-5
Suggested Readings:
Basic of Base Band and reconfiguration technique.
MODULE 5: GNU RADIO PLATFORM (9L)
Software Radio platforms: Low Cost SDR Platform- GNU radio- Python introduction,
developing GNU Radio, signal processing blocks, scheduler, Basic GR development flow,
CO-5
Universal Software radio peripherals (USRP).
BTL-5
Suggested Readings:
Concepts of GNU radio.
TEXT BOOKS
Bard, Kovarik: Software Defined Radio, The Software Communications Architecture, Wiley
1.
2007, 3rd Edition.
Dillinger, Madani, Alonistioti (Eds.): Software Defined Radio, Architectures, Systems and
2
Functions, Wiley 2003
3 Dr. Walter Tuttlebee: Software Defined Radio-Enabling Technologies, Wiley 2002
4 Tafazolli (Ed.): Technologies for the Wireless Future, Wiley 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Eugene Grayver, Implementing Software Defined Radio, Springer, 2013.
Cory Clark, Software Defined Radio: With GNU Radio and USRP, McGraw-Hill
2
Companies, Incorporated, 29-Nov-2008
E BOOKS
1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Software-defined_radio
2. http://www.scielo.org.co/pdf/rfing/v24n38/v24n38a07.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ec01/preview

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/

COURSE TITLE HIGH SPEED NETWORKS CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4453 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project

203
 15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course provides an introduction to circuit switched and packet switched networks.
The learners will be introduced to ATM networks, architecture and its various
applications and will get to know about the LAN architecture, requirements and
Course different topologies. The concept of Queue and queuing analysis and the effects of
Description congestion and traffic management are dealt in detail. The learner will get to know the
techniques involved to support real time traffic and congestion control in TCP and ATM
networks. An insight to different protocols for QoS support, Integrated and
differentiated services and the queuing discipline are also discussed.
1. To study the ATM and Frame Relay networks
2. To study the effects of congestion and Traffic management in high speed networks.
Course
3. To study the concepts of congestion control in TCP and ATM networks
Objective
4. To understand the concepts of Integrated and differentiated services
5. To study the various protocol for QoS.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Summarize the concepts of ATM and Frame relay
2. Describe the effects of congestion and Traffic management in high speed networks.
Course 3. Compare the techniques involved to support real-time traffic and congestion control
Outcome in TCP and ATM networks.
4. Elaborate the Integrated and differentiated services and compare the queuing
disciplines.
5. Interpret the different levels of Quality of Service (QoS) in various applications.
Prerequisites: Computer Networks
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO-2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO-3 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO-4 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO-5 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 1 1 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – High Speed Networks (9L)

204
 Frame Relay Networks – Asynchronous transfer mode – ATM Protocol Architecture, ATM
logical Connection, ATM Cell – ATM Service Categories – AAL. High Speed LANs: Fast
Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel – Wireless LANs: applications, requirements – CO-1
Architecture of 802.11. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: IEEE Standards and Specifications.

MODULE 2 – Congestion and Traffic Management (9L)

Queuing Analysis- Queuing Models – Single Server Queues – Effects of Congestion –
Congestion Control – Traffic Management – Congestion Control in Packet Switching CO-2
Networks– Frame Relay Congestion Control. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Queuing Theory Applications.
MODULE 3 – TCP And ATM Congestion Control (9L)
TCP Flow control – TCP Congestion Control – Retransmission – Timer Management –
Exponential RTO backoff – KARN’s Algorithm – Window management – Performance of TCP
over ATM. Traffic and Congestion control in ATM – Requirements – Attributes – Traffic CO-3
Management Frame work, Traffic Control – ABR traffic Management – ABR rate control, RM BTL-3
cell formats, ABR Capacity allocations – GFR traffic management.
Suggested Reading: Internet Traffic Management.
MODULE 4 – Integrated and Differentiated Services (9L)
Integrated Services Architecture – Approach, Components, Services- Queuing Discipline,
FQ,PS, BRFQ, GPS, WFQ – Random Early Detection, Differentiated Services CO-4
Suggested Reading: Applications of different architectures. BTL-3

MODULE 5 – Protocols for QoS Support (9L)

RSVP – Goals & Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms –
Multiprotocol Label Switching – Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details – RTP – Protocol CO-5
Architecture, Data Transfer Protocol, RTCP. BTL-3
Suggested Reading: Network Routing Protocol.
TEXT BOOKS
1. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Warland and Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Jean
Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., II Edition, 2001.
2 IrvanPepelnjk, Jim Guichard and Jeff Apcar, “MPLS and VPN architecture”, Cisco
Press,Volume 1 and 2, 2003.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/30

2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-263j-
data-communication-networks-fall-2002/

205
 3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-976-high-
speed-communication-circuits-and-systems-spring-2003/

COURSE
REMOTE SENSING CREDITS 3
TITLE
COURSE COURSE
ECC4454 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course introduces students to the basics of remote sensing, characteristics of
remote sensors, Thermal Remote Sensing and remote sensing applications in academic
disciplines and professional industries. Emphasis is placed on image acquisition and data
Course collection in the electromagnetic spectrum and data set manipulations. This course also
Description emphasizes the understanding of the remote sensing foundations and the use of remote
sensor data for environmental applications .Specifically the course will cover concepts
and foundations of remote sensing, visual image interpretation and characteristic of
various sensing systems.
1. To congregate the basic concepts and fundamentals of physical principles of remote
sensing.
2. To create a firm basis for successful integration of remote sensing in any field of
application.
Course 3. To acquire skills in advance techniques such as Thermal and scanning for mapping,
Objective modelling and monitoring.
4. To provide exposure to students in gaining knowledge on concept and applications
leading to modelling of earth resources management using Remote Sensing.
5. To enhance students capacity to interpret images and extract information on the
earth surface from multi resolution imagery at multi scale level.

206
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe the concepts, components, methodologies and applications of Remote
Sensing Technology.
Course 2. Express optical and microwave remote sensing classification, characteristics and
Outcome application.
3. Demonstrate thermal remote sensing application.
4. Select and process the appropriate satellite images for specific applications.
5. Integrate the satellite data with GIS for solving societal issues.
PREREQUISITES: BASIC PHYSICS
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - - - - 1 - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 1 1 -
CO-3 - - - - - 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-4 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-5 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:- INTRODUCTION TO REMOTE SENSING (9L)
Definition – Components of Remote Sensing – Energy, Sensor, Interacting Body - Active and
Passive Remote Sensing – Platforms – Aerial and Space Platforms – Balloons, Helicopters,
CO-1
Aircraft and Satellites – Synoptivity and Repetivity – Electro Magnetic Radiation (EMR) – EMR
BTL-2
spectrum – Visible, InfraRed (IR), Near IR, Middle IR, Thermal IR and Microwave – Black Body
Radiation - Planck‘s law – Stefan-Boltzman law
MODULE 2:- MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL REMOTE SENSING (9L)
Optical Remote Sensing: Satellites - Classification – Based on Orbits and Purpose – Satellite
Sensors - Resolution – Description of Multi Spectral Scanning – Along and Across Track
Scanners – Description of Sensors in Landsat, SPOT, IRS series – Current Satellites.
CO-2
Microwave Remote Sensing: The RADAR principle-Radar Wavebands-Side Looking Airborne
BTL-2
Radar (SLAR) systems-Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR)-Interaction Between Microwaves and
Earth's Surface-Speckle Noise, Backscattered Radar Intensity-Interpreting SAR Images-
Geometrical Characteristics-Slope Foreshortening, Layover, Aspect, Radar Shadow
MODULE 3:- THERMAL REMOTE SENSING (9L)
Introduction-Principles of Thermal Remote Sensing-The physical laws, Black bodies and
emissivity, Radiant and kinetic temperatures-Processing Thermal Data-Band Ratios and CO-3
Transformations, Determining Kinetic Surface temperatures-Thermal Applications-Rock BTL-3
Emissivity Mapping, Thermal hotspot Detection

207
MODULE 4:- IMAGE INTERPRETATION (9L)

Introduction- Image interpretation strategy-Levels of Interpretation Keys-Process of Image

Interpretation-Interpretation of Aerial Photo-General procedure for photo interpretation-
Preliminary Stage, Detailed Examination, Interpretation Stage, Compilation Stage-Three
CO-4
dimensional interpretation Method-Stereoscopic Depth Perception, Stereo Scope-Basic
BTL-2
elements of Image Interpretation-Application of Aerial Photo Interpretation-Interpretation
of Satellite Imagery-Key Elements of Visual Image Interpretation-Visual Interpretation of
Topographic Features Based on Reflection Characteristics of Images.

MODULE 5:- GIS AND APPLICATIONS OF REMOTE SENSING (9L)

GIS – Components of GIS – Hardware, Software and Organizational Context – Data – Spatial
and Non-Spatial – Maps – Types of Maps – Projection – Types of Projection - Data Input –
Digitizer, Scanner – Editing – Raster and Vector data structures – Comparison of Raster and
CO-5
Vector data structure – Analysis using Raster and Vector data – Retrieval, Reclassification,
BTL-2
Overlaying, Buffering – Data Output – Printers and Plotters- Integration of GIS and Remote
Sensing – Application of Remote Sensing and GIS – Water resources – Urban Analysis –
Watershed Management – Resources Information Systems.
TEXT BOOKS
1 M.G. Srinivas, Remote Sensing Applications, Narosa Publishing House, 2001. (Units 1).
Anji Reddy, Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems, BS Publications 2001
2
(Units 2,4 and 5).
W.H.Baker, Principles of remote sensing : an introductory textbook, Published by:The
3 International Institute for Geo-Information Science and Earth Observation
(ITC),2009.(Unit-3).
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jensen, J.R., Remote sensing of the environment, Prentice Hall, 2000.
2 Kang-Tsung Chang,‖ Introduction to Geographic Information Systems‖, TMH, 2002
Lillesand T.M. and Kiefer R.W., ―Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation‖, John Wiley
3
and Sons, Inc, New York, 1987.
Janza.F.J., Blue, H.M., and Johnston, J.E., "Manual of Remote Sensing Vol. I., American
4
Society of Photogrammetry, Virginia, U.S.A, 1975.
5 Burrough P A, ―Principle of GIS for land resource assessment‖, Oxford, 2008.
Mischael Hord, "Remote Sensing Methods and Applications", John Wiley & Sons, New
6
York, 1986.
7 Singal, "Remote Sening", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1990.
Floyd F. Sabins, Remote sensing, ―Principles and interpretation‖, W H Freeman and
8
Company 1996.
E BOOKS

208
 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/233793637_Principles_of_remote
1.
sensing_an_introductory_textbook
2 https://www.gisresources.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/09/anji-reddy_GIS.pdf

COURSE TITLE OPTO ELECTRONICS DEVICES CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4455 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise Test
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Optoelectronics is a field of study and application of physics of light with electricity. It
encompasses the study, design and manufacture of hardware device and convert
Course electrical signal into photon signal and vice versa. Course is based on the quantum
Description mechanical effects of light on electronic materials, especially semiconductors,
sometimes in the presence of electric fields. This is a relatively new and technologically
very advance sector.
1. To understand the basics of solid-state physics
2. To understand the basics of display devices
Course
3. To understand the optical detection devices.
Objective
4. To understand about optical modulators.
5. To understand the design of optoelectronic integrated circuits
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe the wave nature of light and the quantum mechanical treatment of light.
2. Distinguish between Electro Luminescence, photo Luminescence, Cathode
Luminescence, and Injection Luminescence and recognize various features of
optical laser.
Course 3. Analyze mechanism of operation of photo detector, Thermal Detector, Photo
Outcome device, Photo Conductors, Photo Diodes by studying their performance
characteristics.
4. Categorize Analog and Digital Modulation, Electro-optic modulators and solve
problem related to optical Switching and Logic devices.
5. Appraise the development of Optical Integrated Circuit (OIC) and Integrated
Transmitter and Receiver.

209
Prerequisites: ECB4202 - Electronic Devices Circuits
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO-2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO-3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO-4 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO-5 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: ELEMENTS OF LIGHT AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS (9L)
Wave nature of light, Polarization, Interference, Diffraction, Light Source, review of
Quantum Mechanical concept, Review of Solid-State Physics, Review of Semiconductor
CO-1
Physics and Semiconductor Junction Device
BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Pallab Bhattacharya “Semiconductor Opto Electronic Devices”,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt., Ltd.New Delhi, 2006.
MODULE 2: DISPLAY DEVICES AND LASERS (9L)
Introduction, Photo Luminescence, Cathode Luminescence, Electro Luminescence,
Injection Luminescence, LED, Plasma Display, Liquid Crystal Displays, Numeric Displays,
Laser Emission, Absorption, Radiation, Population Inversion, Optical Feedback, CO-2
Threshold condition, Laser Modes, Classes of Lasers, Mode Locking, laser applications BTL-4
Suggested Reading: Jasprit Singh, “Opto Electronics – As Introduction to Materials and
Devices”, Mc Graw- Hill International Edition, 1998
MODULE 3: OPTICAL DETECTION DEVICES (9L)
Photo detector, Thermal detector, Photo Devices, Photo Conductors, Photo diodes,
Detector Performance CO-3
Suggested Reading: J. Wilson and J.Haukes, “Opto Electronics – An Introduction”, BTL-4
Prentice Hall
MODULE 4: OPTOELECTRONIC MODULATOR (9L)
Introduction, Analog and Digital Modulation, Electro-optic modulators, Magneto Optic
Devices, Acousto-Optic devices, Optical, Switching and Logic Devices CO-4
Suggested Reading: S C Gupta, Opto Electronic Devices and Systems, Prentice Hal of India, BTL-4
2005
MODULE 5: OPTOELECTRONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS (9L)
Introduction, hybrid and Monolithic Integration, Application of Opto Electronic
Integrated Circuits, Integrated transmitters and Receivers, Guided wave devices CO-5
Suggested Reading: S C Gupta, Opto Electronic Devices and Systems, Prentice Hal of India, BTL-4
2005

210
TEXT BOOKS
1. J Wilson and JFB Hawkes, Optoelectronics – an Intro duction, PHI, 3/e, 2010
2. Pallab Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, PHI, 2/e, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 John M Senior, Optical Fiber Communication – principle and practices, PHI, 3/e, 2010.
Djafar K Manbaev, Fiber-Optic Communication technology, Pearson Education, 6th
2
Reprint, 2012
E BOOKS
1 https://www.free-ebooks.net/internet-technology/All-Optical-Signal-Processing-with
Semiconductor-Optical-Amplifiers-and-Tunable-Filters
2 https://www.free-ebooks.net/internet-technology/Optoelectronic-Devices-and-
Properties
3 https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/9781118688977
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_mm01/announcements

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/108/117108142/
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115/102/115102026/
4 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-974-
fundamentals-of-photonics-quantum-electronics-spring-2006/download-course-
materials/

COURSE TITLE INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS CREDITS 3

COURSE COURSE
ECC4456 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-2
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

Industrial electronics have the objective of studying the various power electronic
Course
devices. This course focuses on discussing the concepts and principles related to the
Description
performance of thyristor, Rectifier and choppers.

211
 1. To study the dynamic and switching characteristics of power semiconductor
devices.(BJT,MOSFET,IGBT,THYRISTORS)
Course
2. To determine the performance parameters of controlled rectifiers and AC voltage
Objective
controller.
3. To design Inverters, Choppers and Switching Regulators
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the fundamental concept and working of power devices.
Course 2. Discuss the principles of thyristors and its applications.
Outcome 3. Summarize the concepts of rectifier components.
4. Outline the concept of regulator circuits.
5. Use standard concepts of Inverters and choppers
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-2 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-4 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO-5 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9L)
Applications of power electronics, Power semiconductor devices, Control characteristics,
Types of power electronics circuits, Peripheral effects. Power Transistors: Power BJT’s, CO-1
switching characteristics, switching limits, Power MOSFET’s, Switching characteristics, BTL-2
IGBT’s.
MODULE 2 – INTRODUCTION TO THYRISTORS (9L)
Principle of operation, anode-cathode characteristics, Two transistor model. Turn-
CO-2
on Methods, Dynamic Turn-on and turn-off characteristics, Gate characteristics, Gate trigger
BTL-2
circuits, di / dt and dv / dt protection, Thyristor firing circuits. UJT characteristics, applications
MODULE 3 –CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS (9L)
Introduction, Principles of phase controlled converter operation, 1φ fully controlled
converters, Duel converters, 1 φ semi converters (all converters with R & RL load). Thyristor CO-3
turn off methods. Natural and forced commutation, self-commutation, class A and class B BTL-3
types.
MODULE 4 –AC VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS (9L)
Introduction, Principles of on and off control, Principles of phase control, Single phase CO-4
controllers with restive loads and Inductive loads, numerical problems BTL-2

212
MODULE 5 – DC CHOPPERS (9L)
Introduction, Principles of step down and step up choppers, Step down chopper with RL
loads, Chopper classification, Switch mode regulators – buck, boost and buck –
CO-5
boost regulators.
BTL-2
Invertors: Introduction, Principles of operation, Performance parameters. Solar Heating
Systems, Microwave Oven
TEXT BOOKS
M. H. Rashid “Power Electronics” - 3rd edition, PHI / Pearson publisher 2004.
1.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 M. D. Singh and Kanchandani K.B. “Power Electronics” - TMH publisher, 2nd Ed. 2007
V Natarasu and R.S. Anandamurhty, “Power Electronics ”, V Natarasu and RS
2
anandamurhty, Pearson/Sanguine Pub. 2006

COURSE TITLE ADVANCED MOBILE COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY CREDITS 3

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4457 PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise Test
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course introduces the basics of OFDM and MIMO. It describes the wireless
Course standards and their applications. This module discusses the evolution of LTE technology
Description and explain the frequency spectrum, requirements, and applications of 5G. It deals with
the Architecture and application of 5G in millimeter wave communication.
1. Study the basics of OFDM and MIMO.
2. Learn the role of key Wireless standards and their enhancement by applying
OFDM & MIMO concepts.
Course
3. Study 5G in a communication environment.
Objective
4. Understand the key resources (Small cell, Mobile cloud) in 5G communication.
5. Learn the requirements of 5G deployment and Millimeter wave
communication

213
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the basics of OFDM and MIMO.
2. Summarize the role of key Wireless standards and their enhancement by applying
Course OFDMA & MIMO concepts.
Outcome 3. Estimate the need and role of 5G in the communication environment.
4. Assess the application of key resources (Small cell, Mobile cloud) in 5G
communication.
5. Discuss the requirements of 5G deployment and Millimeter wave communication
Prerequisites: Mobile Communications, Digital Communication.
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - 1 - 2
CO-2 1 - 1 - 1 2 - - - - - 1 - 2
CO-3 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 - 2
CO-4 1 - - 1 1 - - - - - 1 - 2
CO-5 1 - - 1 1 - - - - - 1 - 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – AN INTRODUCTION TO OFDM AND MIMO (9L)
Multi-Carrier Modulation – Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing, OFDM Related
Issues, OFDM Transceiver Architecture – Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Basics,
CO-1
MIMO Techniques, MIMO-OFDM System Example
BTL-2
Suggested reading
Beamforming concepts
MODULE 2 – KEY WIRELESS STANDARDS (9L)
3G and 4G Wireless Standards-GSM, WCDMA, LTE, LTE advanced, UWB and WiMAX.
Application of OFDM and MIMIO in LTE, UWB & LTE advanced CO-2
Suggested reading BTL-3
Smart antennas
MODULE 3 – 5G ROADMAP AND SPECTRUM (9L)
Drivers for 5G – Introduction Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G.THE 5G
Roadmap and Pillars – Architecture of 5G INTERNET – Internet of Things and context-
CO-3
Awareness – 5G spectrum –challenges –Spectrum and Bandwidth requirements
BTL-3
Suggested reading
Current trends of 5G Implementation in Europe, North America and Asia
MODULE 4 – KEY ENABLING RESOURCES FOR 5G (9L)

214
Small Cells for 5G mobile networks- Introduction – Small Cells – Capacity limits and
Achievable gains with densification – Mobile data demand – Introduction to mobile
CO-4
cloud– Resources– Enablers
BTL-3
Suggested reading
Mobility challenges in 5G
MODULE 5– ARCHITECTURE & APPLICATION OF 5G IN MMW COMMUNICATION (9L)
5G ARCHITECTURE – Introduction – High level requirements for 5G architecture –
Functional architecture and 5G flexibility – Physical Architecture and 5G deployment.
Millimeter wave communication – spectrum and regulations – channel propagation –
CO-5
Hardware technologies for mmW systems –Architecture and mobility –Beam-forming
BTL-3
concepts
Suggested reading
SON network architecture over LTE and its role in 5G
TEXT BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of 5G mobile Networks, Edited by Jonathan Rodis Quez, John Wiley
publication, 2015
2. 5G Mobile and Wireless Communications Technology, Edited by Asif Osseiran, Jose F.
Monserrat, Patrick Marsch: Cambridge university press, June 2016.
3. Martin Sauter, "From GSM to LTE-Advanced: An Introduction to Mobile Networks and
Mobile Broadband" John Willey & Sons Ltd., 2014.
4. Lal Chand Godara, “Smart Antennas” CRC press, 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. William Stallings, “Wireless Communication and Networks”, Pearson Education, 2003.
2. Roy Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology”, India edition, Cengage learning,
2010
3. Jiangzhou Wang, “High-Speed Wireless Communications: Ultra-wideband, 3G Long
Term Evolution, and 4G Mobile Systems” Cambridge University Press, 2008
4. EzioBiglieri and Robert Calderbank “MIMO Wireless Communications”, Cambridge
University Press, 2007.
5. David Tse and PramodViswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”,
Prentice Hall, 2003.
E BOOKS
1 https://www.sciencedirect.com/book/9780123735805/wireless-communications-and-
networking
2 https://link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007/978-981-13-1768-2_10
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/wireless-communication-technologies

2 https://academy.5g-courses.com/courses/towards-5g-online-course

215
 3 https://www.class-central.com/course/nptel-millimeter-wave-technology-7903

EMBEDDED C FOR 8051 AND ARM USING KEIL

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
MICROVERSION
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECC4458 DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CATEGORY
32nd ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
07.08.2021 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Course To familiarize the students with KEIL S/W for 8051 and ARM LPC1768 and develop the
Description Simple programs and interfacing applications
1. To install the Kiel S/W and performing basic programs.
2. To study the 8051 Microcontroller Architecture and Programming and performing
Course Basic Programming
Objective 3. To perform interfacing projects in 8051
4. To study ARM LPC1768 and Basic Programming
5. To perform interfacing projects in ARM LPC1768
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain the working of Kiel S/W and executing the basic programs.
2. Explain the Architecture and Programming in 8051 and executing higher level
Course
programs in 8052 using KIEL.
Outcome
3. Demonstrate the interfacing applications in 8051.
4. Interpret the architecture of ARM LPC1768 and to execute basic programs.
5. Exhibit the performance of interfacing applications with LPC1768.
Prerequisites: Digital System Design and Microprocessors
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-2 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-4 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1
CO-5 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 3 1

216
 1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: Basics of Embedded C (9L)
Introduction to embedded systems and microcontrollers-Embedded C program structure-
CO-1
Programming of Microcontroller using embedded C-Programming in KEIL IDE software-Basic
BTL-3
Programs in KEIL
MODULE 2: Embedded C for 8051 (9L)
8051 Microcontroller –Architecture – Features –Finding GCD and LCM - Generating delay CO-2
for the Timer without interrupt BTL-3
MODULE 3: Interfacing of 8051 (9L)
CO-3
Interfacing with LCD, Timer, Matrix Keyboard, Stepper Motor ,DC motor and Relay
BTL-3
MODULE 4: Embedded C Programs for ARM CORTEX M3 (9L)
ARM CORTEX M3-Instruction set architecture of ARM microcontroller, and assembly CO-4
language programming -LPC17678-KEIL µ Version for ARM – Basic Programs BTL-3
MODULE 5: Interfacing of ARM CORTEX M3 (9L)
CO-5
Interfacing LED, Buzzer and Switches - D/A and A/D converter, sensors and actuators
BTL-3
TEXT BOOKS
Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using
1.
Assembly and C –Muhammad, 2nd Edition, Pearson
2. ARM CORTEX M3 Technical Reference Manual
REFERENCE BOOKS
William Hohl, Christopher Hinds. (2015). ARM Assembly Language Fundamentals and
1
Techniques CRC Press , 2nd Edition
E BOOKS
ee.sharif.edu/~sakhtar3/books/The%208051%20Microcontroller%20Ayala/The%208051
1. %20Microcontroller%20Architecture,%20Programming%20and%20Applications
%201991.pdf
MOOC
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105193/

NON DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES

SEMESTER III

COURSE TITLE BASICS OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE
ECD4281 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CODE
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL

217
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test /
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

This course gives strong theoretical aspects of Analog communication, Digital Communication,
Course Network Protocols & topologies, Satellite communication, Optical fiber communication and their
Description Application & it is suitable for all branch engineering students to understand basic of
Communication.
1. To understand the concepts of analog communication and its applications.
2. To know the applications about digital communication.
Course
3. To identify different types of Network Protocols and OSI layer architectures.
Objective
4. To visualize the Satellite communication system and its uses…
5. To interpret the optical fiber communication concepts and its advantages.

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. Describe the concepts of analog communication and its applications.
Course 2. Enumerate the concepts of digital communication and its applications in communication
Outcome 3. Interpret about the network protocols, architecture and their applications.
4. Explain about the concepts of satellite communication system and its applications.
5. Describe the concepts of optical fiber communication system and its applications.

Prerequisites: communication systems

CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO-2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 2
CO-3 2 1 1 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO-4 2 1 1 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
CO-5 2 1 1 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: Analog Communication (6L)

Time and frequency domain representation of signals-amplitude modulation-demodulation,

frequency modulation-demodulation-applications CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Amplitude modulation, demodulation, frequency modulation, demodulation and applications

218
MODULE 2: Digital Communication (6L)

Pulse code modulation-Time division multiplexing-frequency division multiplexing- Frequency

shift keying- phase shift keying – applications CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Pulse code modulation, Multiplexing, Frequency, phase shift keying and applications

MODULE 3: Network Protocols (6L)

Network- types- LAN- MAN- WAN- Topologies- applications-ISO-OSI seven layer architecture
for WAN CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Network types, Topologies and OSI Layer architecture
MODULE 4: Satellite Communication (6L)
Satellite communication system-system elements-space segment-ground segment-uplink-
down link- transmission bands- orbits- geostationary satellites- applications
CO-4
Suggested Readings:
BTL-4
Satellite communication system, segment elements, transmission bands, geostationary
satellites and applications
MODULE 5: Optical Fiber Communication (6L)
Fiber optic communication system-transmission medium-total internal reflection-optical fiber
types-losses- optical receivers- applications CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Fiber optic communication system, losses, optical receivers and applications
TEXT BOOKS
1. Wayne Tomasi, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2001.
2 Roy Blake, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, Thomson Delmar, 2nd Edition, 2002.
Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, ‘The Industrial Electronics Handbook’, second edition,
3
Taylor & Francis, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. William Schweber, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
2. G. Kennedy, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002
3 Miller, ‘Modern Electronic Communication’, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.ece.ucsb.edu/wcsl/Publications/intro_comm_systems_madhow_jan2014b.pdf
2 https://www.slideshare.net/mohsensarakbi/introduction-to-communication-systems
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102059/
2. https://www.csun.edu/~skatz/katzpage/sdr_project/sdr/comm_intro_07_01_2010.pdf
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/principles_of_communication/

219
COURSE TITLE FUNDAMENTALS OF MATLAB PROGRAMMING CREDITS 2
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4282 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test /
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
MATLAB is the most popular and widely used programming languages for engineers
and scientists. The curriculum starts with the basics concepts and features and is
MATLAB for Beginners then goes to Variables and assignment operations, Manipulating
vectors and matrices, Linear Algebra, File Input/Output, User defined functions, Plotting
and then gradually lays emphasis on all the advanced topics like advanced plotting, user
Course
controlled input and output, relational and logical functions, Loop statements &
Description
vectorising codes, String Manipulations, Data Structures, Advanced mathematics,
Numerical techniques, Guided User Interface and Simulink. This course will provide a
solid reference for both experienced and those who are brand-new to MATLAB. By the
end of the course you can independently implement projects in MATLAB. This course
will ensure that you gain skills which will help you to find a job or get promotion.
1. To familiarize working with matlab environment and basic operations
2. To write programs with branching and looping statements
Course
3. To create and annotate the various plots
Objective
4. To solve polynomials and differential equations in MATLAB.
5. To work with Simulink models for different applications
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Familiarize the vector and matrix operations in MATLAB.
Course 2. Write script and function programs in MATLAB.
Outcome 3. Generate various types of plots in MATLAB.
4. Solve polynomials and differential equations in MATLAB.
5. Create Simulink models and GUIs in MATLAB.
Prerequisites: Basic of Linear Algebra, Basic Computers
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 - 1 3 - - - 2 2 - - 1 2

220
CO-2 2 2 - - 3 - - - 2 2 - - 1 3
CO-3 2 2 - - 3 - - - 2 2 - - 2 3
CO-4 2 2 2 - 3 - - - - 2 - - 1 3
CO-5 2 2 3 - 3 - - - - 2 - - 2 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB (6L)
Introduction: The MATLAB Environment, Help feature, Type of files in MATLAB, Uses of
MATLAB.
Constants, Variables and Expressions: Character set, Data Types, Constants and Variables,
Operators: arithmetic, relational and logical, Hierarchy of Operations, Built-in Functions. CO-1
Vectors & Matrices: Creating Vectors and Matrices, Operations on Vectors, Element-by- BTL-2
Element Array Operations, Binary Matrix Operations, Unary Matrix Operations,
Multidimensional Array, Structure arrays, cell arrays, String handling, Input & Output
Statements.
MODULE 2: PROGRAM WRITING & CONTROL STRUCTURES (6L)
Program Writing: MATLAB editor, Types of M-files, Function subprograms, errors and
warnings, Debugging. CO-2
Control structures: Branch control structures- if, if else, nested if, if- else if-else, switch, try & BTL-2
catch, break, continue, error. Loop control structures- for -while - nested for.
MODULE 3: PLOTS IN MATLAB (6L)
Basic 2D plots- plot, figure, label, Grid, Axis, entering Text, Line style, Markers, Subplot,
Multiple plots, log-log, semilog, polar, comet, fplot, ezplot, ezpolar, stem, bar, hist, pie, Graph CO-3
plotting in MATLAB using data of a text file or excel file. BTL-3
3D plots- plot3, bar3, pie3, stem3, mesh, surf, contour and contour3.
MODULE 4: POLYNOMIALS & DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (6L)
Polynomials: Entering A Polynomial, Polynomial Evaluation, Roots of A Polynomial,
Polynomial Addition and Subtraction, Polynomial Multiplication, Polynomial Division,
Formulation of Polynomial Equation, Polynomial Differentiation, Polynomial Integration, CO-4
Polynomial Curve Fitting. BTL-2
Differential equations: Ordinary Differential Equation Solvers, Calculus using Symbolic
Mathematics.
MODULE 5: SIMULINK AND GUI (6L)
SIMULINK- Modelling, Simulating a model, Using variables from MATLAB, Data Import &
Export, Creating subsystems. CO-5
GUI- Creating apps with GUIDE, adding components, applications of components, writing call BTL-2
back for the components.
TEXT BOOKS

221
 Rudra Pratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB” ,7th Edition, Oxford University Press,2016.
1.

Stephen J Chapman, “MATLAB programming for Engineers”, 5th edition, Cengage

2.
Learning,2016.
R.K Bansal, Manoj Sharma, A.K. Goel, “MATLAB and Its Applications in Engineering”,
3.
Pearson Eduction,2009.
Holly Moore, “MATLAB for Engineers”,4th edition, Pearson, 2012.
4.

REFERENCE BOOKS
Stephen J Chapman, “Essentials of MATLAB Programming” ,3rd edition, Cengage Learning,
1.
2018.
William J Palm III , “Introduction to MATLAB for engineers”,3rd edition, Mc-Graw Hill
2.
Education, 2010.
3. Agam Kumar Tyagi, Matlab and Simulink for Engineers, OUP India, 2011.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.goodreads.com/book/show/8503035-getting-started-with-matlab
MOOC
1. https://in.mathworks.com/videos.html
2. http://www.learningmatlab.com/videos/

COURSE TITLE FUNDAMENTALS OF BLUETOOTH TECHNOLOGY CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4283 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Bluetooth is a cable-replacement technology designed to wirelessly connect
Course peripherals, such as mice and mobile phones, to desktop or laptop computer and to
Description each other. It is an inexpensive, low-power, short-range radio-based technology. All
the basics, protocols and layers of this technology is explained in this course.
1. To study the fundamental concepts of Bluetooth module
2. To analyze the protocol operation
Course
3. To gain knowledge on Bluetooth host
Objective
4. To understand the layer functions available
5. To understand Zigbee Mac Series

222
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Know about the fundamental concepts of Bluetooth module
Course 2. Analyze the protocol operation in bluetooth module
Outcome 3. Understand and analyze the Bluetooth host
4. Analyze the various layer functions avilable
5. Comprehend on Zigbee Mac Series

Prerequisites: -
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - 2 - - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO-2 1 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO-3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO-4 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO-5 - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE I THE BLUETOOTH MODULE (6 L)
Introduction-overview - the Bluetooth module-antennas- Base band - Introduction-
Bluetooth device address –Masters, slaves, and Pico nets-system timing-physical links- CO-1
Bluetooth packet structure-logical channels-frequency hopping. BTL-2

MODULE II THE LINK CONTROLLER (6 L)

The link controller-link control protocol-link controller operation-Pico net, scatter net
CO-2
operation-master/slave role switching-base band/link controller architectural overview -
BTL-2
link manager-the host controller interface.
MODULE III THE BLUETOOTH HOST (6 L)
The bluetooth host-logical link control and adaptation protocol –RFCOMM- the service CO-3
discovery protocol BTL-3
MODULE IV LAYER FUNCTIONS (6 L)
Cross layer functions-Encryption and security-low power operations-controlling low power CO-4
modes-hold mode-sniff mode-park mode-quality of service-managing Bluetooth devices. BTL-2
MODULE V ZIGBEE NETOWRKS (6 L)
Zigbee communication basics – Zigbee network layers and their functions – Zigbee MAC CO-5
series BTL-2
TEXT BOOKS

223
 1. Jennifer Bray and Charles F Sturman, “Bluetooth: Connect Without Cables”, Pearson
Education, 2002.
2. Stahun Farahani, “Zigbee Wireless Networks and Transceivers”, Elsevier Ltd, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Jennifer Bray, Brain Senese, Gordon McNutt and Bill Munday, “Bluetooth Application
Developer’s Guide”, Syngress Media, 2001
2. Micheal Mille, “Discovering Bluetooth”, Sybex Incorporation, 2001.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.novelbits.io/introduction-to-bluetooth-low-energy-book/
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/smart-device-mobile-emerging-technologies
2. https://www.edx.org/course/real-time-bluetooth-networks-shape-the-world

COURSE TITLE BASICS OF NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4284 NDE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The objective of this course is to present sufficient background in both fuzzy and neural
network so that students in future can pursue advanced soft computing methodologies.
Course
This course combines knowledge, techniques, and methodologies from various sources,
Description
using techniques from neural networks and fuzzy set theory, As an extension, the
course uses the Neuro Fuzzy models for the complex engineering problems.
1. Develop the skills to gain a basic understanding of neural network theory and fuzzy
logic theory.
2. To introduce the basics of Neural Networks and essentials of Artificial Neural
Networks with Single Layer and Multilayer Feed Forward Networks.
3. Discuss neural networks and fuzzy systems, architectures, algorithms and
Course
applications, including Back-propagation, BAM, Hopfield network, Competitive
Objective
Learning, ART, SOFM, Fuzzy inference methods and expert systems.
4. Introduce the theory and applications of artificial neural network and fuzzy systems
to engineering applications with emphasis on image processing and control
5. Reveal different applications of these models to solve engineering and other
problems.

224
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Comprehend the concepts of feed forward neural networks
2. Analyze the various feedback networks.
Course 3. Understand the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems and fuzzy set
Outcome theory.
4. Comprehend the fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy logic and to design the fuzzy
control using genetic algorithm.
5. Analyze the application of fuzzy logic control to real time systems
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 2 - 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 2 -
CO-2 3 2 2 - 2 1 1 - - - - 1 2 -
CO-3 3 2 2 - 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 -
CO-4 2 2 1 - 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 -
CO-5 2 2 1 - 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: ARCHITECTURE OF NEURAL NETWORKS (6L)
Introduction –Biological neuron-Artificial neuron-Neuron modeling Learning rules-Single CO-1
layer-Multi layer feed forward network-Back propagation-Learning factors BTL-2
MODULE 2: BASIC NEURAL NETWORK TECHNIQUES (6L)
Back propagation neural net:standard back propagation-architecture algorithm- derivation
of learning rules- number of hidden layers--associative and other neural networks- hetro CO-2
associative memory neural net, auto associative net- Bidirectional associative memory- BTL-3
applications-Hopfield nets-Boltzman machine
MODULE 3: FUNDAMENTALS OF FUZZY LOGIC (6L)
Basic concepts: fuzzy set theory- basic concept of crisp sets and fuzzy sets- complements-
union intersection- combination of operation- general aggregation operations- fuzzy CO-3
relations-compatibility relations-orderings- morphisms- fuzzy relational equations-fuzzy set BTL-3
and systems
MODULE 4: FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL (6L)
Membership function – Knowledge base-Decision –making logic – Optimizations of
CO-4
membership function using neural networks-Adaptive fuzzy systems-Introduction to
BTL-3
generate to genetic algorithm
MODULE 5: APPLICATION OF FLC (6L)

225
 Fuzzy logic control-Inverted pendulum-Image processing-Home Heating system-Blood CO-5
pressure during anesthesia-Introduction to neuro fuzzy controller BTL-2
TEXT BOOKS
Kosko, B, “Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems: A Dynamical Approach to Machine Intelligence”,
1
PrenticeHall, NewDelhi, 2004.
Timothy J Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”,John Willey and Sons, West Sussex,
2
England, 2005.
3 T1. Kliryvan- Fuzzy System & Fuzzy logic Prentice Hall of India, First Edition.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jack M. Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, PWS Publishing Co., Boston, 2002.
Klir G.J. &Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, Uncertainty and Information”, Prentice –Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
2
Delhi, 2008
Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic Publishers Dordrecht,
3
2001.
4 J.M.Zurada, ―Introduction to artificial neural systems-Jaico Publication house,Delhi 1994.
VallusuRao and HayagvnaRao , ―C++ Neural network and fuzzy logic-BPB and Publication, New
5
Delhi,1996.
E BOOKS
1 https://dl.acm.org/doi/10.5555/550087
2 http://boente.eti.br/fuzzy/ebook-fuzzy-kazabov.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ge09/preview
2 https://freevideolectures.com/course/4246/nptel-fuzzy-logic-neural-networks

SEMESTER IV

COURSE TITLE NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4291 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

226
 This Course will start with a brief introduction to fuzzy sets. The differences between
fuzzy sets and crisp sets will be identified. Various terms used in the fuzzy sets and the
grammar of fuzzy sets will be discussed, in detail, with the help of some numerical
Course examples. The working principles of two most popular applications of fuzzy sets,
Description namely fuzzy reasoning and fuzzy clustering will be explained, and numerical examples
will be solved. Fundamentals of neural networks and various learning methods will
then be discussed. The method of evolving optimized fuzzy reasoning tools, neural
networks will be discussed with the help of some numerical examples.
1. To expose the students to the concepts of feed forward neural networks.
2. To provide adequate knowledge about feedback neural networks.
3. To teach about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems. To provide
Course adequate knowledge about fuzzy set theory.
Objective 4. To provide comprehensive knowledge of fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy
logic and to design the fuzzy control using genetic algorithm.
5. To provide adequate knowledge of application of fuzzy logic control to real time
systems.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Comprehend the concepts of feed forward neural networks.
2. Analyze the various feedback networks.
Course 3. Understand the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems and fuzzy set
Outcome theory.
4. Comprehend the fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy logic and to design the fuzzy
control using genetic algorithm
5. Analyze the application of fuzzy logic control to real time systems.
Prerequisites: - NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - 2 - - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO-2 1 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO-3 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO-4 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - -
CO-5 - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE I ARCHITECTURE (6 L)
Introduction – Biological neuron – Artificial neuron – Neuron modeling – Learning rules – CO-1
Single layer – Multi layer feed forward network – Back propagation – Learning factors. BTL-2
MODULE II NEURAL NETWORKS FOR CONTROL (6L)

227
Feedback networks – Discrete time hop field networks – Transient response of continuous
time networks – Applications of artificial neural network - Process identification – Neuro CO-2
controller for inverted pendulum. BTL-2

MODULE III FUZZY SYSTEMS (6 L)

CO-3
Classical sets – Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzification – Defuzzification – Fuzzy rules.
BTL-3
MODULE IV FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL (6 L)
Membership function – Knowledge base – Decision-making logic – Optimization of
CO-4
membership function using neural networks – Adaptive fuzzy system – Introduction to
BTL-2
genetic algorithm.
MODULE V APPLICATION OF FLC (6 L)
Fuzzy logic control – Inverted pendulum – Image processing – Home heating system – Blood CO-5
pressure during anesthesia – Introduction to neuro fuzzy controller. BTL-2
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jacek M. Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing home, 2002.

2. Timothy J. Ross, ‘Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications’, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Laurance Fausett, Englewood cliffs, N.J., ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks’, Pearson
Education, 1992.
2. H.J. Zimmermann, ‘Fuzzy Set Theory & its Applications’, Allied Publication Ltd., 1996.

3. Simon Haykin, ‘Neural Networks’, Pearson Education, 2003.

4. John Yen & Reza Langari, ‘Fuzzy Logic – Intelligence Control & Information’, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2003.
E BOOKS
1. http://neuralnetworksanddeeplearning.com/

FUNDAMENTALS OF MICROPROCESSORS AND

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 2
MICROCONTROLLERS
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4292 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project

228
 15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module provides the basic foundation about the architecture, instruction set and
addressing modes of 8086 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller. It covers the C
Course
programming for basic interfacing module using 8051. The later part of the module
Description
covers features and interfacing techniques using Arduino and Raspberry Pi system
design.
1. To illustrate the 8086 architecture and explain the 8086 instruction set.
2. To illustrate the 8086 architecture and explain the 8086 instruction set.
Course 3. To write C Programs for 8051 Microcontroller.
Objective 4. To familiarize the functionality of Arduino Uno and Interfacing.
5. To explain the functionality of Raspberry Pi and its real time audio and video
streaming application.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Articulate the architecture, instruction set of 8086 Microprocessor.
2. Explain the architecture and instruction set of 8051 Microcontroller.
Course 3. Develop C programs for 8051 Microcontroller arithmetic, logical operations and its
Outcome interfacing.
4. Examine the functionality of Arduino Uno and Interfacing.
5. Examine the functionality of Raspberry Pi and its real time audio and video
streaming application.
Prerequisites: - Digital Systems
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO PSO-1 PSO-2
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12
CO-1 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-2 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - 1 1
CO-3 2 1 1 - 2 - - - 1 - - - 2 1
CO-4 2 1 1 - 2 - - - 1 - - - 2 1
CO-5 2 2 1 - 2 - - - 1 - - - 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: 8086 Microprocessor (6L)
Microprocessor-8086 Functional block diagram –Interrupts – Instruction set- Addressing
Modes CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
8086 pin diagram and Timing Diagram
MODULE 2: 8051 Microcontroller (6L)

229
Differences between Microprocessor and Microcontroller-8051 Functional block diagram –
Instruction set- addressing modes CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
8086 Machine Cycle and Timing Diagram
MODULE 3: Programming and Interfacing (6L)
C programming-8051 arithmetic- logical operations- Interfacing- Keyboard-LCD-Stepper
motor CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
ADC and DAC Interface
MODULE 4: Arduino System design (6L)
Arduino Uno-Features-Signals-IDE-Interfacing-Keyboard -LED-LCD-Sensors
CO-4
Suggested Readings:
BTL-4
Arduino Uno signals, IDE and interfacing
MODULE 5: Raspberry Pi System design (6L)
Raspberry Pi Features-Signals-IDE- Real time audio Streaming- Real time Video Streaming
CO-5
Suggested Readings:
BTL-4
Raspberry Pi signals, Audio and Video streaming
TEXT BOOKS
M.A.Mazidi, J.C.Mazidi “Microcontroller and Embedded systems using Assembly & C”,
1.
Second Edition Pearson Education, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Embedded Systems: An integrated approach by. Lyla Das, Pearson publication, 2013.
2 Arduino Workshop: A hands on introduction with 65 projects by John Boxall, 2013.
E BOOKS
https://www.jntubook.com/microprocessors-and-microcontrollers-textbook-free-
1.
download/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IISc-
2
BANG/Microprocessors%20and%20Microcontrollers/New_index1.html

COURSE TITLE IOT BASED HEALTHCARE SYSTEMS CREDITS 2

COURSE
ECD4293 COURSE CATEGORY NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CODE
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME

230
 First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Test / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Healthcare facilities in modern age are key challenge especially in developing countries
Course where remote areas face lack of high-quality hospitals and medical experts. This course
Description facilitates novel and intelligent healthcare systems that are based on modern
technologies like Internet of things (IoT) and machine learning.
1. To familiarize the smart health system
2. To learn different protocol architectures and service model
Course
3. To adopt the health care services as per societal demand
Objective
4. To address the security and confidentiality threads
5. To develop a Patient monitoring system

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. Explain the concepts and scope of internet of things
Course 2. Illustrate IoT healthcare networks topology and architecture
Outcome 3. Classify IoT Healthcare Services and Applications.
4. Present IoT Healthcare security requirements and challenges
5. Develop a case study of IoT based patient monitoring system

Prerequisites: CSB231 - Cryptography and Network Security

CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 - 2 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO-2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - - - -
CO-3 - 2 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1
CO-4 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 -
CO-5 - - 3 - - 1 - - - 2 - - 1 3
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:- IoT Technology (6L)
Internet of things- vision-definition-scope- machine to entity-Smart-X Applications-Smart
health system CO-1
Suggested Reading: BTL-2
Machine to entity, Smart-X applications and Smart health system
MODULE 2:- Healthcare Networks (6L)

231
 Health care networks-network topology- intelligent healthcare gateway-network
architecture- protocol stack of WPAN-network platform- framework of a health
CO-2
information service model.
BTL-2
Suggested Reading:
Health care Network topology, architecture and platform
MODULE 3:- Services and Applications (6L)
Healthcare services - ambient assisted living - miot - adverse drug reaction - community
healthcare - wearable device access - embedded gateway configuration- healthcare
applications - glucose level sensing - electrocardiogram monitoring- blood pressure
CO-3
monitoring - body temperature monitoring - oxygen saturation monitoring - rehabilitation
BTL-3
system - medication management – wheel chair management
Suggested Reading:
Healthcare services and applications
MODULE 4:- Security issues (6L)
Security requirements- confidentiality- integrity- authentication- authorization- fault
tolerance- computational limitations- mobility- scalability- dynamic network topology-
intelligent collaborative security model. CO-4
Suggested Reading: BTL-3
Security requirements, dynamic network topology and intelligent collaborative security
model.
MODULE 5:- TeleHealth system (6L)
Telehealth-services- Telemedicine-Telemonitoring-Telesurgery-remote medical
education- benefits –case study of IoT based patient monitoring system CO-5
Suggested Reading: BTL-4
Telehealth services, benefits and case study of IoT based patient monitoring system
TEXT BOOKS
1. Arshdeep Bhagya, “Internet of things-a hands on approach”, universities press, 2015.
2. Peter Friess, “Internet of things”, River Publishers, 2014.
3. David Hanes,”IoT Fundamentals”, 1st , Kindle Edition, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Agus Kurniawan,”Smart Internet of Things Projects”, Packt publications, 2016.
David Niewolny, ‘Healthcare Implementations of the Internet of Things’, Freescale
2.
technology forum, 2014.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.oreilly.com/iot/free/
2. http://www.qorvo.com/design-hub/ebooks/internet-of-things-for-dummies
MOOC
1. http://www.oreilly.com/iot/free/
2. http://www.qorvo.com/design-hub/ebooks/internet-of-things-for-dummies
3. http://www.oreilly.com/iot/free/

232
 SEMESTER V

COURSE TITLE MOBILE COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING CREDITS 2

COURSE CODE ECD4381 COURSE CATEGORY NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Traditional mobile service was structured in a fashion similar to television broadcasting:
One very powerful transmitter located at the highest spot in an area would broadcast
in a radius of up to 50 kilometers. The cellular concept structured the mobile telephone
network in a different way increasing the coverage and connectivity. Each mobile uses
Course
a separate, temporary radio channel to talk to the cell site. The cell site talks to many
Description
mobiles at once, using one channel per mobile. The basic structure of mobile networks
includes telephone systems and radio services. The course provides an insight of the
different generations of mobile communication and techniques involved in
transmission.
1. To study the evolution of mobile communication and cellular concept.
2. To study the modulation techniques
Course
3. To familiarize with coding and multiple access techniques.
Objective
4. To understand the wireless networking standards
5. To study the architecture and features of advanced 3G systems
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Summarize the evolution of mobile communication and cellular concepts.
Course 2. Elaborate the concept of Bit error rate in Different modulation Techniques.
Outcome 3. Compare the different types of coding and reduction of the bit rate.
4. Compare the concepts of various wireless Networks.
5. Illustrate the architecture and features of advanced 3G systems

Prerequisites: -
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1

233
CO-2 2 2 1 - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1
CO-3 2 2 1 1 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-4 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1
CO-5 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – Overview of Cellular mobile communication and cellular concept (6L)

Overview to wireless communication: Evolution & Generation of mobile communication.

Existing mobile communication technology and current Status. Cellular Concept: Frequency
reuse, channel assignment, hand off, Interference and system Capacity, tracking and grade CO-1
of service, Improving Coverage and capacity in Cellular systems BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Evolution of wireless communication

MODULE 2: Modulation Techniques (6L)

Modulation Techniques: Minimum Shift Keying, Gauss ion MSK, M-ary QAM, M-ary
FSK,MIMO-OFDM CO-2
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Analog modulation, Digital modulation techniques.
MODULE 3: Coding and Multiple Access schemes (6L)
Coding: Vocoders, Linear Predictive Coders, Selection of Speech Coders for Mobile
Communication, GSM Codec, RS codes for CDPD. Multiple Access Techniques: FDMA, TDMA,
CO-3
CDMA, SDMA, Capacity of Cellular CDMA and SDMA.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Coding techniques
MODULE 4: Wireless Networks and Standards (6L)
Second and Third Generation Wireless Networks and Standards, WLL, Bluetooth, AMPS,
GSM, VoIP service for Mobile Networks, GPRS,IS-95 and DECT. CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
First generation mobile communication networks
MODULE 5: Beyond 3G Mobile Communication (6L)
Architectures, Operations, Features and application of Wi-Fi, Wi-Max, LTE
CO-5
Suggested Readings:
BTL-3
Architecture of wireless networks
TEXT BOOKS
T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice”, Second Edition,
1.
Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition 2013
2 Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Person Education – 2003, 2nd Edition
REFERENCE BOOKS

234
 1. R. Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology”, Thomson Delmar, 2003.
W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications”, Second
2.
Edition, McGraw-Hill International, 1998.
3. Stephen G. Wilson, “Digital Modulation and Coding”, Pearson Education, 1995.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.freebookcentre.net/mobile-technology/mobile-technology-books.html
2. Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1. nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/38

COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO DATA COMMUNICATION CREDITS 2

COURSE COURSE
ECD4382 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24 th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course teaches the design and implementation techniques essential for engineering
robust networks. Topics include networking principles, Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol, naming and addressing (Domain Name System), data
Course
encoding/decoding techniques, link layer protocols, routing protocols, transport layer
Description
services, congestion control, quality of service, network services, programmable routers and
overlay networks, wireless and mobile networking, security in computer networks,
multimedia networking, and network management.
The students will be able to
1. Build an understanding of the fundamental concepts of data communication and
computer networking.
Course
2. Understand how errors detected and corrected that occur in transmission
Objective
3. Know about routing mechanisms and different routing protocols
4. Understand transport layer functions
5. Know about different application layer protocols

235
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. To describe the basic concept of communications and its paradigms.
2. To identify a suitable transmission media through an error free Communication network
for the given specifications
Course
3. To discuss the suitable protocol suite for a network based data communication for the
Outcome
specified functions.
4. To analyze the characteristics of routing and process delivery mechanisms with the
concerned QoS parameters.
5. To describe the popular application layer protocols in the Internet.
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO-2 3 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO-3 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - - 3 - - 2 1
CO-4 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1
CO-5 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – FUNDAMENTALS OF DATA COMMUNICATION (6L)
Data Representation – Direction of Data flow – Networks – Categories of Network –
Topologies – Basics of Packet switching and Circuit switching. Type of services- Virtual circuit CO-1
and Datagrams approach BTL-2
Suggested reading- Broadband services
MODULE 2 – TRANSMISSION MEDIA AND ERROR DETECTION CONCEPTS (6L)
Transmission Media- basic Guided (Twisted Pair, Co-axial, Fibre optics) & Wireless Media
types and their characteristics. RS 232/ EIA 232 / USB Interfaces. Bandwidth utilization:
CO-2
Multiplexing and Spreading. Transmission error -Redundancy – Detection and Correction
BTL-2
mechanisms– Parity – CRC – Hamming code.
Suggested reading- Error control mechanisms
MODULE 3 – PROTOCOLS AND STANDARDS (6L)
Standards – Layer Architecture – ISO/OSI reference model – Overview of TCP/IP stack
architecture, LAN: Ethernet IEEE Standards- IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.5- Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11, CO-3
IEEE 802.15. BTL-3
Suggested reading- Comparative performance analysis of Wired and Wireless Transmission
MODULE 4 – IP NETWORK & TRANSPORT FUNCTIONS (6L)

236
IP addressing methods– Sub-netting – Routing – Distance Vector and Link State Routing
concepts – Process delivery protocols- User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission CO-4
Control Protocol (TCP) – QOS BTL-2
Suggested reading- QOS improvement techniques

MODULE 5 – PRACTICAL NETWORK APPLICATIONS (6L)

Domain Name Space (DNS) – Services provided –Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) –
CO-5
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) –World Wide Web (WWW) – Client Server Architecture.
BTL-2
Suggested reading- Socket Programming
TEXT BOOKS
Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 4th Edition,
1.
2006
Larry L. Peterson & Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks, A systems approach”, Morgan
2.
Kaufmann Publication, 5th Edition, 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS
Data and Computer Communications,G.S.Hura and M.Singhal,CRC Press,Taylor and Francis
1.
Group, 2004.
An Engineering Approach to Computer Networks-S.Keshav,2nd Edition,Pearson Education,
2.
2001
3. Computer Networks,A.S.Tanenbaum,4th edition,Pearson education, 2011
4. Understanding communications and Networks,3rd Edition, W.A.Shay,Cengage Learning, 2003.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/compsci/forouzan/frontmatter.pdf
http://dpcvqz.chatrm.ru/imge?key=free+download+data+communication+and+networking+
2.
forouzan+5th+edition
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/
2. https://edurev.in/courses/14_Computer-Networks-and-Communication-by-NPTEL

COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO ARDUINO AND ITS APPLICATIONS CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4383 NDE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project

237
 15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This module enables the students to design and implement real word applications.
Arduino receives the information from sensors and can control the world around it by
Course
adjusting lights, motors and other actuators. This module describes the digital and
Description
analog Input/output devices and how to interface them with Arduino. This also
introduces the use of software libraries with an Arduino sketch.

1. To provide knowledge of different Smart system applications

Course 2. To familiarize students with Arduino as IDE, Programming language and platform
Objective 3. To provide knowledge of Arduino boards and basic components.
4. To develop skills to design and implement various smart system application.

Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to

1. Summarize the embedded system characteristics and illustrate some embedded
system applications.
Course
2. Classify and compare different types of 8-bit Microcontroller
Outcome
3. Demonstrate the Arduino development board and its functions.
4. Analyze the interfacing of Digital and Analog I/O devices with Arduino
5. Develop different control and automation systems with Arduino
Prerequisites: Basics of C and C++, Microcontroller and Electronic basics
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO-2 3 1 2 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO-3 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - - 3 - - 2 1
CO-4 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1
CO-5 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - - 3 3 3 3 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: OVERVIEW OF EMBEDDED SYSTEM (6L)
Embedded System Characteristics, Examples: Washing Machine, Chocolate Vending CO-1
Machine, Room Temperature Controller, Characteristics of Real Time Operating System BTL-2
MODULE 2: 8-BIT MICROCONTROLLERS ARCHITECTURE (ATMEGA 8,AVR) (6L)

Microcontroller Types: PIC, AVR, ARM: features and applications, AVR microcontroller: Types
CO-2
, Architecture, Internal Architectural ,Block diagram of controller (At mega 8), Functions of
BTL-2
each pins of AT mega, 6-channel ADC Working, Boot loader Circuit.

MODULE 3: OPEN SOURCE EMBEDDED DEVELOPMENT BOARD (ARDUINO) (6L)

238
Arduino: Birth, Open Source community, Functional Block Diagram of Arduino, Functions of
each Pin of Arduino, Arduino Development Board diagram (including different blocks only): CO-3
IDE, I/O Functions, Looping Techniques, Decision Making Techniques, Programming of an BTL-3
Arduino (Arduino ISP), Basic Circuit for Arduino.
MODULE 4: INTERFACE DIGITAL AND ANALOG I/O DEVICES (ARDUINO INTERFACING) (6L)
Basic Interfacing and I/O Concept, Interfacing LED,Switch,7seg LED its and Code, Interfacing
CO-4
POT,LM35,Acelerometer (ADXL3C5C) and its Code, Interfacing DC motor and its Code
BTL-4
,Interfacing 16x2 LCD and its code.
MODULE 5: EMBEDDED SYSTEM APPLICATIONS (ARDUINO) (6L)
Motor Driver L293D, IR Sensor, Code for Line Follower Robot, Interfacing Accelerometer with
Arduino, Record Gestures, Code For Accelerometer based Robot, Interfacing of RF Tx/RF Rx CO-5
with Arduino, Interfacing of Relay Driver ULN2803 with Arduino, Code for Home automation BTL-4
and its Control, Interfacing of USB-UART.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Simon Monk, “30 Arduino Projects for Evil Genius “McGraw-Hill Professional.

2. Michael McRoberts, Beginning Arduino, “Technology in Action ,2010

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Dale Wheat, “Arduino Internas”, Technology in Action, 2012
John-david, Warren Josh Adams, Harald Molle, “Arduino Robotics, Technology in Action,
2.
2008
E BOOKS
1. http://www.introtoarduino.com/downloads/IntroArduinoBook.pdf
http://phylab.fudan.edu.cn/lib/exe/fetch.php?media=yuandi:arduino:
2.
getting_started_with_arduino_v2.pdf
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/arduino
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/arduino-platform

COURSE TITLE MACHNE LEARNING CREDITS 2

COURSE COURSE
ECD4384 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

239
 Course To understand the importance of different types of Machine learning algorithms, data
Description dimensionality reduction techniques and neural networks.
1. To comprehend the concept of supervised and unsupervised learning techniques
2. To apply different dimensionality reduction techniques
Course 3. To understand the concepts of different data cross validation and Bay’s classifier
Objective 4. To analyze the performance of various machine learning techniques features for
training machine learning algorithms
5. To implement different Markov models and basic problems of HMMs
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Differentiate various learning approaches, and to interpret the concepts of
supervised learning.
2. Compare the different dimensionality reduction techniques.
Course 3. Apply theoretical foundations of decision trees to identify best split and Bayesian
Outcome classifier to label data points.
4. Illustrate the working of classifier models like SVM, Neural Networks and identify
classifier model for typical machine learning applications.
5. Identify the state sequence and evaluate a sequence emission probability from a
given HMM.
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 - 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 2
CO-2 2 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO-3 2 3 - 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 1 2
CO-4 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 2
CO-5 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (6L)
Introduction to Machine Learning, Examples of Machine Learning applications - Learning
associations, Classification, Regression, Unsupervised Learning, Reinforcement Learning.
Supervised learning- Input representation, Hypothesis class, Version space, Vapnik- CO-1
Chervonenkis (VC) Dimension. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Evaluation of Machine learning.
MODULE 2: REDUCTION TECHNIQUES (6L)

240
 Probably Approximately Learning (PAC), Noise, Learning Multiple classes, Model Selection
and Generalization, Dimensionality reduction- Subset selection, Principle Component
CO-2
Analysis.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Data dimensionality reduction and advantages.
MODULE 3: INDUCTIVE CLASSIFICATION (6L)
Classification- Cross validation and re-sampling methods- Kfold cross validation, Boot
strapping, Measuring classifier performance- Precision, recall, ROC curves. Bayes Theorem,
CO-3
Bayesian classifier, Maximum Likelihood estimation, Density functions, Regression.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Cross validation and Bay’s theorem
MODULE 4: TREE AND PROBABILISTIC MODELS (6L)
Decision Trees- Entropy, Information Gain, Tree construction, ID3, Issues in Decision Tree
learning- Avoiding Over-fitting, Reduced Error Pruning, The problem of Missing Attributes,
Gain Ratio, Classification by Regression (CART), Neural Networks- The Perceptron, Activation CO-4
Functions, Training Feed Forward Network by Back Propagation. BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Decision tress, Neural network, handling of over and under fitting
MODULE 5: SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES AND LANGUAGE LEARNING 6L
Kernel Machines - Support Vector Machine - Optimal Separating hyper plane, Softmargin
hyperplane, Kernel trick, Kernel functions. Discrete Markov Processes, Hidden Markov
models, Three basic problems of HMMs - Evaluation problem, finding state sequence,
CO-5
Learning model parameters. Combining multiple learners, Ways to achieve diversity, Model
BTL-4
combination schemes, Voting, Bagging, Booting.
Suggested Readings:
Hyper planes, SVM and Markov models.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Christopher M. Bishop, Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Springer, 2006.
Ethem Alpayidin, Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and machine
2.
Learning), MIT Press, 2004
3. Margaret H. Dunham, Data Mining: Introductory and Advanced Topics, Pearson, 2006
Ryszard S. Michalski, Jaime G. Carbonell, and Tom M. Mitchell, Machine Learning : An
4.
Artificial Intelligence Approach, Tioga Publishing Company
Stephen Marsland, ―Machine Learning – An Algorithmic Perspective‖, Second Edition,
5.
Chapman and Hall/CRC Machine Learning and Pattern Recognition Series, 2014.
6. Tom M Mitchell, ―Machine Learning‖, First Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Peter Flach, ―Machine Learning: The Art and Science of Algorithms that Make Sense of
1.
Data‖, First Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2012.

241
 Jason Bell, ―Machine learning – Hands on for Developers and Technical Professionals‖,
2.
First Edition, Wiley, 2014
Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning 3e (Adaptive Computation and
3.
Machine Learning Series)‖, Third Edition, MIT Press, 2014
E BOOKS
http://users.isr.ist.utl.pt/~wurmd/Livros/school/Bishop%20-
1. %20Pattern%20Recognition%20And%20Machine%20Learning%20-
%20Springer%20%202006.pdf
MOOC
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs85/preview

COURSE TITLE MATLAB PROGRAMMING FOR ENGINEERS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECD4387 COURSE CATEGORY NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
Version 1.0 Approval Details LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Surprise
Seminar/
Periodical Periodical Test / Attendance ESE
Assignments/ Project
Assessment Assessment Quiz
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

Demonstrate knowledge and basic understanding of MATLAB, including popular

Course
toolboxes. Concepts covered include basic use, graphical representations and tips for
Description
designing and implementing MATLAB code.

This module describes the specific features of MATLAB that are useful for engineering
Course
classes. MATLAB sessions are used with one main goal: to allow students to become
Objective
familiar with computer software (e.g., MATLAB) to solve application problems.
Upon completion students will be able to
1. Familiarize the vector and matrix operations in MATLAB.
Course 2. Write script and function programs in MATLAB.
Outcome 3. Generate various types of plots in MATLAB.
4. Solve polynomials and differential equations in MATLAB.
5. Create Simulink models and GUIs in MATLAB.
Prerequisites : NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 2 2 1 - 1

242
CO-2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 - 2

CO-3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 1 2 1

CO-4 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 2
CO-5 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 3 1 3 1 - 1
1: Strongly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Weakly related
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB (9 L)
Introduction: The MATLAB Environment, Help feature, Type of files in MATLAB, Uses of
MATLAB.
Constants, Variables and Expressions: Character set, Data Types, Constants and Variables,
Operators: arithmetic, relational and logical, Hierarchy of Operations, Built-in Functions. CO-1
Vectors & Matrices: Creating Vectors and Matrices, Operations on Vectors, Element-by- BTL-2
Element Array Operations, Binary Matrix Operations, Unary Matrix Operations,
Multidimensional Array, Structure arrays, cell arrays, String handling, Input & Output
Statements.
MODULE 2 – PROGRAM WRITING & CONTROL STRUCTURES (9L)
Program Writing: MATLAB editor, Types of M-files, Function subprograms, errors and
warnings, Debugging. CO-2
Control structures: Branch control structures- if, if else, nested if, if- else if-else, switch, BTL-3
try & catch, break, continue, error. Loop control structures- for -while - nested for.
MODULE 3 – PLOTS IN MATLAB (9L)
Basic 2D plots- plot, figure, label, Grid, Axis, entering Text, Line style, Markers, Subplot,
Multiple plots, log-log, semilog, polar, comet, fplot, ezplot, ezpolar, stem, bar, hist, pie, CO-3
Graph plotting in MATLAB using data of a text file or excel file. BTL-4
3D plots- plot3, bar3, pie3, stem3, mesh, surf, contour and contour3.
MODULE 4 – POLYNOMIALS & DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9L)
Polynomials: Entering A Polynomial, Polynomial Evaluation, Roots of A Polynomial,
Polynomial Addition and Subtraction, Polynomial Multiplication, Polynomial Division,
Formulation of Polynomial Equation, Polynomial Differentiation, Polynomial Integration, CO-4
Polynomial Curve Fitting. BTL-4
Differential equations: Ordinary Differential Equation Solvers, Calculus using Symbolic
Mathematics.
MODULE 5 – SIMULINK AND GUI (9L)
SIMULINK- Modelling, Simulating a model, Using variables from MATLAB, Data Import &
Export, Creating subsystems. CO-5
GUI- Creating apps with GUIDE, adding components, applications of components, writing BTL-5
call back for the components.
TEXT BOOKS

243
 1 Rudra Pratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB” ,7th Edition, Oxford University Press,2016.
2 Stephen J Chapman, “MATLAB programming for Engineers”, 5th edition, Cengage Learning,2016.
3 R.K Bansal, Manoj Sharma, A.K. Goel, “MATLAB and Its Applications in Engineering”, Pearson
Eduction,2009.
4 Holly Moore, “MATLAB for Engineers”,4th edition, Pearson, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Stephen J Chapman, “Essentials of MATLAB Programming” ,3rd edition, Cengage Learning, 2018.
William J Palm III , “Introduction to MATLAB for engineers”,3rd edition, Mc-Graw Hill Education,
2
2010.
3 Agam Kumar Tyagi, Matlab and Simulink for Engineers, OUP India, 2011.
E BOOKS
1 Rudra Pratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB”, Oxford University Press.
MOOC
1 https://in.mathworks.com/videos.html
2 http://www.learningmatlab.com/videos/

SEMESTER VI

COURSE TITLE IMAGE PROCESSING AND PATTERN RECOGNITION CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4391 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Course Image processing and pattern recognition subject deals with knowledge in image
Description processing details ,segmentation process, pattern recognition tools and application
1. To get adequate background knowledge about image processing.
2. To get adequate background knowledge in image pre-processing techniques.
Course 3. To get practical knowledge and skills about image segmentation methods and
Objective morphology
4. To get basic knowledge and skills about pattern recognition tools.
5. To get an image processing and pattern recognition application.

244
 1. Able to get adequate background knowledge about image processing
2. Able to get adequate background knowledge in image pre-processing
techniques.
Course 3. Able to get practical knowledge and skills about image segmentation methods
Outcome and morphology
4. Able to get basic knowledge and skills about pattern recognition tools.
5. Able to Get necessary knowledge to design and implement a prototype of an
image processing and pattern recognition application
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO-2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 - - - -
CO-3 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
CO-4 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO-5 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1:Digital Image fundamentals (6L)
Elements of visual perception, steps in digital image processing, applications of image
processing, image function, image representation, basic relationship between pixels, CO-1
sampling, quantization, color images, image quality, noise image. BTL-2
Suggested Reading: Metrics and topological properties of digital images
MODULE 2: Image Preprocessing (6L)
Pixel brightness transformation, position dependent brightness correction, gray scale
transformation; geometric transformation, local pre-processing, spatial filtering:
smoothing, sharpening filters, edge detectors, zero-crossing, various edge detection CO-2
methods, parametric images, local preprocessing and adaptive neighborhood BTL-2
preprocessing, image restoration- in the presence of noise only spatial filtering.
Suggested Reading: Frequency domain filters: smoothing, sharpening filters
MODULE 3: Image Segmentation & Mathematical Morphology (6L)
Threshold detection methods, optimal thresholding, global thresholding, adaptive
thresholding, edge based image segmentation- edge linking and boundary detection, region
CO-3
based segmentation. Basic morphological concepts, four morphological principles, binary
BTL-3
dilation, erosion, thinning and skeleton algorithms; Morphological segmentation.
Suggested Reading: Hit or miss transformation, opening and closing.
MODULE 4: Basics of Pattern Recognition & Unsupervised Learning (6L)

245
Pattern Recognition Fundamentals Basic Concepts of pattern recognition, Fundamental
problems in pattern recognition system, design concepts and methodologies. Exarrfe of
automatic pattern recognition systems. a simple automatic pattern recognition model. CO-4
Unsupervised learning and clustering, criterion functions for clustering, K-means and BTL-2
hierarchical clustering, cluster validation.
Suggested Reading: Bayesian decision theory, classifiers, discriminant functions
MODULE 5: Propagation and Detection of Radar Signals (6L)
Maximum likelihood estimation, expectation – maximization method, Bayesian
estimation.K-nearest neighbor method, linear discriminant functions based classifiers, CO-5
support vector machines. BTL-2
Suggested Reading: Gaussian mixture models
TEXT BOOKS
1. A.K. Jain, ―Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing‖, PHI, 1998
REFERENCE BOOKS
Earl Gose, Richard Johnsonbaugh, ―Pattern Recognition and Image Analysis‖, 1st Edition,
1.
Prentice Hall of India Private limited, 2009.
Millan Sonka, Vaclav Hiavac, Roger Boyle, ―Image Processing Analysis and Machine
2.
Vision‖, 3rd Edition, CL Engineering, 2013.
E BOOKS
http://www.engineeringbookspdf.com/digital-image-processing-6th-revised-and-
1.
extended-edition/
MOOC
1. https://www.coursera.org/courses?languages=en&query=pattern+recognition
2. http://handbook.uts.edu.au/subjects/details/31256.html

COURSE TITLE RADAR AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATION CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4392 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

246
 This module gives a introduction about various radars and their working principle.
Course The final part deals with optical communication, optical fiber modes configuration and
Description various signal degradation factors associated with optical fibers. It covers optical
sources and receivers.
1.To derive the radar range equation
2.To study and categorize various tracking radars
Course
3.To study the different structures of optical fibers
Objective
4.To calculate the quantum efficiency of optical sources and detectors
5.To design the fiber optical system
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1.Summarize the working principles of radar and derive the radar range equation
Course 2. Examine the different types of radars and categorize various tracking radars
Outcome 3.Analyse the different structures of optical fibers and identify the various losses
4. Examine the quantum efficiency of optical sources and detectors
5. Interpret the design considerations of fiber optical system
Prerequisites: -
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
CO-2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO-4 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO-5 - - 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO RADAR 6L
Basic radar, Simple form of radar equation, Radar block diagram, Radar frequencies,
Application of radar. Radar Equation- Discussion, Detection of signals in noise, Receiver CO-1
noise and signal-to-noise ratio, Probability density functions, Probability of detection and BTL-2
false alarm, Integration of radar pulses
MODULE 2: DOPPLER AND MTI RADAR 6L

Introduction, Delay-line cancelers, Staggered pulse repetition frequencies, Doppler filter CO-2
banks, Digital MTI Processing, Pulse Doppler radar BTL-2

MODULE 3: OVERVIEW OF OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATIONS 6L

Motivations for light wave communications, Optical spectral bands, Fundamental data CO-3
communication concepts, Network information rates, WDM concepts, Key elements of BTL-3

247
 optical fiber systems. Optical fibers: Structures, waveguiding- Nature of light, Basic optical
laws and definition, Optical fiber modes and configurations, Mode theory for circular
waveguides, Single-mode fibers, Graded-index fiber structure.
MODULE 4: SIGNAL DEGRADATION IN OPTICAL FIBERS 6L
Attenuation, Signal distortion in fibers, Characteristics of single-mode fibers. Optical CO-4
sources- Light-emitting diodes, Laser diodes. BTL-2
MODULE 5: OVERVIEW ON PHOTODETECTORS 6L
Photodetectors- Physical Principles of photodiodes, Photodetector noise, Detector response
CO-5
time, Avalanche multiplication noise, Structure of InGaAs APDs, Temperature effect on
BTL-2
avalanche gain, Comparison of photodetectors.
TEXT BOOKS
Merrill I. Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2001.
1.

G. Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2

REFERENCE BOOKS
Merrill I. Skolnik, “Radar Handbook”, second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1990.
1.

G.P.Agarwal, “Fiber Optic Communiacation Systems”, Third Edition, Wiley, 2002.

2.

COURSE TITLE FUNDAMENTALS OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS CREDITS 2

COURSE COURSE
ECD4393 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CODE CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-4
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
The course will provide students with an understanding of wireless sensors networks enable
them to recognize the wide range of applicability of these networks and provide them with
an understanding of the major design issues including topics such as protocol mechanisms
Course and resource constrains. Wireless networks are set up dynamically, for a short time and
Description limited purpose and without using any fixed network infrastructure like base station, access
point etc. Important application area includes the provision of networking facilities to human
operators in disaster areas or in areas with no infrastructure. Key design challenges include
the need for self-organization and the support for mobility between the involved nodes.

248
 1. To Interpret the basic wireless sensor technology and its applications
2. To Explain the MAC protocols of WSN.
Course
3. To Analyze the challenges in designing routing protocols and routing techniques in WSN
Objective
4. To summarize the operating system of WSN and its components
5. To Outline the working models and performance of a WSN
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Explain sensor networks and emerging technologies
2. Describe the node and network architecture of sensor nodes and its execution
environment.
Course 3. Elaborate the concepts of communication, MAC, routing protocols and also study about
Outcome the naming and addressing in WSN
4. Comprehend topology control and clustering in networks with timing synchronization for
localization services with sensor tasking and control
5. Differentiate sensor node hardware and software platforms and understand the
simulation and programming techniques
Prerequisites:
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-2 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-3 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-4 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-5 2 - - 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS (6L)
Challenges for Wireless Sensor Networks, Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor
Networks. CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks
MODULE 2: ARCHITECTURES (6L)

Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes ,

Operating Systems and Execution Environments, Network Architecture -Sensor Network
CO-2
Scenarios, Optimization Goals and Figures of Merit, Gateway Concepts.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks

249
MODULE 3: NETWORKING SENSOR (6L)
Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations, MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor
Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols And Wakeup Concepts - S-MAC , The Mediation Device
Protocol, Wakeup Radio Concepts, Address and Name Management, Assignment of MAC
CO-3
Addresses, Routing Protocols- Energy-Efficient Routing, Geographic Routing.
BTL-4
Suggested Readings:
Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks- Technology,
Protocols, And Applications”, John Wiley, 2007
MODULE 4: INFRASTRUCTURE ESTABLISHMENT (6L)
Topology Control, Clustering, Time Synchronization, Localization and Positioning, Sensor
Tasking and Control. CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003
MODULE 5: SENSOR NETWORK PLATFORMS AND TOOLS (6L)
Sensor Node Hardware – Berkeley Motes, Programming Challenges, Node-level software
platforms, Node-level Simulators, State-centric programming, Case study CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-4
Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003
TEXT BOOKS
Holger Karl & Andreas Willig, " Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor Networks" ,
1.
John Wiley, 2005.
Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks- An Information Processing
2.
Approach", Elsevier, 2007
REFERENCE BOOKS
Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks- Technology,
1.
Protocols, And Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.
2. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003
E BOOKS
1. http://image.sciencenet.cn/olddata/kexue.com.cn/bbs/upload/12615WSN-2007.pdf
2. http://doktora.kirbas.com/Kitaplar/Wireless%20Sensor%20Networks%20(Akyildiz).pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105160/21
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105160/
3 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/114106035/37

PROJECT PLANNING AND ORGANIZATION FOR

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 2
ENGINEERS
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4397 NDE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY

250
 24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment / Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Project planning and organization helps an engineer to start the career in a project
assigned to him and prepare for any difficult work situation that might be encountered.
It's a temporary endeavor undertaken to create a unique product, service or result. This
Course
course helps the student to plan, prepare, organize and manage a project as a skillful
Description
engineer. It helps and guides the step by step procedure to formulate a problem,
organize it, execute and accomplish it successfully. The course will also help the students
in carrying out the final year project successfully.
1. To develop project scope and methodology while considering factors such as
customer requirements and internal/external goals
2. To organize the selection and initiation of individual projects by understanding the
Course
concepts of project management.
Objective
3. To construct plans relevantly to achieve the project's goals
4. To comprehend the project procurement process
5. To understand the various concepts involved in Project Consulting
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline the scope, cost, timing, and quality of the project, at all times focused on
project success as defined by project stakeholders
2. Demonstrate effective organizational leadership skills for managing projects,
Course project teams, and stakeholders.
Outcome 3. Make use of project planning methods to accurately forecast project costs,
timelines, and quality in order to achieve the desired outcome in the project.
4. Develop a tender document for the purpose of project procurement
5. Describe the client objectives and facilitate appropriate consulting for design and
production services.
Prerequisites: NIL
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 - -
CO-2 1 1 1 0 0 2 1 2 3 3 3 3 - -
CO-3 1 1 1 0 0 2 1 2 3 3 3 3 - -
CO-4 1 1 1 0 0 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 - -

251
CO-5 1 1 1 0 0 2 2 1 3 3 3 3 - -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO PROJECTS (6L)
Introduction to Projects: Project Team- Purpose and Scope of a Project- Project Work
Methodology- Project Contracting Types- Characteristics and Categories of a Project- Project
CO-1
Structure
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Project Quality control
MODULE 2: PROJECT MANAGEMENT (6L)
Definition of Project Management, Management Functions, Project Authority and
Responsibility, Role and Responsibilities of a Project Manager, Types of Project
CO-2
Organization. Predictability: Definition and Concept, Predictability in a Project
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Codes and standards
MODULE 3: PROJECT PLANNING AND SCHEDULING (6L)
Project Life Cycle: Statement of Work (SOW), Project Specifications. Project Planning. Project
Scheduling: Work Breakdown Structure, Gantt Chart, Program Evaluation and Review
CO-3
Technique (PERT), Critical Path Method (CPM), Differentiation between PERT and CPM.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Project Network Analysis
MODULE 4: PROJECT PROCUREMENT ENGINEERING (6L)
Procurement Process- Preparation of Tender Documents: Tender Process- Procedure for
Submisssion of Bids-Cost of the Tender. Tender Document: Content of the Tender
Document- Clarification of Tender Document,-Amendment in the Tender Document.- CO-4
Preparation of Bids BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Formats and Signing of Bids
MODULE 5: PROJECT CONSULTING (6L)
Consulting-Definition-Need for Consultants-Scope of Management Consulting- Consulting
Process,-Main types of Consulting Organizations-Customer Client Relationship-Defining
Expectations and Roles-Client and the Consultant system- Critical Dimensions of consultant CO-5
client relationship- Behavioural role of consultants- Case Study BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Managing a consulting firm
TEXT BOOKS
Dilip N Pawar,Dattatray K Nikam, “Fundamentals of Project Planning and Engineering”, S
1.
Penram International Publishing, Mumbai, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Gary R Heerkens, “Project Management”, McGraw Hill, 2002.

252
 Milan Kubr, “Management Consulting A Guide to the Profession”, ILO Publications,
2.
Geneva,Switzerland,2002.4th Edition
E BOOKS
1. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/9781119197508
2. https://bookboon.com/en/projectmanagement-ebook
MOOC
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110104073/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110107081/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105106149/

SEMESTER VII

COURSE TITLE FUNDAMENTALS OF SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO CREDITS 2

COURSE
ECD4481 COURSE CATEGORY NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CODE
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Seminar/
Second Periodical Surprise Test /
Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Quiz
Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives a strong theoretical and Practical foundation for Engineering concepts about
Course benefits of Software Defined Radio, its hardware and software architecture, design of trans-
Description receiver structure to understand the different types of its application in different areas of
communication.
Course
To provide knowledge of fundamental and state-of the art concepts in software defined radio.
Objective
Student will be able to
1.Explain the Characteristics and benefits of a Software Radio
Course 2.Comprehend the basic SDR architectures and their functions
Outcome 3. Discuss the structural and behavior of both Transmitter and Receiver
4. Differentiate the function of Key Hardware devices
5. Summarize the need of smart antennas for SDR
Prerequisites: -
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

253
CO-1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO-2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-3 - - 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-4 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO-5 - - - - - - 2 - - - - - 2 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1 – SDR INTRODUCTION (6L)

Introduction to Software Defined Radio- the Need for Software Radios, Characteristics and CO-1
benefits of a Software Radio- SDR concepts, history and Design principles. BTL-2
MODULE 2 – ARCHITECTURE (6L)
Ideal SDR architecture- SDR Based End to- End Communication. 2G Radio Architectures Hybrid
CO-2
Radio Architecture- Basic SDR Block Diagram- Digital Frequency Conversion Partitioning-
BTL-2
Operating Environment (OE).
MODULE 3 –FRONT END TECHNOLOGY (6L)
Radio Frequency translation, Transmitter and Receiver specifications & Architecture, -
CO-3
Architecture, considerations- Front end Implementation-Data conversions-Zero IF receivers,
BTL-3
Preselect Filters.
MODULE 4 – HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS (6L)
Digital hardware choices- Key hardware elements, DSP processors and FPGA , Trade-offs in using CO-4
DSPs, FPGAs, and ASICs and its combination, Power management issues BTL-2
MODULE 5 – SMART ANTENNA SYSTEMS FOR SDR (6L)
ADC and DAC conversion Parameters of ideal data converters and its architectures, Techniques
CO-5
to improve data converter performance, - Antenna requirements -Benefits of smart antennas,
BTL-2
Structures for beam forming systems.
TEXT BOOKS
Software Radio Architecture: Object-Oriented Approaches to Wireless Systems Engineering by
1.
Joseph Mitola Wiley-Interscience; 1st edition 2000
REFERENCE BOOKS
Bard, Kovarik: Software Defined Radio, The Software Communications Architecture, Wiley2007,
1.
3rd Edition.
2. J H Reed, Software defined Radio, Prentice Hall,2002
E BOOKS
1. http://s1.downloadmienphi.net/file/downloadfile6/192/1385263.pdf
2 http://www.ac0c.com/attachments/An_Introduction_to_Software_Defined_Radios_v2a.pdf

1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5BVJmtyp7_E
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BK9QkHxeYQI

254
 RADIO-FREQUENCY IDENTIFICATION (RFID) AND ITS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 2
APPLICATIONS
COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4482 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Seminar/
First Periodical Second Periodical Surprise Test
Assignments/ Attendance ESE
Assessment Assessment / Quiz
Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
Radio frequency identification system (RFID) is an automatic technology and aids
machines or computers to identify objects, record metadata or control individual
target through radio waves. Connecting RFID reader to the terminal of Internet, the
Course readers can identify, track, and monitor the objects attached with tags globally,
Description automatically, and in real time, if needed. RFID is often seen as a prerequisite for the
IoT. Thus, this course introduces features and characteristics of readers and tags,
typical frequencies, components, antennas, middleware, standards for electronic
product coding. It also discusses the various applications using RFID.
1. Learn RFID evolution, systems, and classifications
2. Understand the RFID readers and tags, transceivers etc.
Course
3. Get familiarize with RFID reader antennas and tag antennas
Objective
4. Study various RFID protocols
5. Understand various RFID based applications.
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Describe RFID evolution, systems, and classifications
Course 2. Differentiate RFID readers and tags, transceivers etc.
Outcome 3. Examine the performance of reader antennas and tag antennas
4. Classify the various RFID protocols
5. Discuss the RFID based applications.
Prerequisites: Basics of Antenna theory, Basics of communication Systems
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2
CO-2 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - 2 - - - 2
CO-3 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2

255
CO-4 1 1 - 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2
CO-5 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: BASICS FOR RFID (6L)
Introduction, history and evolution of RFID technology, RFID systems and terminology,
Types of RFID- frequency bands of RFID – Passive, Semi passive and active Tags,
CO-1
Communication Protocols, Electromagnetic waves.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
The Internet of Things and UHF RFID
MODULE 2: RFID READERS AND TAGS (6L)

Radio Architecture, Radio components-Amplifiers, Mixers, Oscillators, Filters, Digital –

analog Conversion, Circulators and directional couplers, RFID transmitters, RFID
CO-2
receivers, Power, RF to DC, Tags IC overall design challenges, Packaging.
BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Packaging: No Small Matter

MODULE 3: READER ANTENNAS AND TAG ANTENNAS (6L)

Antenna for fixed readers, Antennas for handheld and Portable Readers, Near –field
antennas, Cable and connectors, Impedance matching and power transfer, Dipoles and
CO-3
derivatives, tags and the local environment, Near-filed and Hybrid tags antennas.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
General Antenna Theory and Practice
MODULE 4: RFID PROTOCOLS (6L)
EPC global generation 1-Class 0, class 1 Generation 1, ISO 18000-6B, ISO 18000-6C, ISO
18000-extensions, Battery –Assisted Tags, sensors, Active Device protocols. CO-4
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
RFID Protocols: The Source Docs, RFID Protocols: Security and Privacy
MODULE 5: RFID APPLICATIONS (6L)
Aircraft identification, Railcar tracking, automobile tolling , animal tracking, Container
tracking, supply chain tracking for consumer goods, RFID use in pharmaceutical. CO-5
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
UWB Tags, Cold Chain Tracking
TEXT BOOKS
V.Daniel Hunt, Albert Pugila and Mike Pugila, “RFID- A-guide to Radio Frequency
1.
identification” A John Wiley and Sons- 2007.
2 Daniel M. Dobkin,” The RF in RFID”- second edition, Newness Pubilcation-2013
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Albert Lozano-Nieto “RFID Design Fundamentals and Applications” CRC press-2010

256
 Syed A. Ahson , Mohammad Ilyas RFID Handbook: Applications, Technology, Security,
2.
and Privacy,CRC press-2008
Jari-Pascal Curty , Michel Declercq , Catherine Dehollain , Norbert Joehl “ Design and
3
Optimization of Passive UHF RFID Systems “Springer-2007.
E BOOKS
1. https://rfid.atlasrfidstore.com/basics-of-an-rfid-system-ebookText book companion
2 https://www.elektor.com/rfid-ebook
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105101008/524_AutoMer/point16/point.html
2. RFID (web), https://youtu.be/15GeJRg4XR0

COURSE TITLE MODERN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4483 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
Internal Assessment – 50 %
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test / ESE
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance
Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%
This course gives the fundamentals of wireless communication and explains the web
of concepts underpinning these advances at a level accessible to an audience with a
basic background in probability and digital communication. Topics covered include
Course
MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) communication, space-time coding,
Description
opportunistic communication, OFDM and CDMA. The concepts are illustrated using
many examples from wireless systems such as GSM, IS-95 (CDMA), IS-856 (1EV-DO),
Flash OFDM and Array Comm SDMA systems.
1. To familiarize with the fundamentals of communication systems.
2. To infer the requirements of mobile communication as compared to static
communication
Course
3. To identify the requirements of communication network and mobile networks.
Objective
4. To summarize the fundamentals of mobile communication systems with their
standards.
5. To identify and choose various short range wireless communication.

257
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline the evolution, types and functioning of wireless communication system and
standards, fundamentals of analog and digital transmission.
2. Summarize the concepts of modern wireless network LANs and cellular network
Course
systems.
Outcome
3. Explain various multiple access techniques for Wireless Communication.
4. Compare the various wireless cellphone generations and multiplexing techniques.
5. Discuss the design of short wireless networks such as bluetooth, cordless, WiMax
etc.,"
Prerequisites: Nil
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 1 3 -
CO-2 3 3 2 1 - 2 1 - - - - 1 3 -

CO-3 3 3 2 1 - 2 1 - - - - 1 3 -
CO-4 3 3 3 1 - 2 1 - - - - 1 3 -
CO-5 3 3 3 1 - 2 1 - - - - 1 3 -
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: FUNDAMENTALS (6L)
Introduction: Wireless communication systems, Applications of wireless communication
systems, Types of wireless communication systems. CO-1
Transmission Fundamentals: Time domain & Frequency domain concepts, Analog vs. Digital BTL-2
data transmission, channel capacity, transmission media.
MODULE 2: CONCEPTS OF NETWORKS (6L)

Communication Networks: LANs, MANs, WANs, circuit switching, packet switching, ATM CO-2
Cellular Networks: Cells, duplexing, multiplexing, voice coding BTL-2

MODULE 3: MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNIQUES (6L)

CO-3
FDMA, TDMA, SDMA, CDMA, Spread Spectrum, Packet Radio: ALOHA and Slotted ALOHA
BTL-3
MODULE 4: WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES & STANDARDS (6L)
Cellphone Generations: 1G, 2G, 2.5G, 3G & 4G. CO-4
Beyond 3G: IMT-2000, W-CDMA, CDMA 2000, EDGE, OFDM. BTL-3
MODULE 5: SHORT RANGE NETWORKS (6L)
Short-Range Wireless Networks: Unlicensed spectrum, Wireless LANs, cordless systems, CO-5
IrDA, Bluetooth, wireless Local Loop, WiMAX. BTL-3

258
TEXT BOOKS
William Stallings, “Wireless Communications And Networks”, 2nd EDITION, Pearson
1.
Education 2005.
Andy Dornan, “Essential Guide to Wireless Communications Applications”, 2nd Edition,
2.
Prentice Hall, 2002.
Theodore, S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications, Principles”, 2nd Edition., PHI, 2002.
3.

Mischa Schwartz, “Mobile Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2013.

4.

REFERENCE BOOKS
Kaveh Pah Laven and P. Krishna Murthy , “Principles of Wireless Networks, Pearson
1
Education, 2002.
2 Andreaws F. Molisch , “Wireless Communications” , Wiley India, 2006
MOOC
1 http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/wireless-communication.html

https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-science/6-450-
2 principles-of-digital-communications-i-fall-2006/video-lectures/lecture-20-
introduction-of-wireless-communication/

COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO SENSOR TECHNOLOGY CREDITS 2

COURSE
COURSE CODE ECD4484 NE L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CATEGORY
24th ACM, LEARNING
Version 1.0 Approval Details BTL-3
30.05.2018 LEVEL
ASSESSMENT SCHEME
First Second Seminar/
Surprise Test
Periodical Periodical Assignments/ Attendance ESE
/ Quiz
Assessment Assessment Project
15% 15% 10% 5% 5% 50%

The course provides good knowledge of working of different types of sensors used in
Course
various application areas. The course also provides knowledge of interfacing of
Description
electronic circuits with different sensors for it's applications in different fields.

Course The main objective of this course is to give an introduce about various applications
Objective of sensor technology in line with advancements in technology

259
 Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Outline the concepts and characteristics of sensors
Course 2. Summarize the physical principles of sensors
Outcome 3. Describe the interface electronic circuits
4. Classify the different types of sensors for various applications.
5. Discuss the various sensor materials and technology used in designing sensors
Prerequisites: Basic Electronics fundamentals
CO, PO AND PSO MAPPING
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
CO-1 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 1
CO-2 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 1
CO-3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 1
CO-4 2 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1
CO-5 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1
1: Weakly related, 2: Moderately related and 3: Strongly related
MODULE 1: SENSOR FUNDAMENTALS AND CHARACTERISTICS (6L)
Sensors, Signals and Systems; Sensor Classification; Units of Measurements; Sensor
Characteristics. CO-1
Suggested Readings: BTL-2
Advanced sensors and its characteristics
MODULE 2: PHYSICAL PRINCIPLES OF SENSING (6L)
Electric Charges, Fields, and Potentials; Capacitance; Magnetism; Induction; Resistance;
Piezoelectric Effect; Hall Effect; Temperature and Thermal Properties of Material.
Electric Charges, Fields, and Potentials; Capacitance; Magnetism; Induction; Resistance; CO-2
Piezoelectric Effect; Hall Effect; Temperature and Thermal Properties of Material BTL-2
Suggested Readings:
Heat Transfer; Light; Dynamic Models of Sensor Elements
MODULE 3 INTERFACING SENSORING CIRCUIT (6L)
Input Characteristics of Interface Circuits, Amplifiers, Excitation Circuits, Analog to Digital
Converters, Direct Digitization and Processing, Bridge Circuits CO-3
Suggested Readings: BTL-3
Batteries for Low Power Sensors
MODULE 4: SENSORS IN DIFFERENT APPLICATION AREA (6L)

260
 Occupancy and Motion Detectors- Ultrasonic sensors, Visible and Near Infrared Light motion
detectors, far infrared motion detectors. Temperature sensors- Thermistors & Optical
CO-4
temperature sensors.
BTL-3
Suggested Readings:
Sensor application in automobiles
MODULE 5: SENSOR MATERIAL AND TECHNOLOGY (6L)
Materials, Surface Processing, Nano-Technology.
CO-5
Suggested Readings:
BTL-3
Technology of sensors in robotics application
TEXT BOOKS
J. Fraden, Handbook of Modern Sensors:Physical, Designs, and Applications, AIP Press,
1.
Springer, fourth edition, 2010
D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, PHI Publication, New Delhi, second edition, 2003.
2.

REFERENCE BOOKS
Mechatronics- Ganesh S. Hegde, Published by University Science Press (An imprint of
1.
Laxmi Publication Private Limited), Second edition, 2009.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.springer.com/la/book/9781493900404
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/3
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod2.pdf

261